From 27accb929aa8061d3aea791560a1bffd3876f0c7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Norbert Preining Date: Sat, 6 Feb 2021 03:00:58 +0000 Subject: CTAN sync 202102060300 --- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt | 28 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md | 22 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.dtx | 5 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf | Bin 212976 -> 198724 bytes macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf | Bin 2454006 -> 2414308 bytes macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css | 10 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html | 4300 ++++++++++---------- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf | Bin 295940 -> 297131 bytes macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex | 53 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf | Bin 189481 -> 188982 bytes macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx | 38 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx | 575 +-- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.ins | 7 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex | 3383 --------------- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.dtx | 5 +- macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty | 4 +- macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.dtx | 244 +- macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.pdf | Bin 292336 -> 297774 bytes macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/README.md | 6 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.pdf | Bin 574097 -> 574086 bytes .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.pdf | Bin 621765 -> 621765 bytes .../contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaExercise.pdf | Bin 578384 -> 578288 bytes .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.pdf | Bin 583234 -> 583234 bytes .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLetter.pdf | Bin 589130 -> 589034 bytes macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPhD.pdf | Bin 649849 -> 653814 bytes .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPoster.pdf | Bin 558963 -> 558963 bytes macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf | Bin 676331 -> 676235 bytes .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaReport.pdf | Bin 550427 -> 550561 bytes .../contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.pdf | Bin 586680 -> 586772 bytes .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaThesis.pdf | Bin 644404 -> 645504 bytes .../tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex | 8 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex | 4 +- .../tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib | 4 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex | 4 +- .../tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco | 4 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex | 4 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex | 4 +- .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex | 47 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex | 4 +- .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPub.tex | 8 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaReport.tex | 4 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex | 118 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex | 37 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty | 8 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty | 8 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty | 8 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty | 8 +- .../tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty | 8 +- .../latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa.sty | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a0paper.clo | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a1paper.clo | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a2paper.clo | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a3paper.clo | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a4paper.clo | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a5paper.clo | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-pgfplots.sty | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudabeamer.cls | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.def | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.sty | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaexercise.cls | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudafonts.sty | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaleaflet.cls | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaletter.cls | 8 +- .../contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudalettersize10pt.clo | 4 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudamecheng.cfg | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaposter.cls | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudapub.cls | 10 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudarules.sty | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasciposter.cls | 8 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasize9pt.clo | 4 +- macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudathesis.cfg | 58 +- macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/CHANGELOG.md | 10 + macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/README.md | 4 +- macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/doc/yathesis-fr.pdf | Bin 6337461 -> 6361152 bytes .../contrib/yathesis/exemples/specimen/these.pdf | Bin 1246385 -> 1246263 bytes macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/source/yathesis.dtx | 188 +- 76 files changed, 2809 insertions(+), 6591 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex (limited to 'macros') diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt index 94bfe295d2..6eeff73b71 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/ChangeLog.txt @@ -1,4 +1,30 @@ -2020-01-14 7.00d David Carlisle +2021-02-04 Ulrike Fischer + * corrected the definition of \begin/\end in \pdfstringdef + * removed patches for russian, new version is on ctan + * removed patches for danish, dutch, finnish, portugues, usorbian, + swedish, slovene, macedonian, ukrainian. + This doesn't affect the output, but can give warnings in the log until + the languages files adapt their definitions. + * removed a outdated patch for \texttilde + * moved language patches to a extra file for easier handling + * removed \HyPsd@BabelPatch and the related code as no longer + needed with a current babel. + * added Euro to encoding of form field font (issue 145) + * removed patches for ngerman/german: these are now in babel-german + * removed patches for french, unneeded according the + babel-french maintainer. + * set unicode to true by default for all engines. + * removed outdated code to fix the first page boxlevel. + * removed outdated code to fix old ltxcmds code + * removed outdated code to fix fancyvrb + * removed code related to /Hid - deprecated in PDF 1.2 + * removed patches for greeknumerals, the code is now in + babel-greek. + * added norsk to autoref languages (PR 158) + * added danish to autoref language (PR 159) + * corrected french language (PR 160) + +2020-01-14 7.00d David Carlisle * Test for newer GhostScript releases in dvips output https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/524163/1090 * Delete doc/options.pdf diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md index 5432d88e7d..828532e08e 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/README.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ # README for hyperref bundle -Version 2020-05-15 v7.00e +Version 2021-02-04 v7.00g ## INTRODUCTION @@ -37,6 +37,8 @@ The main repository of hyperref is located at github ## INSTALLATION +The easiest is to use the package manager of the TeX System. + ### Installation with ZIP file in TDS format The ZIP file [hyperref.tds.zip](http://mirrors.ctan.org/install/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref.tds.zip) @@ -79,6 +81,10 @@ Example for TeXLive: * Heiko Oberdiek (inactive) * The LaTeX3 Project +## LICENSE + +LATEX Project Public License, version 1.3c or later. + ## BUG REPORTS A bug report should contain: @@ -132,16 +138,4 @@ Responsible for the additions to PU encoding for Arabi is ``` * ... -## TODO - - * modules - * bookmark organisation - * documentation - * PDF threads - * more for PDF forms - * per object setting - * vary gap between text and box - * PostScript driver: the current implementation doesn't really support - nested links. The start positions should be remembered in a stack, - but there are complications with page breaks. - * ... + diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.dtx index c0747046ad..2687a448de 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/backref.dtx @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ %% Copyright (C) 1995-2000 David Carlisle, Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2021 The LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -32,12 +32,13 @@ %\ProvidesFile{backref.drv} % \fi % \ProvidesFile{backref.dtx} - [2020/01/14 v1.40 Bibliographical back referencing]% + [2021/02/04 v1.41 Bibliographical back referencing]% % % \CheckSum{768} % % \iffalse %<*driver> +\PassOptionsToPackage{numbered}{hypdoc} \documentclass{ltxdoc} \usepackage[numbered]{hypdoc} \usepackage{bmhydoc} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf index 7cb9b13808..0e0a9b0bef 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/backref.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf index 1ac908174f..d93f8f2cb8 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css index c56985d497..ea1c3e45c1 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.css @@ -160,12 +160,14 @@ p.indent{text-indent:0;} p + p{margin-top:1em;} p + div, p + pre {margin-top:1em;} div + p, pre + p {margin-top:1em;} +a { overflow-wrap: break-word; word-wrap: break-word; word-break: break-word; hyphens: auto; } @media print {div.crosslinks {visibility:hidden;}} a img { border-top: 0; border-left: 0; border-right: 0; } center { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; } td center { margin-top:0em; margin-bottom:0em; } .Canvas { position:relative; } img.math{vertical-align:middle;} +div.par-math-display, div.math-display{text-align:center;} li p.indent { text-indent: 0em } li p:first-child{ margin-top:0em; } li p:last-child, li div:last-child { margin-bottom:0.5em; } @@ -182,7 +184,7 @@ div.obeylines-v p { margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; } td.displaylines {text-align:center; white-space:nowrap;} .centerline {text-align:center;} .rightline {text-align:right;} -div.verbatim {font-family: monospace,monospace; white-space: nowrap; text-align:left; clear:both; } +pre.verbatim {font-family: monospace,monospace; text-align:left; clear:both; } .fbox {padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } div.fbox {display:table} div.center div.fbox {text-align:center; clear:both; padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } @@ -242,6 +244,7 @@ table.pmatrix {width:100%;} span.bar-css {text-decoration:overline;} img.cdots{vertical-align:middle;} .partToc a, .partToc, .likepartToc a, .likepartToc {line-height: 200%; font-weight:bold; font-size:110%;} +.chapterToc a, .chapterToc, .likechapterToc a, .likechapterToc, .appendixToc a, .appendixToc {line-height: 200%; font-weight:bold;} .index-item, .index-subitem, .index-subsubitem {display:block} div.caption {text-indent:-2em; margin-left:3em; margin-right:1em; text-align:left;} div.caption span.id{font-weight: bold; white-space: nowrap; } @@ -250,7 +253,6 @@ p.bibitem { text-indent: -2em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top:0.6em; margin-bottom p.bibitem-p { text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top:0.6em; margin-bottom:0.6em; } .paragraphHead, .likeparagraphHead { margin-top:2em; font-weight: bold;} .subparagraphHead, .likesubparagraphHead { font-weight: bold;} -.quote {margin-bottom:0.25em; margin-top:0.25em; margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em; text-align:justify;} .verse{white-space:nowrap; margin-left:2em} div.maketitle {text-align:center;} h2.titleHead{text-align:center;} @@ -258,9 +260,9 @@ div.maketitle{ margin-bottom: 2em; } div.author, div.date {text-align:center;} div.thanks{text-align:left; margin-left:10%; font-size:85%; font-style:italic; } div.author{white-space: nowrap;} -.quotation {margin-bottom:0.25em; margin-top:0.25em; margin-left:1em; } -.abstract p {margin-left:5%; margin-right:5%;} +div.abstract p {margin-left:5%; margin-right:5%;} div.abstract {width:100%;} +.abstracttitle{text-align:center;margin-bottom:1em;} div.tabular, div.center div.tabular {text-align: center; margin-top:0.5em; margin-bottom:0.5em; } table.tabular td p{margin-top:0em;} table.tabular {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html index 5dc0901e62..e743ee9640 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.html @@ -25,256 +25,169 @@ href="https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues" class="url" >https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues)
2020-05-15 v7.00e
+class="ec-lmr-12">2021-02-04 v7.00g

Contents

- 1 1 Introduction -
2  2 Implicit behavior -
3  3 Package options -
 3.1   3.1 General options -
 3.2   3.2 Options for destination names -
 3.3   3.3 Configuration options -
 3.4   3.4 Backend drivers -
 3.5   3.5 Extension options -
 3.6   3.6 PDF-specific display options -
 3.7   3.7 PDF display and information options -
 3.8   3.8 Option pdfinfo -
 3.9   3.9 Big alphabetical list -
4  4 Additional user macros -
 4.1   4.1 Bookmark macros -
  4.1.1 Setting bookmarks -
  4.1.2 Replacement macros -
 4.2 Utility macros -
5 New Features -
 5.1 Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ -
 5.2 Field option ‘calculatesortkey’ -
 5.3 Option ‘localanchorname’ -
 5.4 Option ‘customdriver’ -
 5.5 Option ‘psdextra’ -
 5.6 \XeTeXLinkBox -
 5.7 \IfHyperBooleanExists and \IfHyperBoolean -
 5.8 \unichar -
 5.9 \ifpdfstringunicode -
 5.10 Customizing index style file with \nohyperpage -
 5.11 Experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’ -
 5.12 Option ‘pdfa’ -
 5.13 Option ‘linktoc’ added - -
 5.14 Option ‘pdfnewwindow’ changed -
 5.15 Flag options for PDF forms -
 5.16 Option ‘pdfversion’ -
 5.17 Field option ‘name’ -
 5.18 Option ‘pdfencoding’ -
 5.19 Color options/package hycolor -
 5.20 Option pdfusetitle -
 5.21 Starred form of \autoref -
 5.22 Link border style -
 5.23 Option   4.2 Pagelabels +
  4.3 Utility macros +
 5 New Features +
  5.1 Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ +
  5.2 Field option ‘calculatesortkey’ +
  5.3 Option ‘localanchorname’ +
  5.4 Option ‘customdriver’ +
  5.5 Option ‘psdextra’ +
  5.6 \XeTeXLinkBox +
  5.7 \IfHyperBooleanExists and \IfHyperBoolean +
  5.8 \unichar +
  5.9 \ifpdfstringunicode +
  5.10 Customizing index style file with \nohyperpage +
  5.11 Experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’ +
  5.12 Option ‘pdfa’ +
  5.13 Option ‘linktoc’ added +
  5.14 Option ‘pdfnewwindow’ changed + +
  5.15 Flag options for PDF forms +
  5.16 Option ‘pdfversion’ +
  5.17 Field option ‘name’ +
  5.18 Option ‘pdfencoding’ +
  5.19 Color options/package hycolor +
  5.20 Option pdfusetitle +
  5.21 Starred form of \autoref +
  5.22 Link border style +
  5.23 Option bookmarksdepth -
 5.24 Option   5.24 Option pdfescapeform -
 5.25 Default driver setting -
 5.26 Backref entries -
 5.27 \phantomsection -
6 Acrobat-specific behavior -
7 PDF and HTML forms -
 7.1 Forms environment parameters -
 7.2 Forms optional parameters -
8 Defining a new driver -
9 Special support for other packages -
 9.1 Package Compatibility -
  9.1.1 algorithm -
  9.1.2 amsmath -
  9.1.3 amsrefs -
  9.1.4 arydshln, longtable -
  9.1.5 babel/magyar.ldf -
  9.1.6 babel/spanish.ldf -
  9.1.7 bibentry -
  9.1.8 bigfoot -
  9.1.9 chappg -
  9.1.10 cite -
  9.1.11 count1to -
  9.1.12 dblaccnt -
  9.1.13 easyeqn -
  9.1.14 ellipsis -
  9.1.15 float -
  9.1.16 endnotes -
  9.1.17 foiltex -
  9.1.18 footnote -
  9.1.19 geometry -
  9.1.20 IEEEtran.cls -
  9.1.21 index -
  9.1.22 lastpage -
  9.1.23 linguex -
  9.1.24 ltabptch -
  9.1.25 mathenv -
  9.1.26 minitoc-hyper -
  9.1.27 multind -
  9.1.28 natbib -
  9.1.29 nomencl -
  9.1.30 parskip -
  9.1.31 prettyref - -
  9.1.32 ntheorem -
  9.1.33 setspace -
  9.1.34 sidecap -
  9.1.35 subfigure -
  9.1.36 titleref -
  9.1.37 tabularx -
  9.1.38 titlesec -
  9.1.39 ucs/utf8x.def -
  9.1.40 varioref -
  9.1.41 verse -
  9.1.42 vietnam -
  9.1.43 XeTeX -
10 Limitations -
 10.1 Wrapped/broken link support -
 10.2 Links across pages -
 10.3 Footnotes -
11 Hints -
 11.1 Spaces in option values -
 11.2 Index with makeindex -
 11.3 Warning   5.25 Default driver setting +
  5.26 Backref entries +
  5.27 \phantomsection +
 6 Acrobat-specific behavior +
 7 PDF and HTML forms +
  7.1 Forms environment parameters +
  7.2 Forms optional parameters +
 8 Defining a new driver +
 9 Special support for other packages +
  9.1 Package Compatibility +
 10 Limitations +
  10.1 Wrapped/broken link support +
  10.2 Links across pages +
  10.3 Footnotes +
 11 Hints +
  11.1 Spaces in option values +
  11.2 Index with makeindex +
  11.3 Warning "bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0" -
 11.4 Link anchors in figures -
 11.5 Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries: -
 11.6 Footnotes -
 11.7 Subordinate counters -
12 History and acknowledgments -
13 GNU Free Documentation License -
 13.1 Applicability and definitions -
 13.2 Verbatim copying -
 13.3 Copying in quantity -
 13.4 Modifications -
 13.5 Combining documents -
 13.6 Collections of documents -
 13.7 Aggregation with independent works -
 13.8 Translation -
 13.9 Termination -
 13.10 Future revisions of this license +
  11.4 Link anchors in figures +
  11.5 Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries: +
  11.6 Footnotes +
  11.7 Subordinate counters +
 12 History and acknowledgments +
 13 GNU Free Documentation License +
  13.1 Applicability and definitions +
  13.2 Verbatim copying +
  13.3 Copying in quantity +
  13.4 Modifications +
  13.5 Combining documents +
  13.6 Collections of documents +
  13.7 Aggregation with independent works +
  13.8 Translation +
  13.9 Termination +
  13.10 Future revisions of this license
+ +

1 Introduction

@@ -289,8 +202,6 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\special commands which a driver can turn into hypert it also provides new commands to allow the user to write ad hoc hypertext links, including those to external documents and URLs. - -

The package is currently maintained at https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/ and issues should be @@ -388,6 +299,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">"’ characters should be escaped with a backslash (\), and if it looks like a URL name it may cause problems. + +

However, the drivers intended to produce only PDF use literal PostScript or PDF \special @@ -414,8 +327,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dvips class="ec-lmbx-10">dvipsone

produces \special commands tailored for dvipsone - +class="ec-lmss-10">dvipsone
ps2pdf
dvips -z, but the DVI file is not portable. The main a HyperTeX \special commands is that you can also use the document in hypertext DVI viewers, such as xdvi. +class="ec-lmss-10">xdvi. +
driverfallback
If a driver is not given and cannot be autodetected, then use the driver option, given as value to this option driverfallback. Example: -
+

driverfallback=dvipdfm

+class="ec-lmvtt-10">driverfallback=dvipdfm

Autodetected drivers (pdftex, xetex, driverfallback. However a DVI driver program is run class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref uses the driver, given by driverfallback. If the driver is already specified or can be autodetected, then option driverfallback is ignored.

- +class="ec-lmss-10">driverfallback is ignored.

2 Implicit behavior

This package can be used with more or less any normal LaTeX document by specifying in the document preamble -

+
 \usepackage{hyperref}
-
+

Make sure it comes last of your loaded packages, to give it a fighting chance of not being over-written, @@ -553,7 +465,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypersetup macro. When the package is loaded, a file class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperref.cfg is read if it can be found, and this is a convenient place to set options on a site-wide basis.

Note however that some options (for example unicode) can only be used as packge options, and not +class="ec-lmvtt-10">unicode) can only be used as package options, and not in \hypersetup as the option settings are processed as the package is read.

As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by: @@ -563,20 +475,20 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperref.cfg setting up the look of links, adding bac PDF display default: -

+
      \hypersetup{backref,
-      
pdfpagemode=FullScreen, -  
colorlinks=true} -
+ pdfpagemode=FullScreen, + colorlinks=true} +

  • A global option in the file, which is passed down to hyperref: -
    +
          \documentclass[dvips]{article}
    -
    +

  • File-specific options in the \usepackage commands, which override the ones set in class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperref.cfg: -
    +
          \usepackage[colorlinks=false]{hyperref}
    -      
    \hypersetup{pdftitle={A Perfect Day}} -
    + \hypersetup{pdftitle={A Perfect Day}} +

  • As seen in the previous example, information entries (pdftitle, pdfauthor, …) should be set after the package is loaded. Otherwise LaTeX expands the values of these options prematurely. Also LaTeX strips @@ -597,10 +509,10 @@ given as package option. They are not necessary in \hypersetup. -

    +
     \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 0}]{hyperref}
    - 
    \hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0} -
    +\hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0} +

    Package ‘kvoptions-patch’ patches LaTeX to make it aware of key value options and to prevent premature value expansions. @@ -617,7 +529,7 @@ however.

    Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size.

    \refstepcounter is called. Thus there is a counter name and value. Both are used to construct the destination name. By default the counter value follows the counter name separated by a dot. Example for the fourth chapter: -
    +

    chapter.4

    +class="ec-lmvtt-10">chapter.4

    This scheme is used by:

    hyperref calls this macro each time, it uses a destination name. The macro must be expandable and expects the destination name as only argument. As example, the macro is redefined to add a prefix to all destination names: -
    +
    -
    +
     \renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{\jobname-#1}
    -
    -

    + +

    In document docA the destination name chapter.2 becomes docA-chapter.2.

    Destination names can also be used from the outside in URIs(, if the driver has not removed or changed them), for example: -

    +
    -
    +
     http://somewhere/path/file.pdf#nameddest=chapter.4
    -
    -

    + +

    However using a number seems unhappy. If another chapter is added before, the number changes. But it is very difficult to pass a new name for the destination to the anchor setting process that is usually deep hidden in the internals. The first name of \label after the anchor setting seems a good approximation: -

    +
    -
    +
       \section{Introduction}
    - 
      \label{intro} -
    -

    +  \label{intro} + +

    Option destlabel checks for each \label, if there is a new destination name active and replaces the @@ -818,15 +730,15 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\autoref). This redefinition is also available as class="ec-lmvtt-10">\HyperDestLabelReplace, thus that an own redefinition can use it. The following example also adds a prefix for all destination names: -

    +
    -
    +
     \renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{%
    - 
      \jobname-\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}% - 
    } -
    -

    +  \jobname-\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}% +} + +

    The other case that only files prefixed that do not have a corresponding \label is more complicate, because \pdfstrcmp of pdfT\strcmp of XƎTEX, package pdftexcmds also supports LuaTEX): -

    +
    -
    +
     \usepackage{pdftexcmds}
    - 
    \makeatletter - 
    \renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{% - 
      \ifcase\pdf@strcmp{#1}{\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}} % - 
        \jobname-#1% - 
      \else - 
        \HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}% - 
      \fi - 
    } - 
    \makeatother -
    -

    +\makeatletter +\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{% +  \ifcase\pdf@strcmp{#1}{\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}} % +    \jobname-#1% +  \else +    \HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}% +  \fi +} +\makeatother + +

    With option destlabel destinations can also named manually, if the destination is not yet renamed: -

    +

    \HyperDestRename{}{newname}

    +class="ec-lmvtt-10">}

    Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by \hypertarget.

    id="x1-70003.3">Configuration options
    breaklinks +

    This option is in hyperref only used in the dviwindo driver, + in all other cases it doesn’t do anything sensible—it neither + allows nor prevents links to be broken. The ocgx2 package + checks the state of the boolean.

    @@ -998,7 +910,7 @@ class="td11"> boolean +

    Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently support this.

    @@ -1015,14 +927,14 @@ class="td11">
    boolean false both -

    Allows link text to break across lines; since this cannot be - accommodated in PDF, it is only set true by default if the - pdftex driver is used. This makes links on multiple lines - into different PDF links to the same target.

    boolean true -

    Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor +

    Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor at the top left corner. If this is turned off, \printindex will not contain valid hyperlinks.

    false -

    Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently support this.

    -

    Note for option

    Note for option breaklinks: The correct value is automatically set according to the driver features. It can be overwritten for drivers that do not support broken links. However, at any case, the link area will be wrong and displaced. -

    +

    3.4 Backend drivers

    -

    If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in the following order: +

    If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in the following order:

    1. Autodetection, some TeX processors can be detected at TeX macro level (pdfTeX, XeTeX, @@ -1039,7 +951,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\Hy@defaultdriver. The macro takes a driver file name
    2. Package default is hypertex.
    -

    Many distributions are using a driver file

    Many distributions are using a driver file hypertex.cfg that define \Hy@defaultdriver with hdvips. This @@ -1048,8 +960,8 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dvips provides much more features than hypertex for PDF generation.

    @@ -1058,18 +970,18 @@ id="TBL-5-2"> class="td01">driverfallback +

    Its value is used as driver option

    +

    if the driver is not given or autodetected.

    dvipdfm driver. < class="td01">dvipdfmx dvipdfmx driver. < class="td01">dvips dvips driver. class="td01">dvipsone dvipsone driver. class="td01">dviwindo @@ -1111,35 +1023,35 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">dviwindo Windows previewer. class="td01">hypertex pdftex program. ps2pdf dvips. class="td01">tex4ht VTeX; the PDF and HTML backends are detected class="td01">vtexpdfmark +

    For use with XeTeX (using backend for dvipdfm).

    @@ -1199,7 +1111,7 @@ class="td01"> class="td01">
    -

    Its value is used as driver option

    -

    if the driver is not given or autodetected.

    dvipdfm -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the dvipdfm driver.

    -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the dvipdfmx driver.

    -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the dvips driver.

    -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the dvipsone driver.

    -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the dviwindo Windows previewer.

    -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the HyperTeX-compliant drivers.

    latex2html -

    Redefines a few macros for compatibility with

    Redefines a few macros for compatibility with latex2html.

    nativepdf -

    An alias for

    An alias for dvips

    pdfmark -

    An alias for

    An alias for dvips

    pdftex -

    Sets up

    Sets up hyperref for use with the pdftex program.

    -

    Redefines a few macros for compatibility with Ghostscript’s PDF writer, +

    Redefines a few macros for compatibility with Ghostscript’s PDF writer, otherwise identical to dvips.

    -

    For use with

    For use with TeX4ht

    textures -

    For use with

    For use with Textures

    vtex -

    For use with MicroPress’

    For use with MicroPress’ VTeX; the PDF and HTML backends are detected automatically.

    -

    For use with

    For use with VTeX’s PostScript backend.

    xetex -

    For use with XeTeX (using backend for dvipdfm).

    -

    If you use

    If you use dviwindo, you may need to redefine the macro \wwwbrowser (the default is dviwindo what program to launch. Thus, users of Intern add something like this to hyperref.cfg: -

    +
     \renewcommand{\wwwbrowser}{C:\string\Program\space
    - 
      Files\string\Plus!\string\Microsoft\space - 
      Internet\string\iexplore.exe} -
    -

    -

    +  Files\string\Plus!\string\Microsoft\space +  Internet\string\iexplore.exe} + +

    +

    3.5 Extension options

    extension +

    +

    Sets encap character for hyperindex

    @@ -1354,7 +1266,7 @@ class="td11"> boolean +

    Color for normal internal links.

    +

    Color for anchor text. Ignored by most drivers.

    +

    Color for bibliographical citations in text.

    +

    Color for URLs which open local files.

    +

    Color for Acrobat menu items.

    +

    Color for run links (launch annotations).

    +

    Color for linked URLs.

    +

    Use small caps instead of color for links.

    +

    Hide links (removing color and border).

    @@ -1471,15 +1383,15 @@ class="td01"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-6-27-">
    text -

    Set the file extension (e.g. 

    Set the file extension (e.g. dvi) which will be appended to file links created if you use the xr @@ -1244,7 +1156,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperfigures

    boolean -

    text false -

    Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of each item in the +

    Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of section numbers. This can only work properly if there is a blank line after each @@ -1275,7 +1187,7 @@ class="td11"> boolean

    false -

    Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of each item in the +

    Adds ‘backlink’ text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of page numbers.

    boolean true -

    Makes the page +

    Makes the page numbers of index entries into hyperlinks. Relays on unique page anchors (pageanchor, …) boolean

    true -

    Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the +

    Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the footnote text. Easily broken …

    encap -

    Sets encap character for hyperindex

    text section -

    make text (

    make text (section), page number (page), both (all) @@ -1332,7 +1244,7 @@ class="td11"> boolean

    false -

    make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF +

    make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

    boolean false -

    allow links to break over lines by making links over +

    allow links to break over lines by making links over multiple lines into PDF links to the same target

    false -

    Colors the text of links and anchors. The colors +

    Colors the text of links and anchors. The colors chosen depend on the the type of link. At present the only types of link distinguished are citations, page references, URLs, local file references, and other @@ -1368,7 +1280,7 @@ class="td11"> color

    red -

    Color for normal internal links.

    color black -

    Color for anchor text. Ignored by most drivers.

    color green -

    Color for bibliographical citations in text.

    color cyan -

    Color for URLs which open local files.

    color red -

    Color for Acrobat menu items.

    color filecolor -

    Color for run links (launch annotations).

    color magenta -

    Color for linked URLs.

    allcolors color -

    Set all color options (without border and field +

    Set all color options (without border and field options).

    boolean false -

    Use small caps instead of color for links.

    hidelinks -

    Hide links (removing color and border).

    -

    Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the normal system of the standard +

    Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the normal system of the standard LaTeX color package. -

    +

    3.6 PDF-specific display options

    boolean @@ -1524,7 +1436,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">bookmarksopenlevel +

    to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

    @@ -1581,7 +1493,7 @@ class="td11"> name @@ -1593,7 +1505,7 @@ class="td11"> RGB color +

    The color of the box around citations

    +

    The color of the box around links to files

    +

    The color of the box around normal links

    +

    The color of the box around Acrobat menu links

    +

    The color of the box around links to URLs

    +

    Color of border around ‘run’ links

    +

    Set all border color options

    true -

    A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a +

    A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a manner similar to the table of contents, requiring two passes of LaTeX. Some postprocessing of the bookmark file (file extension boolean

    false -

    If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them +

    If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them with all the subtrees expanded.

    parameter -

    level (

    level (\maxdimen) to which bookmarks are open

    boolean false -

    If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include +

    If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include section numbers.

    text toc -

    to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

    boolean false -

    This option should be used to produce CJK +

    This option should be used to produce CJK bookmarks. Package hyperref supports both normal and preprocessed mode of the CJK Acroread itself) support this. Also note that option ‘CJKbookmarks’ cannot be used together with option ‘unicode’. -

    No mechanism is provided to +

    No mechanism is provided to translate non-Unicode bookmarks to Unicode; for portable PDF documents only Unicode encoding should be used.

    /I -

    How link buttons behave when selected; /I is +

    How link buttons behave when selected; /I is for inverse (the default); the other possibilities are /N (no effect), /O (outline), and /P (inset highlighting).

    0 1 0 -

    The color of the box around citations

    RGB color 0 .5 .5 -

    The color of the box around links to files

    RGB color 1 0 0 -

    The color of the box around normal links

    RGB color 1 0 0 -

    The color of the box around Acrobat menu links

    RGB color 0 1 1 -

    The color of the box around links to URLs

    RGB color 0 .7 .7 -

    Color of border around ‘run’ links

    allbordercolors -

    Set all border color options

    0 0 1 -

    The style of box around links; defaults to a box +

    The style of box around links; defaults to a box with lines of 1pt thickness, but the colorlinks option resets it to produce no border.

    -

    Note that the color of link borders can be specified

    Note that the color of link borders can be specified only as 3 numbers in the range 0..1, giving an RGB color. You cannot use colors defined in TeX. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true. Especially with the help of package (x)color can be used. For further information see description of package hycolor. -

    The bookmark commands are stored in a file called

    The bookmark commands are stored in a file called jobname.out. The files is not processed by LaTeX so any markup is passed through. You can postprocess this file as needed; as an aid @@ -1693,16 +1605,16 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">.out file is not overwritten on the next TeX r line -

    +
     \let\WriteBookmarks\relax
    -
    -

    -

    + +

    +

    3.7 PDF display and information options

    class="td01">baseurl +

    Sets the base URL of the PDF document

    pdftitle +

    Sets the document information Title field

    +

    Sets the document information Author field

    +

    Sets the document information Subject field

    +

    Sets the document information Creator field

    +

    Adds additional text to the document + information Creator field

    +

    Sets the document information Keywords field

    +

    Sets the default PDF ‘view’ for each link

    class="td01">pdfstartview +

    Set the startup page view

    +

    Set the startup page view of remote PDF files

    @@ -1885,22 +1797,22 @@ class="td10"> class="td01">pdfcenterwindow @@ -1909,22 +1821,22 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">R2L (right to left) class="td01">pdfdisplaydoctitle +

    resize document window to fit document size

    class="td01">pdflang +

    PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

    +

    make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

    class="td01">pdfnumcopies +

    number of printed copies

    +

    set PDF page labels

    class="td01">pdfprintclip class="td01">pdfprintpagerange +

    set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

    class="td01">pdftoolbar +

    make PDF toolbar visible

    class="td01">pdfviewclip class="td01">pdfwindowui +

    make PDF user interface elements visible

    +

    Unicode encoded PDF strings

    @@ -2222,11 +2134,11 @@ class="td01"> style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-8-43-">
    -

    URL

    URL

    -

    Sets the base URL of the PDF document

    pdfpagemode -

    name

    name

    empty -

    Determines how the file is opening in +

    Determines how the file is opening in Acrobat; the possibilities are UseNone, UseOutlines is used.

    -

    text

    text

    -

    Sets the document information Title field

    pdfauthor -

    text

    text

    -

    Sets the document information Author field

    pdfsubject -

    text

    text

    -

    Sets the document information Subject field

    pdfcreator -

    text

    text

    -

    Sets the document information Creator field

    addtopdfproducer addtopdfcreator -

    text

    text

    -

    Adds additional text to the document - information Producer field

    pdfkeywords -

    text

    text

    -

    Sets the document information Keywords field

    pdftrapped -

    name

    name

    empty -

    Sets the document information Trapped entry. +

    Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are True, False and Unknown. class="td01">pdfinfo

    -

    key +

    key value list

    empty -

    Alternative interface for setting the document +

    Alternative interface for setting the document information.

    pdfview -

    name

    name

    XYZ -

    Sets the default PDF ‘view’ for each link

    pdfstartpage -

    integer

    integer

    1 -

    Determines on which page the PDF file is +

    Determines on which page the PDF file is opened. An empty value means, the entry is not set.

    -

    name

    name

    Fit -

    Set the startup page view

    pdfremotestartview -

    name

    name

    Fit -

    Set the startup page view of remote PDF files

    pdfpagescrop -

    n +

    n n n n

    -

    Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This +

    Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This should be a set of four numbers

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    false -

    position the document window in the center +

    position the document window in the center of the screen

    pdfdirection -

    name

    name

    empty -

    direction setting. Possible values:

    direction setting. Possible values: L2R (left to right) and R2L (right to left)

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    false -

    display document title instead of file name in +

    display document title instead of file name in title bar

    pdfduplex -

    name

    name

    empty -

    paper handling option for print +

    paper handling option for print dialog. Possible vatues are: Simplex (print single-sided), DuplexFlipLongEdge (duplex and flip on class="td01">pdffitwindow

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    false -

    resize document window to fit document size

    -

    name

    name

    relax -

    PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

    pdfmenubar -

    boolean

    boolean

    true -

    make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

    pdfnewwindow -

    boolean

    boolean

    false -

    make links that open another PDF file start a +

    make links that open another PDF file start a new window

    pdfnonfullscreenpagemode -

    name

    name

    empty -

    page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. +

    page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. Possible values are UseNone, UseOutlines, @@ -2001,21 +1913,21 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">UseOC

    -

    integer

    integer

    empty -

    number of printed copies

    pdfpagelayout -

    name

    name

    empty -

    set layout of PDF pages. Possible values: +

    set layout of PDF pages. Possible values: SinglePage, OneColumn, TwoPageRight class="td01">pdfpagelabels

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    true -

    set PDF page labels

    pdfpagetransition -

    name

    name

    empty -

    set PDF page transition style. Possible values +

    set PDF page transition style. Possible values are Split, Blinds, R, which simply replaces the old page w class="td01">pdfpicktraybypdfsize

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    false -

    specify whether PDF page size is used to select +

    specify whether PDF page size is used to select input paper tray in print dialog

    pdfprintarea -

    name

    name

    empty -

    set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible +

    set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are MediaBox, CropBox, CropBox

    -

    name

    name

    empty -

    set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible +

    set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible values are MediaBox, CropBox, CropBox

    -

    n +

    n n (n n)*

    empty -

    set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

    pdfprintscaling -

    name

    name

    empty -

    page scaling option for print dialog (option +

    page scaling option for print dialog (option /PrintScaling of viewer preferences, PDF 1.6); valid values are None and AppDefault

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    true -

    make PDF toolbar visible

    pdfviewarea -

    name

    name

    empty -

    set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible +

    set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are MediaBox, CropBox, CropBox

    -

    name

    name

    empty -

    set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible +

    set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible values are MediaBox, CropBox, CropBox

    -

    boolean

    boolean

    true -

    make PDF user interface elements visible

    unicode -

    boolean

    boolean

    false true -

    Unicode encoded PDF strings

    -

    Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set using PDF coordinate space, which +

    Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set using PDF coordinate space, which is not the same as TeX’s. The unit is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also \hypercalcbp that is explained on page 47. pdfTeX works by supplying default values for 46. pdfTeX works by supplying default values for XYZ (horizontal × vertical pdfstartview and pdfremotestartview parameters.

    XYZ +

    Fits the page to the window.

    +

    Fits the width of the page to the window.

    +

    Fits the height of the page to the window.

    FitR +

    Fits the page bounding box to the window.

    left top zoom -

    Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one +

    Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one is null, the source link value is used. null null Fit

    -

    Fits the page to the window.

    FitH top -

    Fits the width of the page to the window.

    FitV left -

    Fits the height of the page to the window.

    left bottom right top -

    Fits the rectangle specified by the four +

    Fits the rectangle specified by the four coordinates to the window.

    FitB -

    Fits the page bounding box to the window.

    FitBH top -

    Fits the width of the page bounding box to +

    Fits the width of the page bounding box to the window.

    FitBV left -

    Fits the height of the page bounding box to +

    Fits the height of the page bounding box to the window.

    -

    The

    The pdfpagelayout can be one of the following values.

    @@ -2350,40 +2262,40 @@ id="TBL-10-2"> class="td01">SinglePage +

    Displays a single page; advancing flips the page

    +

    Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling.

    class="td01">
    -

    Displays a single page; advancing flips the page

    OneColumn -

    Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling.

    TwoColumnLeft -

    Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to +

    Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the left.

    TwoColumnRight -

    Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to +

    Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the right.

    TwoPageLeft -

    Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF +

    Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF 1.5).

    TwoPageRight -

    Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF +

    Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF 1.5).

    -

    Finally, the

    Finally, the pdfpagetransition can be one of the following values, where /Di stands for direction of motion in degrees, generally in 90/M is for motion, either in (/I) or out (/O).

    Blinds +

    A box sweeps in or out.

    @@ -2458,14 +2370,14 @@ class="td01">Split +

    Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page.

    +

    Simply replaces the old page with the new one.

    Push Cover Fade
    /Dm -

    Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep +

    Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep in the same direction to reveal the new page.

    Box /M -

    A box sweeps in or out.

    Dissolve -

    The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal +

    The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal the new page.

    Glitter /Di -

    Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the +

    Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the screen.

    /Dm /M -

    Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page.

    Wipe /Di -

    A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new +

    A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page.

    R -

    Simply replaces the old page with the new one.

    Fly /Di /M -

    Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the +

    Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the direction specified by /Di, to or from a location that is offscreen except when /Di is None.

    /Di -

    The old page slides off the screen while the new page +

    The old page slides off the screen while the new page slides in, pushing the old page out in the direction specified by /Di.

    /Di -

    The new page slides on to the screen in the direction +

    The new page slides on to the screen in the direction specified by /Di, covering the old page.

    Uncover /Di -

    The old page slides off the screen in the direction +

    The old page slides off the screen in the direction specified by /Di, uncovering the new page in the direction specified by /Di.

    -

    The new page gradually becomes visible through the old +

    The new page gradually becomes visible through the old one.

    -

    +

    3.8 Option pdfinfo

    -

    The information entries can be set using

    The information entries can be set using pdftitle, pdfsubject, …. Option pdfinfo provides an alternative @@ -2550,28 +2462,28 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdftitle, subject, trapped, …Unknown keys are added to the information dictionary. Their values are text strings (see PDF specification). Example: -

    +
    -
    +
     \hypersetup{
    - 
      pdfinfo={ - 
        Title={My Title}, - 
        Subject={My Subject}, - 
        NewKey={Foobar}, - 
        % ... - 
      } - 
    } -
    -

    -

    +  pdfinfo={ +    Title={My Title}, +    Subject={My Subject}, +    NewKey={Foobar}, +    % ... +  } +} + +

    +

    3.9 Big alphabetical list

    -

    The following is a complete listing of available options for

    The following is a complete listing of available options for hyperref, arranged alphabetically.

    allbordercolors +

    Set all border color options

    +

    set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers.

    +

    do bibliographical back references

    +

    set base URL for document

    +

    make bookmarks

    +

    put section numbers in bookmarks

    +

    open up bookmark tree

    +

    level to which bookmarks are open

    +

    to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

    +

    allow links to break over lines

    +

    to produce CJK bookmarks

    +

    color of border around cites

    +

    color of citation links

    +

    color links

    debug @@ -2722,7 +2634,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">destlabel draft +

    do not do any hyperlinking

    +

    default if no driver specified or detected

    +

    to set encap character for hyperindex

    +

    suffix of linked files

    +

    color of border around file links

    +

    color of file links

    +

    opposite of option draft

    +

    use small caps instead of color for links

    +

    Hide links (removing color and border)

    +

    make figures hyper links

    +

    set up hyperlinked footnotes

    +

    set up hyperlinked indices

    +

    use guessable names for links

    +

    redefine LaTeX internals

    +

    color of border around links

    @@ -2913,7 +2825,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">linkcolor +

    color of links

    +

    make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

    +

    color of border around menu links

    +

    color for menu links

    +

    use LaTeX-computed names for links

    nesting +

    allow nesting of links

    +

    put an anchor on every page

    +

    backreference by page number

    +

    text for PDF Author field

    +

    width of PDF link border

    +

    border style for links

    +

    text for PDF Creator field

    +

    +

    direction setting

    +

    paper handling option for print dialog

    @@ -3080,7 +2992,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdffitwindow +

    resize document window to fit document size

    +

    set highlighting of PDF links

    +

    text for PDF Keywords field

    +

    PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

    +

    make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

    +

    make links that open another PDF

    +

    file start a new window

    +

    page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode

    +

    number of printed copies

    +

    set PDF page labels

    +

    set layout of PDF pages

    +

    set default mode of PDF display

    +

    set crop size of PDF document

    +

    set PDF page transition style

    pdfpicktraybypdfsize +

    set option for print dialog

    +

    set /PrintArea of viewer preferences

    +

    set /PrintClip of viewer preferences

    +

    set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

    @@ -3245,7 +3157,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">pdfprintscaling +

    page scaling option for print dialog

    +

    text for PDF Producer field

    +

    starting view of remote PDF documents

    +

    page at which PDF document opens

    +

    starting view of PDF document

    +

    text for PDF Subject field

    +

    text for PDF Title field

    +

    make PDF toolbar visible

    +

    PDF ‘view’ when on link traversal

    +

    set /ViewArea of viewer preferences

    +

    set /ViewClip of viewer preferences

    +

    make PDF user interface elements visible

    +

    do page number anchors as plain Arabic

    +

    color of border around ‘run’ links

    +

    color of ‘run’ links

    @@ -3415,14 +3327,14 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">setpagesize +

    set page size by special driver commands

    + + - - +

    Unicode encoded pdf strings, starting with + version 2021-02-04 v7.00g set by default to + true for all engines.

    +

    color of border around URL links

    +

    color of URL links

    +

    be chatty

    style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-12-119-">
    -

    Set all border color options

    allcolors -

    Set all color options (without border and field +

    Set all color options (without border and field options)

    anchorcolor black -

    set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers.

    backref false -

    do bibliographical back references

    baseurl empty -

    set base URL for document

    bookmarks true -

    make bookmarks

    bookmarksnumbered false -

    put section numbers in bookmarks

    bookmarksopen false -

    open up bookmark tree

    bookmarksopenlevel \maxdimen -

    level to which bookmarks are open

    bookmarkstype toc -

    to specify which ‘toc’ file to mimic

    breaklinks false -

    allow links to break over lines

    CJKbookmarks false -

    to produce CJK bookmarks

    citebordercolor 0 1 0 -

    color of border around cites

    citecolor green -

    color of citation links

    colorlinks false -

    color links

    true -

    (

    (tex4ht, dviwindo)

    false -

    provide details of anchors defined; same as +

    provide details of anchors defined; same as verbose

    false -

    destinations are named by the first

    destinations are named by the first \label after the anchor creation

    false -

    do not do any hyperlinking

    driverfallback -

    default if no driver specified or detected

    dvipdfm -

    use

    use dvipdfm backend

    dvipdfmx -

    use

    use dvipdfmx backend

    dvips -

    use

    use dvips backend

    dvipsone -

    use

    use dvipsone backend

    dviwindo -

    use

    use dviwindo backend

    encap -

    to set encap character for hyperindex

    extension dvi -

    suffix of linked files

    filebordercolor 0 .5 .5 -

    color of border around file links

    filecolor cyan -

    color of file links

    final true -

    opposite of option draft

    frenchlinks false -

    use small caps instead of color for links

    hidelinks -

    Hide links (removing color and border)

    hyperfigures false -

    make figures hyper links

    hyperfootnotes true -

    set up hyperlinked footnotes

    hyperindex true -

    set up hyperlinked indices

    hypertex -

    use

    use HyperTeX backend

    hypertexnames true -

    use guessable names for links

    implicit true -

    redefine LaTeX internals

    latex2html -

    use

    use LaTeX2HTML backend

    linkbordercolor 1 0 0 -

    color of border around links

    red -

    color of links

    linktoc section -

    make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

    linktocpage false -

    make page number, not text, be link on TOC, +

    make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT

    menubordercolor 1 0 0 -

    color of border around menu links

    menucolor red -

    color for menu links

    nativepdf false -

    an alias for

    an alias for dvips

    naturalnames false -

    use LaTeX-computed names for links

    false -

    allow nesting of links

    pageanchor true -

    put an anchor on every page

    pagebackref false -

    backreference by page number

    pdfauthor empty -

    text for PDF Author field

    pdfborder 0 0 1 -

    width of PDF link border

    0 0 0 -

    (

    (colorlinks)

    pdfborderstyle -

    border style for links

    pdfcenterwindow false -

    position the document window in the center +

    position the document window in the center of the screen

    pdfcreator LaTeX with -

    text for PDF Creator field

    hyperref -

    pdfdirection empty -

    direction setting

    pdfdisplaydoctitle false -

    display document title instead of file name in +

    display document title instead of file name in title bar

    pdfduplex empty -

    paper handling option for print dialog

    false -

    resize document window to fit document size

    pdfhighlight /I -

    set highlighting of PDF links

    pdfinfo empty -

    alternative interface for setting document +

    alternative interface for setting document information

    pdfkeywords empty -

    text for PDF Keywords field

    pdflang relax -

    PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)

    pdfmark false -

    an alias for

    an alias for dvips

    pdfmenubar true -

    make PDF viewer’s menu bar visible

    pdfnewwindow false -

    make links that open another PDF

    -

    file start a new window

    pdfnonfullscreenpagemode empty -

    page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode

    pdfnumcopies empty -

    number of printed copies

    pdfpagelabels true -

    set PDF page labels

    pdfpagelayout empty -

    set layout of PDF pages

    pdfpagemode empty -

    set default mode of PDF display

    pdfpagescrop empty -

    set crop size of PDF document

    pdfpagetransition empty -

    set PDF page transition style

    empty -

    set option for print dialog

    pdfprintarea empty -

    set /PrintArea of viewer preferences

    pdfprintclip empty -

    set /PrintClip of viewer preferences

    pdfprintpagerange empty -

    set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences

    empty -

    page scaling option for print dialog

    pdfproducer empty -

    text for PDF Producer field

    pdfremotestartview Fit -

    starting view of remote PDF documents

    pdfstartpage 1 -

    page at which PDF document opens

    pdfstartview Fit -

    starting view of PDF document

    pdfsubject empty -

    text for PDF Subject field

    pdftex -

    use

    use pdfTeX backend

    pdftitle empty -

    text for PDF Title field

    pdftoolbar true -

    make PDF toolbar visible

    pdftrapped empty -

    Sets the document information Trapped entry. +

    Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are True, False and pdfview

    XYZ -

    PDF ‘view’ when on link traversal

    pdfviewarea empty -

    set /ViewArea of viewer preferences

    pdfviewclip empty -

    set /ViewClip of viewer preferences

    pdfwindowui true -

    make PDF user interface elements visible

    plainpages false -

    do page number anchors as plain Arabic

    ps2pdf -

    use

    use ps2pdf backend

    psdextra false -

    define more short names for PDF string +

    define more short names for PDF string commands

    raiselinks false -

    raise up links (for

    raise up links (for HyperTeX backend)

    runbordercolor 0 .7 .7 -

    color of border around ‘run’ links

    runcolor filecolor -

    color of ‘run’ links

    true -

    set page size by special driver commands

    tex4ht -

    use

    use TeX4ht backend

    textures -

    use

    use Textures backend

    unicode false true -

    Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true - with XeTeX and LuTeX

    urlbordercolor 0 1 1 -

    color of border around URL links

    urlcolor magenta -

    color of URL links

    verbose false -

    be chatty

    vtex -

    use

    use VTeX backend

    xetex -

    use

    use XeTeX backend

    -

    +

    4 Additional user macros

    -

    If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the following low-level user macros are +

    If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the following low-level user macros are provided: -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    The

    The text is made a hyperlink to the URL; this must be a full URL (relative to the base URL, if that is defined). The special characters # and ˜ do not need to be escaped in any way (unless the command is used in the argument of another command). -

    The optional argument

    The optional argument options recognizes the hyperref options pdfremotestartview, pdfnewwindow @@ -3553,9 +3464,9 @@ class="ec-lmvtk-10">nextactionraw:

    The value of key /Next of action dictionaries, see PDF specification.
    -

    +

    \url{URL}
    -

    Similar to

    Similar to \href{URLURL}}. Depending on the driver \href also tries to detect the link type. Thus the result can be a url link, file link, … -

    +

    \nolinkurl{URL}
    -

    Write

    Write URL in the same way as \url, without creating a hyperlink. +class="ec-lmvtt-10">\url, without creating a hyperlink. - -

    +

    {URL}
    -

    A base

    A base URL is established, which is prepended to other specified URLs, to make it easier to write portable documents. -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using

    The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using text as the anchor. -

    For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the browser, with the

    For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the browser, with the text being ignored completely. -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    A target area of the document (the

    A target area of the document (the text) is marked, and given the name category.name -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    text is made into a link to URL#category.name -

    +

    ]{text}
    -

    text is made into a link to the same place as \ref{label} would be linked. -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    +

    }{text}
    -

    A simple internal link is created with

    A simple internal link is created with \hypertarget, with two parameters of an anchor name, and anchor \hyperlink has two arguments, the name class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hypertarget, and the text which be used as the link on the page. -

    Note that in HTML parlance, the

    Note that in HTML parlance, the \hyperlink command inserts a notional # in front of each link, making it relative to the current testdocument; \href expects a full URL. -

    +

    \phantomsection
    -

    This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to

    This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to \hypertarget{}{} with an automatically chosen anchor name. Often it is used in conjunction with \addcontentsline for sectionlike things (index, bibliography, preface). \addcontentsline refers to the latest previous location where an anchor is set. Example: -

    +
    -
    +
     \cleardoublepage
    - 
    \phantomsection - 
    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} - 
    \printindex -
    -

    -

    Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index page, +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} +\printindex + +

    +

    Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index page, not to a location before this page. -

    +

    \autoref class="ec-lmvtt-10">{label}
    -

    This is a replacement for the usual

    This is a replacement for the usual \ref command that places a contextual label in front of the reference. This gives your users a bigger target to click for hyperlinks (e.g. ‘section 2’ instead of merely the number ‘2’). -

    The label is worked out from the context of the original

    The label is worked out from the context of the original \label command by hyperref by using the macros listed below (shown with their default values). The macros can be (re)defined in documents using @@ -3776,7 +3686,7 @@ macros listed below (shown with their default values). The macros can be (re)def class="ec-lmvtt-10">\(re)newcommand; note that some of these macros are already defined in the standard document classes. The mixture of lowercase and uppercase initial letters is deliberate and corresponds to the author’s practice. -

    For each macro below,

    For each macro below, hyperref checks \*autorefname before \*name. For instance, it looks for @@ -3784,8 +3694,8 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\*name. For instance, it looks for class="ec-lmvtt-10">\figureautorefname before \figurename.

    @@ -3794,80 +3704,80 @@ id="TBL-25-2"> class="td01">Macro +

    Figure

    +

    Table

    +

    Part

    +

    Appendix

    +

    Equation

    +

    item

    +

    chapter

    +

    section

    +

    subsection

    +

    subsubsection

    +

    paragraph

    +

    footnote

    class="td01">\AMSname +

    Equation

    +

    Theorem

    +

    page

    @@ -3905,19 +3815,19 @@ class="td01"> class="td01">
    -

    Default

    \figurename -

    Figure

    \tablename -

    Table

    \partname -

    Part

    \appendixname -

    Appendix

    \equationname -

    Equation

    \Itemname -

    item

    \chaptername -

    chapter

    \sectionname -

    section

    \subsectionname -

    subsection

    \subsubsectionname -

    subsubsection

    \paragraphname -

    paragraph

    \Hfootnotename -

    footnote

    -

    Equation

    \theoremname -

    Theorem

    \page -

    page

    -

    Example for a redefinition if

    Example for a redefinition if babel is used: -

    +
    -
    +
     \usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
    - 
    \addto\extrasngerman{% - 
      \def\subsectionautorefname{Unterkapitel}% - 
    } -
    -

    -

    Hint: +

    +

    Hint: \autoref works via the counter name that the reference is based on. Sometimes \autoref chooses the wrong name, if the counter is used for different things. For example, it happens with @@ -3926,41 +3836,41 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\newtheorem if a lemma shares a counter with theorems class="ec-lmss-10">aliascnt provides a method to generate a simulated second counter that allows the differentiation between theorems and lemmas: -

    +
    -
    +
     \documentclass{article}
    - 

    \usepackage{aliascnt} - 
    \usepackage{hyperref} - 

    \newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem} - 

    \newaliascnt{lemma}{theorem} - 
    \newtheorem{lemma}[lemma]{Lemma} - 
    \aliascntresetthe{lemma} - 

    \providecommand*{\lemmaautorefname}{Lemma} - 

    \begin{document} - 

    We will use \autoref{a} to prove \autoref{b}. - 

    \begin{lemma}\label{a} - 
      Nobody knows. - 
    \end{lemma} - 

    \begin{theorem}\label{b} - 
      Nobody is right. - 
    \end{theorem}. - 

    \end{document} -
    -

    -

    + +\usepackage{aliascnt} +\usepackage{hyperref} + +\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem} + +\newaliascnt{lemma}{theorem} +\newtheorem{lemma}[lemma]{Lemma} +\aliascntresetthe{lemma} + +\providecommand*{\lemmaautorefname}{Lemma} + +\begin{document} + +We will use \autoref{a} to prove \autoref{b}. + +\begin{lemma}\label{a} +  Nobody knows. +\end{lemma} + +\begin{theorem}\label{b} +  Nobody is right. +\end{theorem}. + +\end{document} + +

    +

    {label}
    -

    It replaces

    It replaces \pageref and adds the name for page in front of the page reference. First \pageautorefname is checked before \pagename. -

    For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but not to create a +

    For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but not to create a link, there are starred forms (these starred forms exist even if hyperref has been loaded with implicit=false): -

    +

    \ref*{label}
    -

    +

    {label}
    -

    +

    \autoref*{label}
    -

    +

    {label}
    -

    A typical use would be to write +

    A typical use would be to write -

    +
     \hyperref[other]{that nice section (\ref*{other}) we read before}
    -
    -

    -

    We want +

    +

    We want \ref*{other} to generate the correct number, but not to form a link, since we do this ourselves with \hyperref. -

    +

    }{TeXstring}
    -

    \pdfstringdef returns a macro containing the PDF string. (Currently this is done globally, but do not rely on it.) All the following tasks, definitions and redefinitions are made in a group to keep them local: @@ -4093,13 +4003,13 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\textbf, etc.

  • Support for \xspace provided by the xspace package
  • -

    In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe unbalanced parentheses in +

    In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe unbalanced parentheses in the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko Oberdiek’s EuroTeX paper distributed with hyperref. -

    +

    {NoHyper}…\end{NoHyper}
    -

    Sometimes we just don’t want the wretched package interfering with us. Define an environment we +

    Sometimes we just don’t want the wretched package interfering with us. Define an environment we can put in manually, or include in a style file, which stops the hypertext functions doing anything. This is used, for instance, in the Elsevier classes, to stop hyperref playing havoc in the front matter. -

    +

    4.1 Bookmark macros

    -

    +

    4.1.1 Setting bookmarks
    -

    Usually

    Usually hyperref automatically adds bookmarks for \section and similar macros. But they can also set manually. -

    +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is 0). As name for the +

    creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is 0). As name for the internal anchor name is used (in conjunction with level). Therefore the name must be unique (similar to \label). -

    +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark at the current level. -

    +

    creates a bookmark at the current level. +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy. Internally the current level is increased +

    creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy. Internally the current level is increased by one. -

    +

    }{name}
    -

    creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the command the current +

    creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the command the current bookmark level has not changed. -

    Hint: Package bookmark replaces hyperref’s bookmark organization by a new algorithm: @@ -4202,20 +4112,20 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref’s bookmark organization by a new algori

  • More control over the bookmark appearance (color, font).
  • Different bookmark actions are supported (external file links, URLs, …).
  • -

    Therefore I recommend using this package. -

    +

    Therefore I recommend using this package. +

    4.1.2 Replacement macros
    -

    hyperref takes the text for bookmarks from the arguments of commands like \section, which can contain things like math, colors, or font changes, none of which will display in bookmarks as is. -

    +

    }{PDFstring}
    -

    For example, +

    For example, -

    +
     \section{Pythagoras:
    - 
      \texorpdfstring{$ a^2 + b^2 = c^2 $}{% - 
        a\texttwosuperior\ + b\texttwosuperior\ = - 
        c\texttwosuperior - 
      }% - 
    } - 
    \section{\texorpdfstring{\textcolor{red}}{}{Red} Mars} -
    -

    -

    +

    +

    \pdfstringdef executes the hook before it expands the string. Therefore, you can use this hook to perform additional tasks or to disable additional commands. -

    +
     \expandafter\def\expandafter\pdfstringdefPreHook
    - 
    \expandafter{% - 
      \pdfstringdefPreHook - 
      \renewcommand{\mycommand}[1]{}% - 
    } -
    -

    -

    However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via +

    +

    However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via \pdfstringdefDisableCommands, which adds its argument to the definition of \pdfstringdefPreHook (‘@’ can here be used as letter in command names): -

    +
     \pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
    - 
      \let~\textasciitilde - 
      \def\url{\pdfstringdefWarn\url}% - 
      \let\textcolor\@gobble - 
    } -
    -

    -

    +  \let~\textasciitilde +  \def\url{\pdfstringdefWarn\url}% +  \let\textcolor\@gobble +} + +

    +

    4.2 Utility macros

    -

    + id="x1-180004.2">Pagelabels +

    +
    \thispdfpagelabel{page number format}
    +

    This allows to change format of the page number shown in the tool bar of a PDF viewer for a specific +page, for example +

    \thispdfpagelabel{Empty Page-\roman{page}} +

    The command affects the page on which it is executed, so asynchronous page breaking should be +taken into account. It should be used in places where for example \thispagestyle can be use +too. +

    +

    4.3 Utility macros

    +

    +

    \hypercalcbp{dimen specification}
    -

    \hypercalcbp takes a TeX dimen specification and converts it to bp and returns the number without the unit. This is useful for options pdfview, pdfstartview and pdfremotestartview. Example: -

    +
    -
    +
     \hypersetup{
    - 
      pdfstartview={FitBH \hypercalcbp{\paperheight-\topmargin-1in - 
        -\headheight-\headsep} - 
    } -
    -

    -

    The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner. -

    Note, for calculations you need either package +

    +

    The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner. +

    Note, for calculations you need either package calc or ε-TEX. Nowadays the latter should automatically be enabled for LATEX formats. Users without ε-TEX, please, look in the source documentation hyperref.dtx for further limitations. -

    Also

    Also \hypercalcbp cannot be used in option specifications of \documentclass and \usepackage, because LATEX expands the option lists of these commands. However package hyperref is not yet loaded and an undefined control sequence error would arise. -

    +

    5 New FeaturesNew Features4

    + id="x1-20001f4">

    5.1 Option ‘pdflinkmargin’

    -

    Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ is an experimental option for specifying a link margin, if the driver supports this. + id="x1-210005.1">Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ +

    Option ‘pdflinkmargin’ is an experimental option for specifying a link margin, if the driver supports this. Default is 1 pt for supporting drivers. -

    +

    pdfTeX
     #1} (with Other drivers
    Unsupported.
    -

    +

    5.2 Field option ‘calculatesortkey’

    -

    Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order by default. If calculated field values + id="x1-220005.2">Field option ‘calculatesortkey’ +

    Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order by default. If calculated field values depend on other calculated fields that appear later in the document, then the correct calculation order can be specified with option ‘calculatesortkey’. Its value is used as key to lexicographically sort the calculated fields. The sort key do not need to be unique. Fields that share the same key are sorted in document order. -

    Currently the field option ‘calculatesortkey’ is only supported by the driver for pdfTeX. -

    +

    Currently the field option ‘calculatesortkey’ is only supported by the driver for pdfTeX. +

    5.3 Option ‘localanchorname’

    -

    When an anchor is set (e.g. via Option ‘localanchorname’ +

    When an anchor is set (e.g. via \refstepcounter, then the anchor name is globally set to the current anchor name. -

    For example: +

    For example: -

    +
         \section{Foobar}
    - 
        \begin{equation}\end{equation} - 
        \label{sec:foobar} -
    -

    With the default global setting (localanchorname=false) a reference to ‘sec:foobar’ jumps to the +    \begin{equation}\end{equation} +    \label{sec:foobar} + +

    With the default global setting (localanchorname=false) a reference to ‘sec:foobar’ jumps to the equation before. With option ‘localanchorname’ the anchor of the equation is forgotten after the environment and the reference ‘sec:foobar’ jumps to the section title. -

    Option ‘localanchorname’ is an experimental option, there might be situations, where the anchor +

    Option ‘localanchorname’ is an experimental option, there might be situations, where the anchor name is not available as expected. -

    +

    5.4 Option ‘customdriver’

    -

    The value of option ‘customdriver’ is the name of an external driver file without extension ‘.def’. The file + id="x1-240005.4">Option ‘customdriver’ +

    The value of option ‘customdriver’ is the name of an external driver file without extension ‘.def’. The file must have \ProvidesFile with a version date and number that match the date and number of ‘hyperref’, otherwise a warning is given. -

    Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver, is not well defined and +

    Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver, is not well defined and quite messy, the option is mainly intended to ease developing, testing, debugging the driver part. -

    +

    5.5 Option ‘psdextra’

    -

    LaTeX’s NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF + id="x1-250005.5">Option ‘psdextra’ +

    LaTeX’s NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF information entries). Many math command names (\geq, \notin, ...) are not in control of NFSS, @@ -4414,95 +4348,95 @@ on means that the short names are available. Then \geq can directly be used instead of \textgeq. -

    +

    5.6 \XeTeXLinkBox

    -

    When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only + id="x1-260005.6">\XeTeXLinkBox +

    When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only at the character glyphs. If there are no glyphs (images, rules, ...), then it does not generate a link annotation. Macro \XeTeXLinkBox puts its argument in a box and adds spaces at the lower left and upper right corners. An additional margin can be specified by setting it to the dimen register \XeTeXLinkMargin. The default is 2pt. -

    Example: +

    Example: -

    +
         % xelatex
    - 
        \documentclass{article} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        \setlength{\XeTeXLinkMargin}{1pt} - 
        \begin{document} - 
        \section{Hello World} - 
        \newpage - 
        \label{sec:hello} - 
        \hyperref[sec:hello]{% - 
          \XeTeXLinkBox{\rule{10mm}{10mm}}% - 
        } - 
        \end{document} -
    -

    -

    +    \documentclass{article} +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    \setlength{\XeTeXLinkMargin}{1pt} +    \begin{document} +    \section{Hello World} +    \newpage +    \label{sec:hello} +    \hyperref[sec:hello]{% +      \XeTeXLinkBox{\rule{10mm}{10mm}}% +    } +    \end{document} + +

    +

    5.7 \IfHyperBooleanExists and \IfHyperBoolean

    + id="x1-270005.7">\IfHyperBooleanExists and \IfHyperBoolean -
    +
      \IfHyperBooleanExists{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
    -
    -

    If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values ‘true’ or ‘false’, then +

    If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values ‘true’ or ‘false’, then \IfHyperBooleanExists calls YES, otherwise NO. -

    +
      \IfHyperBoolean{OPTION}{YES}{NO}
    -
    -

    Macro +

    Macro \IfHyperBoolean calls YES, if OPTION exists as boolean and is enabled. Otherwise NO is executed. -

    Both macros are expandable. Additionally option ‘stoppedearly’ is available. It is enabled if +

    Both macros are expandable. Additionally option ‘stoppedearly’ is available. It is enabled if \MaybeStopEarly or \MaybeStopNow end hyperref prematurely. -

    +

    5.8 \unichar

    -

    If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can be given by using \unichar +

    If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can be given by using \unichar. Its name and syntax is inherited from package ‘ucs’. However it is defined independently for use in hyperref’s \pdfstringdef (that converts arbitrary TeX code to PDF strings or tries to do this). -

    Macro

    Macro \unichar takes a TeX number as argument, examples for U+263A (WHITE SMILING FACE): -

    +
         \unichar{"263A}% hexadecimal notation
    - 
        \unichar{9786}% decimal notation -
    -

    ‘"’ must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise active. Otherwise prefix it with +    \unichar{9786}% decimal notation + +

    ‘"’ must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise active. Otherwise prefix it with \string: -

    +
         \unichar{\string"263A}% converts ‘"’ to ‘"’ with catcode 12 (other)
    -
    -

    Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use +

    Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use \dq instead: -

    +
         \unichar{\dq 263A}% \dq is double quote with catcode 12 (other)
    -
    -

    -

    + +

    +

    5.9 \ifpdfstringunicode

    -

    Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings. Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the + id="x1-290005.9">\ifpdfstringunicode +

    Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings. Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the information dictionary. The PDF specification allows two encodings ‘PDFDocEncoding’ (8-bit encoding) and ‘Unicode’ (UTF-16). The user can help using \texorpdfstring to replace complicate TeX constructs @@ -4513,21 +4447,21 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\ifpdfstringunicode. It is only allowed class="ec-lmvtt-10">\texorpdfstring and takes two arguments, the first allows the full range of Unicode. The second is limited to the characters available in PDFDocEncoding. -

    As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese name of Han The Thanh. Correctly +

    As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese name of Han The Thanh. Correctly written it needs some accented characters, one character even with a double accent. Class ‘tugboat.cls’ defines a macro for the typesetted name: -

    +
         \def\Thanh{%
    - 
          H\‘an~% - 
          Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\’{}}}% - 
          ~Th\‘anh% - 
        } -
    -

    It’s not entirely correct, the second accent over the ‘e’ is not an acute, but a hook. However standard +      H\‘an~% +      Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\’{}}}% +      ~Th\‘anh% +    } + +

    It’s not entirely correct, the second accent over the ‘e’ is not an acute, but a hook. However standard LaTeX does not provide such an accent. -

    Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref. The first and the last word are already +

    Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref. The first and the last word are already supported automatically. Characters with two or more accents are a difficult business in LaTeX, because the NFSS2 macros of the LaTeX kernel do not support more than one accent. Therefore also puenc.def misses support for them. But we can provide it using \unichar. The character in question is: -

    +
         % U+1EC3 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND HOOK ABOVE
    -
    -

    Thus we can put this together: + +

    Thus we can put this together: -

    +
         \def\Thanh{%
    - 
          H\‘an~% - 
          \texorpdfstring{Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\’{}}}}% - 
          {\ifpdfstringunicode{Th\unichar{"1EC3}}{Th\^e}}% - 
          ~Th\‘anh% - 
        } -
    -

    For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the second accent. Alternatively we could +      H\‘an~% +      \texorpdfstring{Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\’{}}}}% +      {\ifpdfstringunicode{Th\unichar{"1EC3}}{Th\^e}}% +      ~Th\‘anh% +    } + +

    For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the second accent. Alternatively we could provide a representation without accents instead of wrong accents: -

    +
         \def\Thanh{%
    - 
          \texorpdfstring{% - 
            H\‘an~% - 
            Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\’{}}}}% - 
            ~Th\‘anh% - 
          }{% - 
            \ifpdfstringunicode{% - 
              H\‘an Th\unichar{"1EC3} Th\‘anh% - 
            }{% - 
              Han The Thanh% - 
            }% - 
          }% - 
        } -
    -

    -

    +      \texorpdfstring{% +        H\‘an~% +        Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\’{}}}}% +        ~Th\‘anh% +      }{% +        \ifpdfstringunicode{% +          H\‘an Th\unichar{"1EC3} Th\‘anh% +        }{% +          Han The Thanh% +        }% +      }% +    } + +

    +

    5.10 Customizing index style file with \nohyperpage

    -

    Since version 2008/08/14 v6.78f. -

    For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts Customizing index style file with \nohyperpage +

    Since version 2008/08/14 v6.78f. +

    For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts \hyperpage into the index macros. After processing with Makeindex, \hyperpage analyzes its argument to detect page ranges and page comma lists. However, only the standard settings are supported directly: -

    +
         delim_r "--"
    - 
        delim_n ", " -
    -

    (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains the keys that can be used in style files for +    delim_n ", " + +

    (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains the keys that can be used in style files for Makeindex.) Customized versions of delim_r, delim_n,\nohyperpage, e.g.: -

    +
         suffix_2p "\\nohyperpage{f.}"
    - 
        suffix_3p "\\nohyperpage{ff.}" -
    -

    (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space “ +

    (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space “\\,” or “~” should be put before the first f inside \nohyperpage.) -

    +

    5.11 Experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’

    -

    The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors. This new experimental option + id="x1-310005.11">Experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’ +

    The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors. This new experimental option ‘ocgcolorlinks’ uses Optional Content Groups, a feature introduced in PDF 1.5. -

    A better implementation which hasn’t the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is in the ocgx2 +

    A better implementation which hasn’t the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is in the ocgx2 package. Check its documentation for details how to use it.

    -

    +

    5.12 Option ‘pdfa’

    -

    The new option ‘pdfa’ tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code generated by hyperref. However, the + id="x1-320005.12">Option ‘pdfa’ +

    The new option ‘pdfa’ tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code generated by hyperref. However, the result is usually not in PDF/A, because many features aren’t controlled by hyperref (XMP metadata, fonts, colors, driver dependend low level stuff, ...). -

    Currently, option ‘pdfa’ sets and disables the following items: +

    Currently, option ‘pdfa’ sets and disables the following items:

    -

    The default value of the new option ‘pdfa’ is ‘false’. It influences the loading of the package and +

    The default value of the new option ‘pdfa’ is ‘false’. It influences the loading of the package and cannot be changed after hyperref is loaded (\usepackage{hyperref}). -

    +

    5.13 Option ‘linktoc’ added

    -

    The new option ‘linktoc’ allows more control which part of an entry in the table of contents is made into + id="x1-330005.13">Option ‘linktoc’ added +

    The new option ‘linktoc’ allows more control which part of an entry in the table of contents is made into a link:

    -

    +

    5.14 Option ‘pdfnewwindow’ changed

    -

    Before 6.77b: + id="x1-340005.14">Option ‘pdfnewwindow’ changed +

    Before 6.77b:

    -

    Since 6.77b: +

    Since 6.77b:

    -

    Rationale: There is a difference between setting to ‘false’ and an absent entry. In the former case the +

    Rationale: There is a difference between setting to ‘false’ and an absent entry. In the former case the new document replaces the old one, in the latter case the PDF viewer application should respect the user preference. -

    +

    5.15 Flag options for PDF forms

    -

    PDF form field macros (Flag options for PDF forms +

    PDF form field macros (\TextField, \CheckBox, ...) support boolean flag options. The option name is the lowercase version of the names in the PDF specification (1.7): -

    http://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html -

    http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/pdf_reference.pdf -

    Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets: +

    Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets:

    -

    New option ‘export’ sets the export format of a submit action. Valid values are (upper- or +

    New option ‘export’ sets the export format of a submit action. Valid values are (upper- or lowercase):

    -

    +

    5.16 Option ‘pdfversion’

    -

    This is an experimental option. It notifies ‘hyperref’ about the intended PDF version. Currently this is + id="x1-360005.16">Option ‘pdfversion’ +

    This is an experimental option. It notifies ‘hyperref’ about the intended PDF version. Currently this is used in code for PDF forms (implementation notes 116 and 122 of PDF spec 1.7). -

    Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not supported, because most drivers expect +

    Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not supported, because most drivers expect higher PDF versions. -

    The option must be used early, not after

    The option must be used early, not after \usepackage{hyperref}. -

    In theory this option should also set the PDF version, but this is not generally supported. +

    In theory this option should also set the PDF version, but this is not generally supported.

    -

    The current PDF version is used as default if this version can be detected (only pdfTeX

    The current PDF version is used as default if this version can be detected (only pdfTeX 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest version 1.2 is assumed. Thus ‘hyperref’ tries to avoid PDF code that breaks this version, but is free to use ignorable higher PDF features. -

    +

    5.17 Field option ‘name’

    -

    Many form objects uses the label argument for several purposes: + id="x1-370005.17">Field option ‘name’ +

    Many form objects uses the label argument for several purposes:

    -

    Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can break in the structures of the output format. If option +

    Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can break in the structures of the output format. If option ‘name’ is given, then its value is used as name in the different output structures. Thus the value should consist of letters only. -

    +

    5.18 Option ‘pdfencoding’

    -

    The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries in the information dictionary: + id="x1-380005.18">Option ‘pdfencoding’ +

    The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries in the information dictionary: PDFDocEncoding and Unicode as UTF-16BE. Option pdfencoding selects between these encodings: @@ -4853,43 +4787,44 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">unicode sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two b surrogates need four bytes.

  • auto PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters outside the encoding and - Unicode otherwise.
  • -

    The luatex driver uses unicode by default. If another encoding should be forced, it should be done in +class="ec-lmss-10">auto PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters outside the encoding (outside + ascii if an unicode engine is used) and Unicode otherwise. This option is normally no suited + for the unicode engines. +

    All drivers use unicode by default now. If another encoding should be forced, it should be done in hypersetup. -

    +

    5.19 Color options/package hycolor

    -

    See documentation of package ‘hycolor’. -

    + id="x1-390005.19">Color options/package hycolor +

    See documentation of package ‘hycolor’. +

    5.20 Option pdfusetitle

    -

    If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor + id="x1-400005.20">Option pdfusetitle +

    If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor from \title and \author. An optional argument for \title and \author is supported (class amsart). -

    +

    5.21 Starred form of \autoref

    -

    Starred form of \autoref +

    \autoref* generates a reference without link as \ref* or \pageref*. -

    +

    5.22 Link border style

    -

    Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or options Link border style +

    Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or options colorlinks, frenchlinks. This is done by option pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1} -

    Some remarks: +

    Some remarks:

    -

    +

    5.23 Option Option bookmarksdepth

    -

    The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new option

    The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new option bookmarksdepth. The option acts globally and distinguishes three cases:

    -

    +     \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=4} % same as before +     \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth} % counter "tocdepth" is used + +

    +

    5.24 Option Option pdfescapeform

    -

    There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in +

    There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in parentheses form require the protection of some characters, e.g. unmatched left or right parentheses need escaping or the escape character itself (backslash). Since 2006/02/12 v6.75a the PS/PDF driver should do this automatically. However I assume a problem with compatibility, especially regarding the form part where larger amounts of JavaScript code can be present. It would be a pain to remove all the escaping, because an additional escaping layer can falsify the code. -

    Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced: +

    Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced:

    -

    +

    5.25 Default driver setting

    -

    (hyperref Default driver setting +

    (hyperref 6.72s) If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the most suitable driver. Thus it loads hpdftex, if pdfTeX is detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the @@ -4987,144 +4922,144 @@ xdvi for example. This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configur class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperref.cfg: -

    +
         \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips}
    -
    -

    for dvips, or + +

    for dvips, or -

    +
         \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex}
    -
    -

    for the default behaviour of hyperref. -

    See also the new option ‘driverfallback’. -

    + +

    for the default behaviour of hyperref. +

    See also the new option ‘driverfallback’. +

    5.26 Backref entries

    -

    Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example: + id="x1-460005.26">Backref entries +

    Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example: -

    +
     \documentclass[12pt,UKenglish]{article}
    - 

    \usepackage{babel} - 
    \usepackage[pagebackref]{hyperref} - 

    % Some language options are detected by package backref. - 
    % This affects the following macros: - 
    %   \backrefpagesname - 
    %   \backrefsectionsname - 
    %   \backrefsep - 
    %   \backreftwosep - 
    %   \backreflastsep - 

    \renewcommand*{\backref}[1]{ - 
      % default interface - 
      % #1: backref list - 
      % - 
      % We want to use the alternative interface, - 
      % therefore the definition is empty here. - 
    } - 
    \renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{% - 
      % alternative interface - 
      % #1: number of distinct back references - 
      % #2: backref list with distinct entries - 
      % #3: number of back references including duplicates - 
      % #4: backref list including duplicates - 
      \par - 
      #3 citation(s) on #1 page(s): #2,\par - 
      \ifnum#1=1 % - 
        \ifnum#3=1 % - 
          1 citation on page % - 
        \else - 
          #3 citations on page % - 
        \fi - 
      \else - 
        #3 citations on #1 pages % - 
      \fi - 
      #2,\par - 
      \ifnum#3=1 % - 
        1 citation located at page % - 
      \else - 
        #3 citations located at pages % - 
      \fi - 
      #4.\par - 
    } - 

    % The list of distinct entries can be further refined: - 
    \renewcommand*{\backrefentrycount}[2]{% - - - 
      % #1: the original backref entry - 
      % #2: the count of citations of this entry, - 
      %     in case of duplicates greater than one - 
      #1% - 
      \ifnum#2>1 % - 
        ~(#2)% - 
      \fi - 
    } - 

    \begin{document} - 

      \section{Hello} - 
        \cite{ref1, ref2, ref3, ref4} - 
      \section{World} - 
        \cite{ref1, ref3} - 
      \newpage - 

      \section{Next section} - 
        \cite{ref1} - 
      \newpage - 

      \section{Last section} - 
        \cite{ref1, ref2} - 
      \newpage - 

      \pdfbookmark[1]{Bibliography}{bib} - 
      \begin{thebibliography}{99} - 
        \bibitem{ref1} Dummy entry one. - 

        \bibitem{ref2} Dummy entry two. - 

        \bibitem{ref3} Dummy entry three. - 

        \bibitem{ref4} Dummy entry four. - 

      \end{thebibliography} - 

    \end{document} -
    -

    -

    + +\usepackage{babel} +\usepackage[pagebackref]{hyperref} + +% Some language options are detected by package backref. +% This affects the following macros: +%   \backrefpagesname +%   \backrefsectionsname +%   \backrefsep +%   \backreftwosep +%   \backreflastsep + +\renewcommand*{\backref}[1]{ +  % default interface +  % #1: backref list +  % +  % We want to use the alternative interface, +  % therefore the definition is empty here. +} +\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{% +  % alternative interface +  % #1: number of distinct back references +  % #2: backref list with distinct entries +  % #3: number of back references including duplicates +  % #4: backref list including duplicates +  \par +  #3 citation(s) on #1 page(s): #2,\par +  \ifnum#1=1 % +    \ifnum#3=1 % +      1 citation on page % +    \else +      #3 citations on page % +    \fi +  \else +    #3 citations on #1 pages % +  \fi +  #2,\par +  \ifnum#3=1 % +    1 citation located at page % +  \else +    #3 citations located at pages % +  \fi +  #4.\par +} + +% The list of distinct entries can be further refined: +\renewcommand*{\backrefentrycount}[2]{% + + +  % #1: the original backref entry +  % #2: the count of citations of this entry, +  %     in case of duplicates greater than one +  #1% +  \ifnum#2>1 % +    ~(#2)% +  \fi +} + +\begin{document} + +  \section{Hello} +    \cite{ref1, ref2, ref3, ref4} +  \section{World} +    \cite{ref1, ref3} +  \newpage + +  \section{Next section} +    \cite{ref1} +  \newpage + +  \section{Last section} +    \cite{ref1, ref2} +  \newpage + +  \pdfbookmark[1]{Bibliography}{bib} +  \begin{thebibliography}{99} +    \bibitem{ref1} Dummy entry one. + +    \bibitem{ref2} Dummy entry two. + +    \bibitem{ref3} Dummy entry three. + +    \bibitem{ref4} Dummy entry four. + +  \end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} + +

    +

    5.27 \phantomsection

    -

    Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction with \phantomsection +

    Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction with \addcontentsline for sectionlike things (index, bibliography, preface). \addcontentsline refers to the latest previous location where an anchor is set. -

    +
       \cleardoublepage
    - 
      \phantomsection - 
      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} - 
      \printindex -
    -

    -

    Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index +  \phantomsection +  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} +  \printindex + +

    +

    Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the index points to the start of the index page, not to a location before this page. -

    +

    6 Acrobat-specific behavior

    -

    If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following macro is provided + id="x1-480006">Acrobat-specific behavior +

    If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following macro is provided in the appropriate drivers: -

    -

    +

    \Acrobatmenu{}{text}
    -

    The

    The text is used to create a button which activates the appropriate menuoption. The following table lists the option names you can use—comparison of this with the menus in Acrobat Reader or Exchange will show what they do. Obviously some are only appropriate to Exchange.

    + id="x1-48001r13">
    +

    Properties

    +

    About

    File File -

    Open, +

    Open, Close, Scan, Save, @@ -5158,26 +5093,26 @@ class="td10"> PageSetup, Quit

    FileImport →Import -

    ImportImage, +

    ImportImage, ImportNotes, AcroForm:ImportFDF

    FileExport →Export -

    ExportNotes, +

    ExportNotes, AcroForm:ExportFDF

    FileDocumentInfo →DocumentInfo -

    GeneralInfo, +

    GeneralInfo, OpenInfo, FontsInfo, SecurityInfo, @@ -5186,11 +5121,11 @@ class="td10">

    FilePreferences →Preferences -

    GeneralPrefs, +

    GeneralPrefs, NotePrefs, FullScreenPrefs, Weblink:Prefs, @@ -5199,10 +5134,10 @@ class="td10"> AcroSearch:Prefs(Mac), Cpt:Capture

    Edit Edit -

    Undo, +

    Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, @@ -5215,22 +5150,22 @@ class="td10"> TouchUp:ShowCaptureSuspects, TouchUp:FindSuspect,

    -

    Properties

    EditFields →Fields -

    AcroForm:Duplicate, +

    AcroForm:Duplicate, AcroForm:TabOrder

    Document Document -

    Cpt:CapturePages, +

    Cpt:CapturePages, AcroForm:Actions, CropPages, RotatePages, @@ -5245,10 +5180,10 @@ class="td10">

    View View -

    ActualSize, +

    ActualSize, FitVisible, FitWidth, FitPage, @@ -5269,10 +5204,10 @@ class="td10"> ShowBookmarks, ShowThumbs

    Tools Tools -

    Hand, +

    Hand, ZoomIn, ZoomOut, SelectText, @@ -5288,11 +5223,11 @@ class="td10"> FindNextNote, CreateNotesFile

    ToolsSearch →Search -

    AcroSrch:Query, +

    AcroSrch:Query, AcroSrch:Indexes, AcroSrch:Results, AcroSrch:Assist, @@ -5303,10 +5238,10 @@ class="td10">

    Window Window -

    ShowHideToolBar, +

    ShowHideToolBar, ShowHideMenuBar, ShowHideClipboard, Cascade, @@ -5314,10 +5249,10 @@ class="td10"> TileVertical, CloseAll

    Help Help -

    HelpUserGuide, +

    HelpUserGuide, HelpTutorial, HelpExchange, HelpScan, @@ -5329,231 +5264,231 @@ class="td10"> HelpReader, Weblink:Home

    Help(Windows) Help(Windows) -

    About

    -

    +

    7 PDF and HTML forms

    -

    You must put your fields inside a PDF and HTML forms +

    You must put your fields inside a Form environment (only one per file). -

    There are six macros to prepare fields: -

    -

    -
    \TextField[parameters]{label}
    -

    +

    There are six macros to prepare fields: +

    \CheckBox\TextField[parameters]{label}
    -

    +

    \ChoiceMenu\CheckBox[parameters]{label}{choices}
    -

    +

    \PushButton\ChoiceMenu[parameters]{label}{choices}
    -

    - - +

    \Submit\PushButton[parameters]{label}
    -

    +

    + +

    \Reset\Submit[parameters]{label}
    -

    The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by: -

    +

    \LayoutTextField{\Reset[parameters]{label}{field}
    -

    +

    The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by: +

    \LayoutChoiceField\LayoutTextField{label}{field}
    -

    +

    \LayoutCheckField\LayoutChoiceField{label}{field}
    -

    These macros default to #1 #2 -

    What is actually shown in as the field is determined by: -

    +

    \MakeRadioField\LayoutCheckField{widthlabel}{heightfield}
    -

    +

    These macros default to #1 #2 +

    What is actually shown in the field is determined by: +

    \MakeCheckField\MakeRadioField{width}{height}
    -

    +

    \MakeTextField\MakeCheckField{width}{height}
    -

    +

    \MakeChoiceField\MakeTextField{width}{height}
    -

    +

    +
    \MakeChoiceField{width}{height}
    +

    +

    \MakeButtonField{text}
    -

    These macros default to

    These macros default to \vbox to #2{\hbox #1{\hfill}\vfill}, except the l to #1; it is used for buttons, and the special \Submit and \Reset macros. -

    You may also want to redefine the following macros: +

    You may also want to redefine the following macros: -

    +
     \def\DefaultHeightofSubmit{12pt}
    - 
    \def\DefaultWidthofSubmit{2cm} - 
    \def\DefaultHeightofReset{12pt} - 
    \def\DefaultWidthofReset{2cm} - 
    \def\DefaultHeightofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip} - 
    \def\DefaultWidthofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip} - 
    \def\DefaultHeightofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip} - 
    \def\DefaultWidthofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip} - 
    \def\DefaultHeightofText{\baselineskip} - 
    \def\DefaultHeightofTextMultiline{4\baselineskip} - 
    \def\DefaultWidthofText{3cm} -
    -

    -

    +\def\DefaultWidthofSubmit{2cm} +\def\DefaultHeightofReset{12pt} +\def\DefaultWidthofReset{2cm} +\def\DefaultHeightofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip} +\def\DefaultWidthofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip} +\def\DefaultHeightofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip} +\def\DefaultWidthofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip} +\def\DefaultHeightofText{\baselineskip} +\def\DefaultHeightofTextMultiline{4\baselineskip} +\def\DefaultWidthofText{3cm} + +

    +

    7.1 Forms environment parameters

    + id="x1-500007.1">Forms environment parameters
    + id="x1-50001r14">
    action action URL URL -

    The URL that will receive the form data if a

    The URL that will receive the form data if a Submit button is included in the form

    encoding encoding name name -

    The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding +

    The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding is usual, and html is the only valid value

    method method name name -

    Used only when generating HTML; values can be

    Used only when generating HTML; values can be post or get

    -

    +

    7.2 Forms optional parameters

    -

    Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e. Forms optional parameters +

    Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e. color=0 0 0.5)

    + id="x1-51001r15">
    accesskey key accesskey key (as per HTML)
    align number align number 0 0 alignment within text field; 0 is left-aligned,
    1 is centered, 2 is right-aligned.
    altname name altname name alternative name,
    the name shown in the user interface
    backgroundcolor backgroundcolor color of box
    bordercolor bordercolor color of border
    bordersep bordersep box border gap
    borderwidth borderwidth 1 1 width of box border, the value is a dimension
    or a number with default unit bp
    calculate calculate JavaScript code to calculate the value of the field
    charsize dimen charsize dimen font size of field text
    checkboxsymbol char checkboxsymbol char 4 () ) symbol used for check boxes (ZapfDingbats),
    the value is a character or \ding{number},
    see package pifont from bundle psnfss
    checked boolean checked boolean false false whether option selected by default
    color color color of text in box
    combo boolean combo boolean false false choice list is ‘combo’ style
    default default default value
    disabled boolean disabled boolean false false field disabled
    format format JavaScript code to format the field
    height dimen height dimen height of field box
    hidden boolean hidden boolean false false field hidden
    keystroke keystroke JavaScript code to control the keystrokes on entry
    mappingname name mappingname name the mapping name to be used when exporting
    the field data
    maxlen number maxlen number 0 0 number of characters allowed in text field
    menulength number menulength number 4 4 number of elements shown in list
    multiline boolean multiline boolean false false whether text box is multiline
    name name name name name of field (defaults to label)
    onblur onblur JavaScript code
    onchange onchange JavaScript code
    onclick onclick JavaScript code
    ondblclick ondblclick JavaScript code
    onfocus onfocus JavaScript code
    onkeydown onkeydown JavaScript code
    onkeypress onkeypress JavaScript code
    onkeyup onkeyup JavaScript code
    onmousedown onmousedown JavaScript code
    onmousemove onmousemove JavaScript code
    onmouseout onmouseout JavaScript code
    onmouseover onmouseover JavaScript code
    onmouseup onmouseup JavaScript code
    onselect onselect JavaScript code
    password boolean password boolean false false text field is ‘password’ style
    popdown boolean popdown boolean false false choice list is ‘popdown’ style
    radio boolean radio boolean false false choice list is ‘radio’ style
    radiosymbol char radiosymbol char H () ) symbol used for radio fields (ZapfDingbats),
    the value is a character or \ding{number},
    see package pifont from bundle psnfss
    readonly boolean readonly boolean false false field is readonly
    rotation number rotation number 0 0 rotation of the widget annotation
    (degree, counterclockwise, multiple of 90)
    tabkey tabkey (as per HTML)
    validate validate JavaScript code to validate the entry
    value value initial value
    width dimen width dimen width of field box
    -

    +

    8 Defining a new driver

    -

    A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros: -

    1. Defining a new driver +

    A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros: +

    1. \hyper@anchor -

    2.

    2. \hyper@link -

    3.

    3. \hyper@linkfile -

    4.

    4. \hyper@linkurl -

    5.

    5. \hyper@anchorstart -

    6.

    6. \hyper@anchorend -

    7.

    7. \hyper@linkstart -

    8.

    8. \hyper@linkend -

    The draft option defines the macros as follows +

    The draft option defines the macros as follows -

    +
     \let\hyper@@anchor\@gobble
    - 
    \gdef\hyper@link##1##2##3{##3}% - 
    \def\hyper@linkurl##1##2{##1}% - 
    \def\hyper@linkfile##1##2##3{##1}% - 
    \let\hyper@anchorstart\@gobble - 
    \let\hyper@anchorend\@empty - 
    \let\hyper@linkstart\@gobbletwo - 
    \let\hyper@linkend\@empty -
    -

    -

    +\gdef\hyper@link##1##2##3{##3}% +\def\hyper@linkurl##1##2{##1}% +\def\hyper@linkfile##1##2##3{##1}% +\let\hyper@anchorstart\@gobble +\let\hyper@anchorend\@empty +\let\hyper@linkstart\@gobbletwo +\let\hyper@linkend\@empty + +

    +

    9 Special support for other packages

    -

    Package Special support for other packages +

    Package hyperref aims to cooperate with other packages, but there are several possible sources for conflict, such as

      @@ -6160,7 +6095,7 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">implicit=false for these packages to work.
    • Packages that do anything serious with the index.
    -

    The

    The hyperref package is distributed with variants on two useful packages designed to work especially well with it. These are xr and minitoc, which support crossdocument links using \label/\ref mechanisms and per-chapter tables of contents, respectively. -

    +

    9.1 Package Compatibility

    -

    Currently only package loading orders are available: -

    Note: hyperref loads package Package Compatibility +

    Currently only package loading orders are available: +

    Note: hyperref loads package nameref at \begin{document}. Sometimes this is too late, thus this package must be loaded earlier. -

    +

    9.1.1 algorithm
    + id="x1-550009.1.1">algorithm -
    +
      \usepackage{float}
    - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} - 
      \usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}% eg. -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{hyperref} +  \usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}% eg. + +

    +

    9.1.2 amsmath
    -

    The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well. For example, there might be + id="x1-560009.1.2">amsmath +

    The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well. For example, there might be spacing problems (eqnarray isn’t recommended anyway, see CTAN:info/l2tabu/, the situation for equation is unclear, because nobody is interested in investigating). Consider using the environments that package amsmath provide, e.g. gather for equation. The environment equation can even redefined to use gather: -

    +
       \usepackage{amsmath}
    - 
      \let\equation\gather - 
      \let\endequation\endgather -
    -

    -

    +  \let\equation\gather +  \let\endequation\endgather + +

    +

    9.1.3 amsrefs
    -

    Package loading order: + id="x1-570009.1.3">amsrefs +

    Package loading order: -

    +
       \usepackage{hyperref}
    - 
      \usepackage{amsrefs} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{amsrefs} + +

    +

    9.1.4 arydshln, longtable
    -

    Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln, hyperref after arydshln generates an error, + id="x1-580009.1.4">arydshln, longtable +

    Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln, hyperref after arydshln generates an error, thus the resulting package order is then: -

    +
       \usepackage{longtable}
    - 
      \usepacakge{hyperref} - 
      \usepackage{arydshln} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepacakge{hyperref} +  \usepackage{arydshln} + +

    +

    9.1.5 babel/magyar.ldf
    -

    The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work. You need at least version 1.5, maintained by Péter + id="x1-590009.1.5">babel/magyar.ldf +

    The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work. You need at least version 1.5, maintained by Péter Szabó, see CTAN:language/hungarian/babel/. -

    +

    9.1.6 babel/spanish.ldf
    -

    Babel’s spanish.ldf redefines ‘babel/spanish.ldf +

    Babel’s spanish.ldf redefines ‘\.’ to support ‘\...’. In bookmarks (\pdfstringdef) only ‘\.’ is supported. If ‘\...’ is needed, \texorpdfstring{\...}{\dots} can be used instead. -

    +

    9.1.7 bibentry
    -

    Workaround: + id="x1-610009.1.7">bibentry +

    Workaround: -

    +
       \makeatletter
    - 
      \let\saved@bibitem\@bibitem - 
      \makeatother - 

      \usepackage{bibentry} - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} - 

      \begin{document} - 

      \begingroup - 
        \makeatletter - 
        \let\@bibitem\saved@bibitem - 
        \nobibliography{database} - 
      \endgroup -
    -

    -

    +  \let\saved@bibitem\@bibitem +  \makeatother + +  \usepackage{bibentry} +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +  \begin{document} + +  \begingroup +    \makeatletter +    \let\@bibitem\saved@bibitem +    \nobibliography{database} +  \endgroup + +

    +

    9.1.8 bigfoot
    -

    Hyperref does not support package ‘bigfoot’. And package ‘bigfoot’ does not support hyperref’s footnotes + id="x1-620009.1.8">bigfoot +

    Hyperref does not support package ‘bigfoot’. And package ‘bigfoot’ does not support hyperref’s footnotes and disables them (hyperfootnotes=false). -

    +

    9.1.9 chappg
    -

    Package ‘chappg’ uses chappg +

    Package ‘chappg’ uses \@addtoreset that is redefined by ‘hyperref’. The package order is therefore: -

    +
       \usepackage{hyperref}
    - 
      \usepackage{chappg} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{chappg} + +

    +

    9.1.10 cite
    -

    This is from Mike Shell: cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref. However, I can do a workaround + id="x1-640009.1.10">cite +

    This is from Mike Shell: cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref. However, I can do a workaround via: -

    +
      \makeatletter
    - 
     \def\NAT@parse{\typeout{This is a fake Natbib command to fool Hyperref.}} - 
     \makeatother - 

     \usepackage[hypertex]{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty will work as normal - + \def\NAT@parse{\typeout{This is a fake Natbib command to fool Hyperref.}} + \makeatother + + \usepackage[hypertex]{hyperref} + +

    +

    so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty will work as normal - although the citations will not be hyperlinked, of course (But this may not be an issue for many people). -

    +

    9.1.11 count1to
    -

    Package ‘count1to’ adds several count1to +

    Package ‘count1to’ adds several \@addtoreset commands that confuse ‘hyperref’. Therefore \theH<...> has to be fixed: -

    +
       \usepackage{count1to}
    - 
      \AtBeginDocument{% *after* \usepackage{count1to} - 
        \renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\theHchapter.\arabic{section}}% - 
        \renewcommand*{\theHsubsection}{\theHsection.\arabic{subsection}}% - 
        \renewcommand*{\theHsubsubsection}{\theHsubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}% - 
        \renewcommand*{\theHparagraph}{\theHsubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}% - 
        \renewcommand*{\theHsubparagraph}{\theHparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}% - 
      } -
    -

    -

    +  \AtBeginDocument{% *after* \usepackage{count1to} +    \renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\theHchapter.\arabic{section}}% +    \renewcommand*{\theHsubsection}{\theHsection.\arabic{subsection}}% +    \renewcommand*{\theHsubsubsection}{\theHsubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}% +    \renewcommand*{\theHparagraph}{\theHsubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}% +    \renewcommand*{\theHsubparagraph}{\theHparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}% +  } + +

    +

    9.1.12 dblaccnt
    -

    pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before: + id="x1-660009.1.12">dblaccnt +

    pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before: -

    +
       \usepackage{hyperref}
    - 
      \usepackage{dblaccnt} -
    -

    or see entry for +

    or see entry for vietnam. -

    +

    9.1.13 easyeqn
    -

    Not compatible, breaks. -

    + id="x1-670009.1.13">easyeqn +

    Not compatible, breaks. +

    9.1.14 ellipsis
    -

    This packages redefines ellipsis +

    This packages redefines \textellipsis after package hyperref (pd1enc.def/puenc.def should be loaded before): -

    +
       \usepackage{hyperref}
    - 
      \usepackage{ellipsis} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{ellipsis} + +

    +

    9.1.15 float
    + id="x1-690009.1.15">float -
    +
      \usepackage{float}
    - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    • Several \caption commands are not supported inside one float object.
    • Anchor are set at top of the float object, if its style is controlled by float.sty.
    -

    +

    9.1.16 endnotes
    -

    Unsupported. -

    + id="x1-700009.1.16">endnotes +

    Unsupported. +

    9.1.17 foiltex
    -

    Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b: Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into foiltex +

    Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b: Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into \@begindvi, it uses package ‘atbegshi’ instead, that hooks into \shipout. Thus the patch of ‘foils.cls’ regarding hyperref is now obsolete and causes an undefined error message about \@hyperfixhead. This is fixed in FoilTeX 2.1.4b. -

    +

    9.1.18 footnote
    -

    This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref’s footnote support by using option + id="x1-720009.1.18">footnote +

    This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref’s footnote support by using option hyperfootnotes=false. -

    +

    9.1.19 geometry
    -

    Driver ‘dvipdfm’ and program ‘dvipdfm’ might generate a warning: Sorry. Too late to change page size + id="x1-730009.1.19">geometry +

    Driver ‘dvipdfm’ and program ‘dvipdfm’ might generate a warning: Sorry. Too late to change page size Then prefer the program ‘dvipdfmx’ or use one of the following workarounds to move the \special of geometry to an earlier location: -

    +
    +    \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes
    +    \usepackage{atbegshi}
    +    \AtBeginDocument{%
    +      \let\OrgAtBeginDvi\AtBeginDvi
    +      \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst
    +    }
    +    \usepackage[
    +      paperwidth=170mm,
    +      paperheight=240mm
    +    ]{geometry}
    +    \AtBeginDocument{%
    +      \let\AtBeginDvi\OrgAtBeginDvi
    +    }
    +    \usepackage{hyperref}
    +
    +  or
    +
         \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes
    - 
        \usepackage{atbegshi} - 
        \AtBeginDocument{% - 
          \let\OrgAtBeginDvi\AtBeginDvi - 
          \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst - 
        } - 
        \usepackage[ - 
          paperwidth=170mm, - 
          paperheight=240mm - 
        ]{geometry} - 
        \AtBeginDocument{% - 
          \let\AtBeginDvi\OrgAtBeginDvi - 
        } - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 

      or - 

        \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes - 
        \usepackage{atbegshi} - 
        \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst - 
        \usepackage[ - 
          paperwidth=170mm, - 
          paperheight=240mm - 
        ]{geometry} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +    \usepackage{atbegshi} +    \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst +    \usepackage[ +      paperwidth=170mm, +      paperheight=240mm +    ]{geometry} +    \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.20 IEEEtran.cls
    -

    version IEEEtran.cls +

    version V1.6b (because of \@makecaption, see ChangeLog) -

    +

    9.1.21 index
    -

    version index +

    version 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \addcontentsline redefinition) -

    +

    9.1.22 lastpage
    -

    Compatible. -

    + id="x1-760009.1.22">lastpage +

    Compatible. +

    9.1.23 linguex
    + id="x1-770009.1.23">linguex -
    +
      \usepackage{hyperref}
    - 
      \usepackage{linguex} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{linguex} + +

    +

    9.1.24 ltabptch
    + id="x1-780009.1.24">ltabptch -
    +
      \usepackage{longtable}
    - 
      \usepackage{ltabptch} - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{ltabptch} +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.25 mathenv
    -

    Unsupported. -

    Both ‘mathenv’ and ‘hyperref’ messes around with environment ‘eqnarray’. You can load ‘mathenv’ + id="x1-790009.1.25">mathenv +

    Unsupported. +

    Both ‘mathenv’ and ‘hyperref’ messes around with environment ‘eqnarray’. You can load ‘mathenv’ after ‘hyperref’ to avoid an error message. But \label will not work inside environment ‘eqnarray’ properly, for example. -

    +

    9.1.26 minitoc-hyper
    -

    This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original package minitoc instead. -

    + id="x1-800009.1.26">minitoc-hyper +

    This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original package minitoc instead. +

    9.1.27 multind
    + id="x1-810009.1.27">multind -
    +
      \usepackage{multind}
    - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.28 natbib
    + id="x1-820009.1.28">natbib -
    +
      \usepackage{natbib}
    - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.29 nomencl
    -

    Example for introducing links for the page numbers: + id="x1-830009.1.29">nomencl +

    Example for introducing links for the page numbers: -

    +
           \renewcommand*{\pagedeclaration}[1]{\unskip, \hyperpage{#1}}
    -
    -

    -

    For equations the following might work: + +

    +

    For equations the following might work: -

    +
           \renewcommand*{\eqdeclaration}[1]{%
    - 
            \hyperlink{equation.#1}{(Equation~#1)}% - 
          } - 
        But the mapping from the equation number to the anchor name - 
        is not available in general. -
    -

    -

    +        \hyperlink{equation.#1}{(Equation~#1)}% +      } +    But the mapping from the equation number to the anchor name +    is not available in general. + +

    +

    9.1.30 parskip
    + id="x1-840009.1.30">parskip -
    +
      \usepackage{parskip}
    - 
      \usepackage{hyperref}[2012/08/20] -
    -

    -

    Both packages want to redefine +

    +

    Both packages want to redefine \@starttoc. -

    +

    9.1.31 prettyref
    + id="x1-850009.1.31">prettyref -
    +
     %%% example for prettyref %%%
    - 
    \documentclass{article} - 
    \usepackage{prettyref} - 
    \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} - 

    %\newrefformat{FIG}{Figure~\ref{#1}}% without hyperref - 
    \newrefformat{FIG}{\hyperref[{#1}]{Figure~\ref*{#1}}} - 

    \begin{document} - 
      This is a reference to \prettyref{FIG:ONE}. - 
      \newpage - 
      \begin{figure} - 
        \caption{This is my figure} - 
        \label{FIG:ONE} - 
      \end{figure} - 
    \end{document} - 
    %%% example for prettyref %%% - 
           -
    -

    -

    +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{prettyref} +\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} + +%\newrefformat{FIG}{Figure~\ref{#1}}% without hyperref +\newrefformat{FIG}{\hyperref[{#1}]{Figure~\ref*{#1}}} + +\begin{document} +  This is a reference to \prettyref{FIG:ONE}. +  \newpage +  \begin{figure} +    \caption{This is my figure} +    \label{FIG:ONE} +  \end{figure} +\end{document} +%%% example for prettyref %%% +       + +

    +

    9.1.32 ntheorem
    + id="x1-860009.1.32">ntheorem -
    +
      ntheorem-hyper.sty is an old patched version of ntheorem.sty.
    - 
      Newer versions of ntheorem know the option hyperref: - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        \usepackage[hyperref]{ntheorem} - 
      But there are still unsolved problems (options thref, ...). -
    -

    -

    +  Newer versions of ntheorem know the option hyperref: +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    \usepackage[hyperref]{ntheorem} +  But there are still unsolved problems (options thref, ...). + +

    +

    9.1.33 setspace
    + id="x1-870009.1.33">setspace -
    +
      \usepackage{setspace}
    - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.34 sidecap
    + id="x1-880009.1.34">sidecap -
    +
      Before 2002/05/24 v1.5h:
    - 
        \usepackage{nameref} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        \usepackage{sidecap} -
    -

    -

    +    \usepackage{nameref} +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    \usepackage{sidecap} + +

    +

    9.1.35 subfigure
    + id="x1-890009.1.35">subfigure -
    +
      1995/03/06 v2.0:
    - 
        \usepackage{subfigure} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        % hypertexnames is set to false. - 
      v2.1: - 
        \usepackage{nameref} - 
        \usepackage{subfigure} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        or - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        \usepackage{subfigure} - 
      v2.1.2: - 
        please update - 
      v2.1.3: - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        \usepackage{subfigure} - 
        or vice versa? -
    -

    -

    +    \usepackage{subfigure} +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    % hypertexnames is set to false. +  v2.1: +    \usepackage{nameref} +    \usepackage{subfigure} +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    or +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    \usepackage{subfigure} +  v2.1.2: +    please update +  v2.1.3: +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    \usepackage{subfigure} +    or vice versa? + +

    +

    9.1.36 titleref
    + id="x1-900009.1.36">titleref -
    +
      \usepackage{nameref}
    - 
      \usepackage{titleref}% without usetoc - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage{titleref}% without usetoc +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.37 tabularx
    -

    Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment ‘tabularx’, because they uses the optional + id="x1-910009.1.37">tabularx +

    Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment ‘tabularx’, because they uses the optional argument of \footnotetext, see section ‘Limitations’. Before version 2011/09/28 6.82i hyperref had disabled footnotes entirely by ‘hyperfootnotes=false’. -

    +

    9.1.38 titlesec
    -

    titlesec +

    nameref supports titlesec, but hyperref does not (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with unnumbered section, perhaps problems with page breaks with numbered ones). -

    +

    9.1.39 ucs/utf8x.def
    -

    The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it does some calculations and stores the result in a + id="x1-930009.1.39">ucs/utf8x.def +

    The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it does some calculations and stores the result in a macro for speeding up the next calls of that UTF8 sequence. However this makes the first call non-expandable and will break if used in information entries or bookmarks. Package ucs offers @@ -6647,33 +6582,33 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\PrerenderUnicode or \PreloadUnicodePage to solve this: -

    +
         \usepackage{ucs}
    - 
        \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref}% or with option unicode - 
        \PrerenderUnicode{^^c3^^b6}% or \PrerenderUnicodePage{1} - 
        \hypersetup{pdftitle={Umlaut example: ^^c3^^b6}} -
    -

    The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes for the README file, you can use the +    \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc} +    \usepackage{hyperref}% or with option unicode +    \PrerenderUnicode{^^c3^^b6}% or \PrerenderUnicodePage{1} +    \hypersetup{pdftitle={Umlaut example: ^^c3^^b6}} + +

    The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes for the README file, you can use the characters directly. -

    +

    9.1.40 varioref
    -

    There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to sort them out. Therefore this package is + id="x1-940009.1.40">varioref +

    There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to sort them out. Therefore this package is now unsupported. -

    Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works with the following loading +

    Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works with the following loading order: -

    +
         \usepackage{nameref}
    - 
        \usepackage{varioref} - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample, 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for +    \usepackage{varioref} +    \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    Also some babel versions can be problematic. For example, 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for varioref that breaks the hyperref support for varioref. -

    Also unsupported: +

    Also unsupported:

    • \Ref, \Vref do not uppercase the first letter
    • \vpageref[]{...} On the same page a previous space is not suppressed.
    -

    +

    9.1.41 verse
    -

    Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref. -

    For older versions see example from de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified): + id="x1-950009.1.41">verse +

    Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref. +

    For older versions see example from de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified): -

    +
       \documentclass{article}
    - 

      % package order does not matter - 
      \usepackage{verse} - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} - 

      \makeatletter - 
      % make unique poemline anchors - 
      \newcounter{verse@env} - 
      \setcounter{verse@env}{0} - 
      \let\org@verse\verse - 
      \def\verse{% - 
        \stepcounter{verse@env}% - 
        \org@verse - 
      } - 
      \def\theHpoemline{\arabic{verse@env}.\thepoemline} - 

      % add anchor for before \addcontentsline in \@vsptitle - 
      \let\org@vsptitle\@vsptitle - 
      \def\@vsptitle{% - 
        \phantomsection - 
        \org@vsptitle - 
      } - 
      \makeatother - 

      \begin{document} - 

      \poemtitle{Poem 1} - 
      \begin{verse} - 
      An one-liner. - 
      \end{verse} - 

      \newpage - 

      \poemtitle{Poem 2} - 
      \begin{verse} - 
      Another one-liner. - 
      \end{verse} - 

      \end{document} -
    -

    -

    + +  % package order does not matter +  \usepackage{verse} +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +  \makeatletter +  % make unique poemline anchors +  \newcounter{verse@env} +  \setcounter{verse@env}{0} +  \let\org@verse\verse +  \def\verse{% +    \stepcounter{verse@env}% +    \org@verse +  } +  \def\theHpoemline{\arabic{verse@env}.\thepoemline} + +  % add anchor for before \addcontentsline in \@vsptitle +  \let\org@vsptitle\@vsptitle +  \def\@vsptitle{% +    \phantomsection +    \org@vsptitle +  } +  \makeatother + +  \begin{document} + +  \poemtitle{Poem 1} +  \begin{verse} +  An one-liner. +  \end{verse} + +  \newpage + +  \poemtitle{Poem 2} +  \begin{verse} +  Another one-liner. +  \end{verse} + +  \end{document} + +

    +

    9.1.42 vietnam
    + id="x1-960009.1.42">vietnam -
    +
      % pd1enc.def should be loaded before package dblaccnt:
    - 
      \usepackage[PD1,OT1]{fontenc} - 
      \usepackage{vietnam} - 
      \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    +  \usepackage[PD1,OT1]{fontenc} +  \usepackage{vietnam} +  \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    +

    9.1.43 XeTeX
    -

    Default for the encoding of bookmarks is ‘pdfencoding=auto’. That means the strings are always treated -as unicode strings. Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set, it is written as ASCII string. -The reason is that the XeTeX +

    Default for the encoding of bookmarks is pdfencoding=unicode. That means the strings are always +treated as unicode strings. If auto or pdfdoc is forced it applies only if the string restricts to the +printable ASCII set, The reason is that the \special does not support PDFDocEncoding. -

    In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a +

    In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a number of places for xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning -

    Failed to convert input string to UTF16... -

    This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has been removed. +

    This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has been removed. \csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname should no longer be used. -

    +

    10 LimitationsLimitations5

    + id="x1-98001f5">

    10.1 Wrapped/broken link support

    -

    Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other + id="x1-9900010.1">Wrapped/broken link support +

    Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other drivers lack this feature, e.g. dvips, dvipsone. -

    Workarounds: +

    Workarounds:

    • For long section or caption titles in the table of contents or list of figures/tables option breakurl. class="ec-lmss-10">breaklinks is intended for internal use. But it can be used to force link wrapping, e.g. when printing a document. However, when such a document is converted to PDF and viewed with a PDF viewer, the active link area will be misplaced. -

      Another limitation: some penalties are “optimized” by TeX, thus there are missing break +

      Another limitation: some penalties are “optimized” by TeX, thus there are missing break points, especially within \url. (See thread “hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2” in comp.text.tex 2005-09).

    -

    +

    10.2 Links across pages

    -

    In general they have problems: + id="x1-10000010.2">Links across pages +

    In general they have problems:

    • Some driver doesn’t support them at all (see above).
    • The driver allows it, but the link result might include the footer and/or header, or an error message can occur sometimes.
    -

    +

    10.3 Footnotes

    -

    LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the footnote text (Footnotes +

    LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the footnote text (\footnotemark, \footnotetext). This interface might be enough for visual typesetting. But the relation between @@ -6823,54 +6761,54 @@ Thus the implementation of hyperref does not support the optional argument of \footnotemark and \footnotetext. -

    +

    11 HintsHints6

    + id="x1-102001f6">

    11.1 Spaces in option values

    -

    Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given in Spaces in option values +

    Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given in \documentclass or \usepackage (or \RequirePackage), e.g.: -

    +
         \usepackage[pdfborder=0 0 1]{hyperref}
    -
    -

    Package hyperref now gets + +

    Package hyperref now gets -

    +
         pdfborder=001
    -
    -

    and the result is an invalid PDF file. As workaround braces can be used: + +

    and the result is an invalid PDF file. As workaround braces can be used: -

    +
         \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 1}]{hyperref}
    -
    -

    Some options can also be given in +

    Some options can also be given in \hypersetup -

    +
         \hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 1}
    -
    -

    In +

    In \hypersetup the options are directly processed as key value options (see package keyval) without space stripping in the value part. -

    Alternatively, LaTeX’s option handling system can be adapted to key value options by one of the +

    Alternatively, LaTeX’s option handling system can be adapted to key value options by one of the packages kvoptions-patch (from project kvoptions) or xkvltxp (from project xsetkeys). -

    +

    11.2 Index with makeindex

    + id="x1-10400011.2">Index with makeindex
    • Package hyperref adds \hyperpage commands by the encap mechanism (see documentation @@ -6890,15 +6828,15 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage command. With logical markup this situation can easily be solved: -
      +
                  \usepackage{makeidx}
      -      
            \makeindex -  
            \usepackage[hyperindex]{hyperref} -  
            \newcommand*{\main}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}} -  
            ... -  
            \index{Some example|main} -
      -

      +       \makeindex +       \usepackage[hyperindex]{hyperref} +       \newcommand*{\main}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}} +       ... +       \index{Some example|main} + +

    • Scientic Word/Scientific WorkPlace users can use package robustindex with hyperindex=false.
    • @@ -6906,10 +6844,10 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage command. With class="ec-lmss-10">encap. Example for use of “?”: -
      +
                  \usepackage[encap=?]{hyperref}
      -
      -

      + +

    • Another possibility is the insertion of \hyperpage by a style file for makeindex. For this case, @@ -6919,114 +6857,114 @@ class="ec-lmvtt-10">\hyperpage will be defined regardless o setting of hyperindex. -
      +
            %%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%%
      -      
      delim_0 ", \\hyperpage{" -  
      delim_1 ", \\hyperpage{" -  
      delim_2 ", \\hyperpage{" -  
      delim_n "}, \\hyperpage{" -  
      delim_t "}" -  
      encap_prefix "}\\" -  
      encap_infix "{\\hyperpage{" -  
      encap_suffix "}" -  
      %%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%% -
      -

    -

    + delim_0 ", \\hyperpage{" + delim_1 ", \\hyperpage{" + delim_2 ", \\hyperpage{" + delim_n "}, \\hyperpage{" + delim_t "}" + encap_prefix "}\\" + encap_infix "{\\hyperpage{" + encap_suffix "}" + %%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%% + +

    +

    11.3 Warning Warning "bookmark level for unknown <foobar> defaults to 0"

    -

    Getting rid of it: +

    Getting rid of it: -

    +
     \makeatletter
    - 
    \providecommand*{\toclevel@<foobar>}{0} - 
    \makeatother -
    -

    -

    +\providecommand*{\toclevel@<foobar>}{0} +\makeatother + +

    +

    11.4 Link anchors in figures

    -

    The caption command increments the counter and here is the place where hyperref set the corresponding + id="x1-10600011.4">Link anchors in figures +

    The caption command increments the counter and here is the place where hyperref set the corresponding anchor. Unhappily the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not visible if a link jumps to a figure. In this case, try package hypcap that implements a method to circumvent the problem. -

    +

    11.5 Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries:

    + id="x1-10700011.5">Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries: -
    +
     \documentclass[pdftex]{article}
    - 
    \usepackage[unicode]{hyperref} -
    -

    -

    Support for additional unicode characters: -

    Example: +

    +

    Support for additional unicode characters: +

    Example: \.{a} and \d{a} -

    1. Get a list with unicode data, eg: -

    http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt -

    2. Identify the characters (

    1. Get a list with unicode data, eg: +

    http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt +

    2. Identify the characters (\.{a}, \d{a}): -

    +
         0227;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT ABOVE;...
    - 
        1EA1;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT BELOW;... -
    -

    -

    3. Calculate the octal code: -

    The first characters of the line in the file are hex values, convert each byte and prepend them with a +    1EA1;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT BELOW;... + +

    +

    3. Calculate the octal code: +

    The first characters of the line in the file are hex values, convert each byte and prepend them with a backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.) -

    +
         0227 -> \002\047
    - 
        1EA1 -> \036\241 -
    -

    -

    4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref: -

    Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, this is marked by +

    +

    4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref: +

    Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, this is marked by 9 (8 and 9 cannot occur in octal numbers): -

    +
         \002\047 -> \9002\047
    - 
        \036\241 -> \9036\241 -
    -

    -

    Optional: +

    +

    Optional: 8 is used for abbreviations: -

    +
         \900 = \80, \901 = \81, \902 = \82, ...
    - 

        \9002\047 -> \82\047 -
    -

    -

    5. Declare the character with LaTeX: + +    \9002\047 -> \82\047 + +

    +

    5. Declare the character with LaTeX: -

    +
     \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\.}{PU}{a}{\82\047}
    - 
    \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\d}{PU}{a}{\9036\241} - 

    \begin{document} - 
    \section{\={a}, \d{a}, \’{a}, \.{a}} - 
    \end{document} - 
           -
    -

    -

    +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\d}{PU}{a}{\9036\241} + +\begin{document} +\section{\={a}, \d{a}, \’{a}, \.{a}} +\end{document} +       + +

    +

    11.6 Footnotes

    -

    The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use Footnotes +

    The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope to use \footnotemark and \footnotetext out of order or reusing \footnotemark. Here you can either disa class="ec-lmvtt-10">hyperfootnotes=false or fiddle with internal macros, nasty examples: -

    +
    +\documentclass{article}
    +\usepackage{hyperref}
    +\begin{document}
    +Hello%
    +\footnote{The first footnote}
    +World%
    +\addtocounter{footnote}{-1}%
    +\addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}%
    +\footnotemark.
    +\end{document}
    +
    +  or
    +
     \documentclass{article}
    - 
    \usepackage{hyperref} - 
    \begin{document} - 
    Hello% - 
    \footnote{The first footnote} - 
    World% - 
    \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}% - 
    \addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% - 
    \footnotemark. - 
    \end{document} - 

      or - 

    \documentclass{article} - 

    \usepackage{hyperref} - 

    \begin{document} - 

    \makeatletter - 

    A% - 
      \footnotemark - 
      \let\saved@Href@A\Hy@footnote@currentHref - 
      % remember link name - 
    B% - 
      \footnotemark - 
      \let\saved@Href@B\Hy@footnote@currentHref - 
    b% - 
      \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}% - 
      \addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% generate the same anchor - 
      \footnotemark - 
    C% - 
      \footnotemark - 
      \let\saved@Href@C\Hy@footnote@currentHref - 

      \addtocounter{footnote}{-2}% - 
      \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@A - 
    \footnotetext{AAAA}% - 
      \addtocounter{footnote}{1}% - 
      \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@B - 
    \footnotetext{BBBBB}% - 
      \addtocounter{footnote}{1}% - 
      \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@C - 
    \footnotetext{CCCC}% - 

    \end{document} -
    -

    - -

    + +\usepackage{hyperref} + +\begin{document} + +\makeatletter + +A% +  \footnotemark +  \let\saved@Href@A\Hy@footnote@currentHref +  % remember link name +B% +  \footnotemark +  \let\saved@Href@B\Hy@footnote@currentHref +b% +  \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}% +  \addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% generate the same anchor +  \footnotemark +C% +  \footnotemark +  \let\saved@Href@C\Hy@footnote@currentHref + +  \addtocounter{footnote}{-2}% +  \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@A +\footnotetext{AAAA}% +  \addtocounter{footnote}{1}% +  \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@B +\footnotetext{BBBBB}% +  \addtocounter{footnote}{1}% +  \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@C +\footnotetext{CCCC}% + +\end{document} + +

    + +

    11.7 Subordinate counters

    -

    Some counters do not have unique values and require the value of other counters to be unique. For + id="x1-10900011.7">Subordinate counters +

    Some counters do not have unique values and require the value of other counters to be unique. For example, sections or figures might be numbered within chapters or \newtheorem is used with an optional counter argument. Internally LaTeX uses \@addtoreset to catch this situation. Also \numberwithin of package amsmath is caught by hyperref. -

    However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place before hyperref is loaded, the old +

    However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place before hyperref is loaded, the old meaning of \@addtoreset is called without hyperref’s additions. Then the companion counter macro \theH<counter> can be redefined accordingly. Or move the definition of subordinate counters after hyperref is loaded. -

    Example for

    Example for \newtheorem, problematic case: -

    +
         \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
    - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} -
    -

    Solution a) +    \usepackage{hyperref} + +

    Solution a) -

    +
         \usepackage{hyperref}
    - 
        \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section} -
    -

    Solution b) +    \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section} + +

    Solution b) -

    +
         \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section]
    - 
        \usepackage{hyperref} - 
        \newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}} -
    -

    -

    +    \usepackage{hyperref} +    \newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}} + +

    +

    12 History and acknowledgments

    -

    The original authors of History and acknowledgments +

    The original authors of hyperbasics.tex and hypertex.sty, from which this package descends, are Tanmoy Bhattacharya and Thorsten Ohl. Package

    Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided fixes, which has +

    Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided fixes, which has made the package more robust. The days spent on RevTeX are entirely due to him! The investigations of Bill Moss into the later versions including native PDF support uncovered a good many bugs, and his testing is appreciated. Hans Hagen provided a lot of insight into PDF. -

    Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the

    Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the dvipsone and dviwindo drivers. Sergey Lesenko provided the changes needed for hyper package (developed in parallel with hyperref) showed me solutions for some problems. Hopefully the two packages will combine one day. -

    The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T. V. Raman, for encouragement, support and +

    The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T. V. Raman, for encouragement, support and ideas; Thomas Merz, whose book Web Publishing with Acrobat/PDF provided crucial insights; D. P. Story, whose detailed article about pdfmarks and forms solved many practical problems; and Hans Hagen, who explained how to do it in pdftex. -

    Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been lost. -

    Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the

    Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been lost. +

    Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the backref module, the ps2pdf and dviwindo support, frequent general rewrites of my bad code, and for working on changes to the xr package to suit @@ -7179,7 +7117,7 @@ class="ec-lmss-10">hyperref.

    13 GNU Free Documentation License

    + id="x1-11100013">GNU Free Documentation License

    Version 1.2, November 2002

    Copyright © 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
    Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies o not allowed.

    Preamble

    + id="x1-11200013">Preamble

    The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for @@ -7205,7 +7143,7 @@ printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is i reference.

    13.1 Applicability and definitions

    + id="x1-11300013.1">Applicability and definitions

    This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under @@ -7269,7 +7207,7 @@ that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meanin License.

    13.2 Verbatim copying

    + id="x1-11400013.2">Verbatim copying

    You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this @@ -7277,14 +7215,14 @@ License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading o copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 13.3. +href="#x1-11500013.3">13.3.

    You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.

    13.3 Copying in quantity

    + id="x1-11500013.3">Copying in quantity

    If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front @@ -7311,85 +7249,85 @@ redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you of the Document.

    13.4 Modifications

    + id="x1-11600013.4">Modifications

    You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 13.2 +href="#x1-11400013.2">13.2 and 13.3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the +href="#x1-11500013.3">13.3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:

    1. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, + class="enumerate" id="x1-116002x1">Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
    2. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship + class="enumerate" id="x1-116004x2">List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this requirement.
    3. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. + class="enumerate" id="x1-116006x3">State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher.
    4. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. + class="enumerate" id="x1-116008x4">Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
    5. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright + class="enumerate" id="x1-116010x5">Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
    6. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission + class="enumerate" id="x1-116012x6">Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
    7. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts + class="enumerate" id="x1-116014x7">Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice.
    8. Include an unaltered copy of this License. + class="enumerate" id="x1-116016x8">Include an unaltered copy of this License.
    9. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at + class="enumerate" id="x1-116018x9">Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence.
    10. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a + class="enumerate" id="x1-116020x10">Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
    11. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the + class="enumerate" id="x1-116022x11">For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
    12. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their + class="enumerate" id="x1-116024x12">Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
    13. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the + class="enumerate" id="x1-116026x13">Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
    14. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with + class="enumerate" id="x1-116028x14">Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
    15. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. + class="enumerate" id="x1-116030x15">Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
    @@ -7412,10 +7350,10 @@ one. names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

    13.5 Combining documents

    + id="x1-11700013.5">Combining documents

    You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 13.4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of +href="#x1-11600013.4">13.4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. @@ -7431,7 +7369,7 @@ documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine “Endorsements”.

    13.6 Collections of documents

    + id="x1-11800013.6">Collections of documents

    You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each @@ -7443,7 +7381,7 @@ in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.

    13.7 Aggregation with independent works

    + id="x1-11900013.7">Aggregation with independent works

    A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what @@ -7451,17 +7389,17 @@ the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

    If the Cover Text requirement of section 13.3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if +href="#x1-11500013.3">13.3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.

    13.8 Translation

    + id="x1-12000013.8">Translation

    Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 13.4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special +href="#x1-11600013.4">13.4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, @@ -7471,12 +7409,12 @@ and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original prevail.

    If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 13.4) to Preserve its Title (section 13.1) will typically require changing the actual +href="#x1-11600013.4">13.4) to Preserve its Title (section 13.1) will typically require changing the actual title.

    13.9 Termination

    + id="x1-12100013.9">Termination

    You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or @@ -7484,7 +7422,7 @@ rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so l in full compliance.

    13.10 Future revisions of this license

    + id="x1-12200013.10">Future revisions of this license

    The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. @@ -7498,17 +7436,17 @@ Foundation.

    Addendum: how to use this license for your documents

    + id="x1-12300013.10">Addendum: how to use this license for your documents

    To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:

    -

    +

    Copyright © YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the - license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.

    + license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.

    If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:

    with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and @@ -7520,6 +7458,8 @@ examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU to permit their use in free software. + + diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf index 513e454ffd..64dffdeb28 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex index ded7aeb799..ddd48e6ea1 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.tex @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ } \makeatother \title{Hypertext marks in \hologo{LaTeX}: a manual for \xpackage{hyperref}} -\date{2020-05-15 v7.00e} +\date{2021-02-04 v7.00g} \begin{document} @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ if it can be found, and this is a convenient place to set options on a site-wide basis. Note however that some options (for example \texttt{unicode}) can only be used as -packge options, and not in \verb|\hypersetup| as the option settings are processed +package options, and not in \verb|\hypersetup| as the option settings are processed as the package is read. As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by: @@ -559,9 +559,8 @@ plainpages & boolean & false & Forces page anchors to be named by the Arabic raiselinks & boolean & true & In the hypertex driver, the height of links is normally calculated by the driver as simply the base line of contained text; this options forces \verb|\special| commands to reflect the real height of the link (which could contain a graphic) \\ -breaklinks & boolean & false & Allows link text to break across lines; since this cannot be accommodated in PDF, it is - only set true by default if the pdftex driver is used. This makes links on multiple lines - into different PDF links to the same target. \\ +breaklinks & boolean & both & This option is in hyperref only used in the dviwindo driver, in all other cases it doesn't do anything sensible---it neither allows nor prevents links to be broken. The ocgx2 package +checks the state of the boolean.\\ pageanchor & boolean & true & Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor at the top left corner. If this is turned off, \verb|\printindex| will not contain valid hyperlinks. \\ @@ -739,7 +738,7 @@ pdftitle & text & & Sets the document information Title field pdfauthor & text & & Sets the document information Author field \\ pdfsubject & text & & Sets the document information Subject field \\ pdfcreator & text & & Sets the document information Creator field \\ -addtopdfproducer & text & & Adds additional text to the document information Producer field \\ +addtopdfcreator & text & & Adds additional text to the document information Creator field \\ pdfkeywords & text & & Sets the document information Keywords field \\ pdftrapped & name & empty & Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are \verb|True|, \verb|False| and \verb|Unknown|. An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\ @@ -808,7 +807,7 @@ pdfviewclip & name & empty & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possi \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ pdfwindowui & boolean & true & make PDF user interface elements visible \\ -unicode & boolean & false & Unicode encoded PDF strings +unicode & boolean & true & Unicode encoded PDF strings \end{longtable} Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set @@ -1017,7 +1016,7 @@ runcolor & \textit{filecolor} & color of `run' links\\ setpagesize & \textit{true} & set page size by special driver commands \\ tex4ht & & use \textsf{\TeX4ht} backend \\ textures & & use \textsf{Textures} backend \\ -unicode & \textit{false} & Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true with \textsf{Xe\TeX} and \textsf{Lu\TeX} \\ +unicode & \textit{true} & Unicode encoded pdf strings, starting with version 2021-02-04 v7.00g set by default to true for all engines. \\ urlbordercolor & \textit{0 1 1} & color of border around URL links \\ urlcolor & \textit{magenta} & color of URL links \\ verbose & \textit{false} & be chatty \\ @@ -1392,6 +1391,19 @@ command names): } \end{verbatim} +\subsection{Pagelabels} +\begin{cmdsyntax} +\ci{thispdfpagelabel}\verb|{|\emph{page number format}\verb|}| +\end{cmdsyntax} + +This allows to change format of the page number shown in the tool bar of +a PDF viewer for a specific page, for example + +\verb+\thispdfpagelabel{Empty Page-\roman{page}}+ + +The command affects the page on which it is executed, so asynchronous page breaking +should be taken into account. It should be used in places where for example \verb+\thispagestyle+ can be use too. + \subsection{Utility macros} \label{hypercalcbp} @@ -1955,10 +1967,11 @@ sequence error would arise. \item \xoption{unicode} sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two bytes are used for most characters, surrogates need four bytes. \item \xoption{auto} PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters - outside the encoding and Unicode otherwise. + outside the encoding (outside ascii if an unicode engine is used) + and Unicode otherwise. This option is normally no suited for the unicode engines. \end{itemize} - The luatex driver uses \xoption{unicode} by default. If another encoding should be forced, + All drivers use \xoption{unicode} by default now. If another encoding should be forced, it should be done in \verb|hypersetup|. \subsection{Color options/package hycolor} @@ -2293,7 +2306,7 @@ The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by: These macros default to \#1 \#2 -What is actually shown in as the field is determined by: +What is actually shown in the field is determined by: \begin{cmdsyntax} \ci{MakeRadioField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}| \end{cmdsyntax} @@ -2905,7 +2918,7 @@ For equations the following might work: \end{verbatim} - Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample, + Also some babel versions can be problematic. For example, 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for varioref that breaks the hyperref support for varioref. @@ -2978,21 +2991,21 @@ For equations the following might work: \subsubsection{XeTeX} - Default for the encoding of bookmarks is `pdfencoding=auto'. + Default for the encoding of bookmarks is \verb|pdfencoding=unicode|. That means the strings are always treated as unicode strings. - Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set, - it is written as ASCII string. The reason is that the - \verb|\special| does not support PDFDocEncoding. + If \verb|auto| or \verb|pdfdoc| is forced it applies only + if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set, + The reason is that the \verb|\special| does not support PDFDocEncoding. In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a number of places for - xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning - + xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning + \verb"Failed to convert input string to UTF16..." - + This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has been removed. \verb|\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname| should no - longer be used. + longer be used. \section[Limitations]{Limitations% diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf index 226cdce2dd..86eea30ba5 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/nameref.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx index 17d19b77ad..b70a38a86a 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hluatex.dtx @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse % Source File: hluatex.dtx -% 2020-05-15 v7.00e +% 2021-02-04 v7.00g % % Copyright % 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ % % \begin{macrocode} %<*luatex> -%% 2020-05-15 v7.00e +%% 2021-02-04 v7.00g %% force unicode encoding, see issue #101 %% code mostly copied from hxetex.def \HyPsd@LoadUnicode @@ -706,33 +706,10 @@ \Hy@RemoveDurPageAttr#1#4\END \fi } -\def\hyper@pagehidden{% - \ifHy@useHidKey - \expandafter - \Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr\the\pdfpageattr^^J/Hid{} \END - \ifHy@pdfpagehidden - \edef\@processme{% - \global\pdfpageattr{% - \the\pdfpageattr - ^^J/Hid true % SPACE - }% - }% - \@processme - \fi - \fi -} -\gdef\Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr#1^^J/Hid#2#3 #4\END{% - \ifx\\#2\\% - \global\pdfpageattr{#1}% - \else - \Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr#1#4\END - \fi -} \pdf@ifdraftmode{}{% \g@addto@macro\Hy@EveryPageHook{% \hyper@pagetransition \hyper@pageduration - \hyper@pagehidden }% } \Hy@AtBeginDocument{% @@ -811,17 +788,6 @@ \close@pdflink }% } -\def\Hy@FixNotFirstPage{% - \gdef\Hy@FixNotFirstPage{% - \setbox\AtBeginShipoutBox=\hbox{% - \copy\AtBeginShipoutBox - }% - }% -} -\ltx@ifpackagelater{atbegshi}{2011/10/05}{% -}{% - \AtBeginShipout{\Hy@FixNotFirstPage}% -} \def\@Gauge[#1]#2#3#4{% parameters, label, minimum, maximum \Hy@Message{Sorry, pdftex does not support FORM gauges}% } diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx index aa618b1bd2..3e84e320ab 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.dtx @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ %% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek, %% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek. %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group -%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2021 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -50,7 +50,8 @@ %\ProvidesFile{puvnenc.def} %\ProvidesFile{puarenc.def} %\ProvidesFile{psdextra.def} -% [2020-05-15 v7.00e % +%\ProvidesFile{hyperref-langpatches.def} +% [2021-02-04 v7.00g % % Hypertext links for LaTeX] % Dummy hyperref (SR)] % Hyperref documentation driver file] @@ -89,7 +90,9 @@ % Hyperref: Additions to puenc.def for VnTeX] % Hyperref: Additions to puenc.def for Arabi] % Hyperref: Additions to PDF string support] +% Hyperref: patches for babel languages] %<*driver> +\PassOptionsToPackage{numbered}{hypdoc} \documentclass{ltxdoc} \usepackage{array,iftex} \iftutex @@ -586,28 +589,12 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \Hy@SetCatcodes % \end{macrocode} -% +% change 2020-07-24: require newer pdftexcmds and remove fallback code +% for version older than 2010. % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{ltxcmds}[2010/11/12] \RequirePackage{iftex}[2019/10/24] -\RequirePackage{pdftexcmds}[2009/04/10] -\@ifpackagelater{pdftexcmds}{2010/11/04}{}{% - \ltx@IfUndefined{pdfdraftmode}{% - \let\pdf@ifdraftmode\ltx@secondoftwo - }{% - \ifpdf - \def\pdf@ifdraftmode{% - \ifnum\pdfdraftmode=\ltx@one - \expandafter\ltx@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\ltx@secondoftwo - \fi - }% - \else - \let\pdf@ifdraftmode\ltx@secondoftwo - \fi - }% -} +\RequirePackage{pdftexcmds}[2018/09/10] % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{infwarerr}[2010/04/08] @@ -733,18 +720,6 @@ \expandafter\ltx@firstoftwo \fi }% - \ltx@ifpackagelater{ltxcmds}{2010/09/11}{}{% - \begingroup - \lccode`0=`\{\relax - \lowercase{\endgroup - \def\ltx@leftbracechar{0}% - }% - \begingroup - \lccode`0=`\}\relax - \lowercase{\endgroup - \def\ltx@rightbracechar{0}% - }% - }% } % \end{macrocode} % @@ -853,7 +828,6 @@ \newif\ifHy@ocgcolorlinks \newif\ifHy@pageanchor \newif\ifHy@pdfpagelabels -\newif\ifHy@pdfpagehidden \newif\ifHy@pdfstring \newif\ifHy@plainpages \newif\ifHy@psize @@ -898,7 +872,6 @@ \Hy@pdfnewwindowfalse \Hy@pageanchortrue \Hy@pdfpagelabelstrue -\Hy@pdfpagehiddenfalse \Hy@pdfstringfalse \Hy@plainpagesfalse \Hy@raiselinksfalse @@ -907,7 +880,7 @@ \Hy@psdextrafalse \Hy@pdftoolbartrue \Hy@typexmlfalse -\Hy@unicodefalse +\Hy@unicodetrue \Hy@pdfusetitlefalse \Hy@verbosefalse \Hy@pdfwindowuitrue @@ -1332,8 +1305,8 @@ % % \paragraph{Environments.} % \begin{macrocode} - \def\begin#1{\csname#1\endcsname}% - \def\end#1{\csname end#1\endcsname}% + \def\begin##1{\csname##1\endcsname}% + \def\end##1{\csname end##1\endcsname}% % \end{macrocode} % % \paragraph{Package color.} @@ -1370,12 +1343,7 @@ \let\bbl@info\@gobble \csname HyPsd@babel@\language@group\endcsname }% - \HyPsd@GreekPatch \HyPsd@SpanishPatch - \HyPsd@RussianPatch -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} - \HyPsd@BabelPatch % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1902,7 +1870,7 @@ \ltx@IfUndefined{StringEncodingConvertTest}{% }{% \EdefUnescapeString\HyPsd@temp#1% - \ifxetex + \iftutex \let\HyPsd@UnescapedString\HyPsd@temp \StringEncodingConvertTest\HyPsd@temp\HyPsd@temp {utf16be}{ascii-print}{% @@ -1997,7 +1965,7 @@ \catcode62 \the\catcode62\relax % > \catcode64 \the\catcode64\relax % @ \catcode91 \the\catcode91\relax % [ - \catcode92 \the\catcode92\relax % \ + \catcode92 \the\catcode92\relax % (backslash) \catcode93 \the\catcode93\relax % ] \catcode123 \the\catcode123\relax % { \catcode124 \the\catcode124\relax % | @@ -2017,7 +1985,7 @@ \catcode61 12 % = \catcode62 12 % > \catcode91 12 % [ - \catcode92 0 % \ + \catcode92 0 % (backslash) \catcode93 12 % ] \catcode123 1 % { \catcode124 12 % | @@ -2063,6 +2031,9 @@ % \LaTeX's NFSS. Because of large memory requirements the % encoding file for Unicode support is only loaded, if option % |unicode| is specified as package option. +% change 2020-08-14: Starting with version +% v7.00f the file is always loaded and unicode is the +% default option. % \begin{macro}{\HyPsd@LoadUnicode} % Because the file |puenc.def| takes a lot of memory, the loading % is defined in the macro \cs{HyPsd@LoadUnicode} called by @@ -2238,10 +2209,17 @@ \x % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} -% % \subsubsection{Babel languages} +% change 2020-10-10: moved language patches to its own file as a first step +% toward removing them completly. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifHy@next +\input{hyperref-langpatches.def} +% +%<*lang> +% \end{macrocode} % -% Since version 2008/03/16 v3.8j babel uses inside \cs{AtBeginDocument}: +% Since version 2008/03/16 v3.8j babel used inside \cs{AtBeginDocument}: %\begin{quote} %\begin{verbatim} %\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% @@ -2249,122 +2227,21 @@ %} %\end{verbatim} %\end{quote} -% As consequence the shorthands are shown in the bookmarks, -% not its result. Therefore \cs{languageshorthands} is -% disabled before the user hook. If there is a need to -% use the command, then \cs{HyOrg@languageshorthands} -% can be used inside \cs{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\HyPsd@BabelPatch{% - \let\HyOrg@languageshorthands\languageshorthands - \let\languageshorthands\HyPsd@LanguageShorthands -} -\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname pdf@strcmp\endcsname\relax - \let\HyPsd@langshort@system\@empty - \def\HyPsd@LanguageShorthands#1{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname HyPsd@langshort@#1\endcsname - \HyPsd@langshort@system - \expandafter\@gobble - \else - \expandafter\@firstofone - \fi - {% - \HyOrg@languageshorthands{#1}% - }% - }% -\else - \def\HyPsd@LanguageShorthands#1{% - \ifnum\pdf@strcmp{#1}{system}=\z@ - \expandafter\@gobble - \else - \expandafter\@firstofone - \fi - {% - \HyOrg@languageshorthands{#1}% - }% - }% -\fi -\def\Hy@temp{% - \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{% - \@ifpackagelater{babel}{2008/03/16}{% - \let\Hy@temp\@empty - }{% - \def\HyPsd@BabelPatch{% - \let\HyOrg@languageshorthands\languageshorthands - }% - }% - }{}% -} -\Hy@temp -\expandafter\Hy@AtBeginDocument\expandafter{\Hy@temp} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifHy@next -% \end{macrocode} +% As consequence the shorthands were shown in the bookmarks, and required +% a hyperref patch. In version 3.48 babel removed this unneeded code +% and so the patch could be removed. % % Nothing to do for english. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ltx@IfUndefined{danish@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@danish{% - \declare@shorthand{danish}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{danish}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{dutch@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@dutch{% - \declare@shorthand{dutch}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{dutch}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{finnish@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@finnish{% - \declare@shorthand{finnish}{"|}{}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{french@sh@:@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@frenchb{% - \def\guill@spacing{ }% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{german@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@german{% - \declare@shorthand{german}{"f}{f}% - \declare@shorthand{german}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{german}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{macedonian@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@macedonian{% - \declare@shorthand{macedonian}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{macedonian}{"~}{-}% - }% -}{} -\ltx@IfUndefined{ngerman@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@ngerman{% - \declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{portuges@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@portuges{% - \declare@shorthand{portuges}{"|}{}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{russian@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@russian{% - \declare@shorthand{russian}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{russian}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{slovene@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@slovene{% - \declare@shorthand{slovene}{"|}{}% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% Nested quoting environments are not supported (|<<|, |>>|). +% change 2020/07/16: removed patch for french. No longer needed. +% change 2020/07/21: removed patches for german, ngerman. Will be done by +% the language package. https://github.com/jspitz/babel-german/issues/4 +% change 2020/10/10: removed patches for danish, dutch, finnish, portugues, +% swedish, usorbian, slovene see https://github.com/latex3/babel/issues/84 +% change 2020/10/10: removed patch for macedonian, ukrainian; maintainers notified. +% change 2020/10/11: removed patch for russian, has been merged into babel-russian +% see https://github.com/kia999/babel-russian/pull/3 +% change 2021/02/04: removed patches for greek numerals, code is now in babel-greek. +% spanish: Nested quoting environments are not supported (|<<|, |>>|). % \begin{macrocode} \ltx@IfUndefined{spanish@sh@>@sel}{}{% \def\HyPsd@babel@spanish{% @@ -2376,164 +2253,6 @@ \declare@shorthand{spanish}{"?}{\textquestiondown}% }% } -\ltx@IfUndefined{swedish@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@swedish{% - \declare@shorthand{swedish}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{swedish}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{ukrainian@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@ukrainian{% - \declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"|}{}% - \declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"~}{-}% - }% -} -\ltx@IfUndefined{usorbian@sh@"@sel}{}{% - \def\HyPsd@babel@usorbian{% - \declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"f}{f}% - \declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"|}{}% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ltx@IfUndefined{greek@sh@\string~@sel}{% - \let\HyPsd@GreekPatch\@empty -}{% - \def\HyPsd@GreekPatch{% - \let\greeknumeral\HyPsd@greeknumeral - \let\Greeknumeral\HyPsd@Greeknumeral - }% -} -\def\HyPsd@greeknumeral#1{% - \HyPsd@GreekNum\@firstoftwo{#1}% -} -\def\HyPsd@Greeknumeral#1{% - \HyPsd@GreekNum\@secondoftwo{#1}% -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNum#1#2{% - \ifHy@unicode - \ifnum#2<\@ne - \@arabic{#2}% - \else - \ifnum#2<1000000 % - \HyPsd@@GreekNum#1{#2}% - \else - \@arabic{#2}% - \fi - \fi - \else - \@arabic{#2}% - \fi -} -\def\HyPsd@@GreekNum#1#2{% - \ifnum#2<\@m - \ifnum#2<10 % - \expandafter\HyPsd@GreekNumI - \expandafter\@gobble\expandafter#1\number#2% - \else - \ifnum#2<100 % - \expandafter\HyPsd@GreekNumII - \expandafter\@gobble\expandafter#1\number#2% - \else - \expandafter\HyPsd@GreekNumIII - \expandafter\@gobble\expandafter#1\number#2% - \fi - \fi - \ifnum#2>\z@ - \textnumeralsigngreek - \fi - \else - \ifnum#2<\@M - \expandafter\HyPsd@GreekNumIV\expandafter#1\number#2% - \else - \ifnum#2<100000 % - \expandafter\HyPsd@GreekNumV\expandafter#1\number#2% - \else - \expandafter\HyPsd@GreekNumVI\expandafter#1\number#2% - \fi - \fi - \fi -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNumI#1#2#3{% - #1{% - \ifnum#3>\z@ - \textnumeralsignlowergreek - \fi - }% - \expandafter#2% - \ifcase#3 % - {}{}% - \or\textalpha\textAlpha - \or\textbeta\textBeta - \or\textgamma\textGamma - \or\textdelta\textDelta - \or\textepsilon\textEpsilon - \or\textstigmagreek\textStigmagreek - \or\textzeta\textZeta - \or\texteta\textEta - \or\texttheta\textTheta - \else - {}{}% - \fi -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNumII#1#2#3#4{% - #1{% - \ifnum#3>\z@ - \textnumeralsignlowergreek - \fi - }% - \expandafter#2% - \ifcase#3 % - {}{}% - \or\textiota\textIota - \or\textkappa\textKappa - \or\textlambda\textLambda - \or\textmu\textMu - \or\textnu\textNu - \or\textxi\textXi - \or\textomicron\textOmicron - \or\textpi\textPi - \or\textkoppagreek\textKoppagreek - \else - {}{}% - \fi - \HyPsd@GreekNumI#1#2#4% -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNumIII#1#2#3#4#5{% - #1{% - \ifnum#3>\z@ - \textnumeralsignlowergreek - \fi - }% - \expandafter#2% - \ifcase#3 % - {}{}% - \or\textrho\textRho - \or\textsigma\textSigma - \or\texttau\textTau - \or\textupsilon\textUpsilon - \or\textphi\textPhi - \or\textchi\textChi - \or\textpsi\textPsi - \or\textomega\textOmega - \or\textsampigreek\textSampigreek - \else - {}{}% - \fi - \HyPsd@GreekNumII#1#2#4#5% -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNumIV#1#2#3#4#5{% - \HyPsd@GreekNumI\@firstofone#1#2% - \HyPsd@@GreekNum#1{#3#4#5}% -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNumV#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - \HyPsd@GreekNumII\@firstofone#1#2#3% - \HyPsd@@GreekNum#1{#4#5#6}% -} -\def\HyPsd@GreekNumVI#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{% - \HyPsd@GreekNumIII\@firstofone#1#2#3#4% - \HyPsd@@GreekNum#1{#5#6#7}% -} % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} \def\HyPsd@SpanishPatch{% @@ -2543,15 +2262,9 @@ }% } % \end{macrocode} -% Shorthand |"-| of `russianb.ldf' is not expandable, -% therefore it is disabled and replaced by |-|. % \begin{macrocode} -\def\HyPsd@RussianPatch{% - \ltx@IfUndefined{russian@sh@"@-@}{% - }{% - \@namedef{russian@sh@"@-@}{-}% - }% -} +% +%<*package> % \end{macrocode} % % \subsubsection{CJK patch} @@ -5169,7 +4882,11 @@ \def\HyPsd@pdfencoding@auto{auto} \def\HyPsd@pdfencoding@pdfdoc{pdfdoc} \def\HyPsd@pdfencoding@unicode{unicode} -\let\HyPsd@pdfencoding\Hy@pdfencoding@pdfdoc +% \end{macrocode} +% change 2020-08-14, use unicode by default: +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\HyPsd@pdfencoding\HyPsd@pdfencoding@unicode +\HyPsd@LoadUnicode \def\HyPsd@LoadStringEnc{% \RequirePackage{stringenc}[2009/12/15]% \let\HyPsd@LoadStringEnc\relax @@ -5613,13 +5330,13 @@ \def\pageautorefname{page}% } \def\HyLang@french{% - \def\equationautorefname{\'Equation}% + \def\equationautorefname{\'equation}% \def\footnoteautorefname{note}% \def\itemautorefname{item}% - \def\figureautorefname{Figure}% - \def\tableautorefname{Tableau}% - \def\partautorefname{Partie}% - \def\appendixautorefname{Appendice}% + \def\figureautorefname{figure}% + \def\tableautorefname{tableau}% + \def\partautorefname{partie}% + \def\appendixautorefname{annexe}% \def\chapterautorefname{chapitre}% \def\sectionautorefname{section}% \def\subsectionautorefname{sous-section}% @@ -5627,7 +5344,7 @@ \def\paragraphautorefname{paragraphe}% \def\subparagraphautorefname{sous-paragraphe}% \def\FancyVerbLineautorefname{ligne}% - \def\theoremautorefname{Th\'eor\`eme}% + \def\theoremautorefname{th\'eor\`eme}% \def\pageautorefname{page}% } \def\HyLang@german{% @@ -5958,6 +5675,42 @@ \def\theoremautorefname{Stelling}% \def\pageautorefname{pagina}% } +\def\HyLang@norsk{% + \def\equationautorefname{Ligning}% + \def\footnoteautorefname{fotnote}% + \def\itemautorefname{element}% + \def\figureautorefname{Figur}% + \def\tableautorefname{Tabell}% + \def\partautorefname{Del}% + \def\appendixautorefname{Tillegg}% + \def\chapterautorefname{kapittel}% + \def\sectionautorefname{seksjon}% + \def\subsectionautorefname{underseksjon}% + \def\subsubsectionautorefname{under-underseksjon}% + \def\paragraphautorefname{avsnitt}% + \def\subparagraphautorefname{underavsnitt}% + \def\FancyVerbLineautorefname{Linje}% + \def\theoremautorefname{Teorem}% + \def\pageautorefname{side}% +} +\def\HyLang@danish{% + \def\equationautorefname{Ligning}% + \def\footnoteautorefname{fodnote}% + \def\itemautorefname{element}% + \def\figureautorefname{Figur}% + \def\tableautorefname{Tabel}% + \def\partautorefname{Del}% + \def\appendixautorefname{Bilag}% + \def\chapterautorefname{kapitel}% + \def\sectionautorefname{sektion}% + \def\subsectionautorefname{under-sektion}% + \def\subsubsectionautorefname{under-under-sektion}% + \def\paragraphautorefname{afsnit}% + \def\subparagraphautorefname{underafsnit}% + \def\FancyVerbLineautorefname{linje}% + \def\theoremautorefname{Teorem}% + \def\pageautorefname{side}% +} % \end{macrocode} % % Instead of package babel's definition of \cmd{\addto} the @@ -6036,6 +5789,9 @@ \HyLang@DeclareLang{hungarian}{magyar}{} \HyLang@DeclareLang{greek}{greek}{} \HyLang@DeclareLang{dutch}{dutch}{} +\HyLang@DeclareLang{norsk}{norsk}{} +\HyLang@DeclareLang{norwegian}{norsk}{} +\HyLang@DeclareLang{danish}{danish}{} % \end{macrocode} % More work is needed in case of options |vietnamese| and |vietnam|. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -6297,21 +6053,6 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % -% The entry for the |/Hid| key in the page object is -% only necessary, if it is used and set to true for -% at least one time. If it is always false, then -% the |/Hid| key is not written to the pdf page -% object in order not to enlarge the pdf file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifHy@useHidKey -\Hy@useHidKeyfalse -\define@key{Hyp}{pdfpagehidden}[true]{% - \Hy@boolkey{pdfpagehidden}{#1}% - \ifHy@pdfpagehidden - \global\Hy@useHidKeytrue - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} % % The value of the |bordercolor| options are not processed % by the color package. Therefore the value consists of @@ -7194,15 +6935,10 @@ % so the NFSS2 definitions of PD1 or PU encoding is not % compatible. To fix this, \cmd{\texttilde} is defined % in babel manner. -% \begin{macrocode} -\Hy@nextfalse -\ltx@IfUndefined{spanish@sh@"@sel}{}{\Hy@nexttrue} -\ltx@IfUndefined{galician@sh@"@sel}{}{\Hy@nexttrue} -\ltx@IfUndefined{estonian@sh@"@sel}{}{\Hy@nexttrue} -\ifHy@next - \let\texttilde\~% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} +% +% change 2020-10-10: no trace of \cs{texttilde} can be found in the +% three languages spanish, galician and estonian so the patch has been removed +% as outdated. % % \begin{macrocode} \def\Hy@wrapper@babel#1#2{% @@ -10977,17 +10713,6 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{fancyvrb}{% - \@ifpackagelater{fancyvrb}{1998/05/20}{}{% - \def\FV@StepLineNo{% - \FV@SetLineNo - \def\FV@StepLineNo{\H@refstepcounter{FancyVerbLine}}% - \FV@StepLineNo - }% - }% -}{} -% \end{macrocode} % % \section{Package lastpage support} % Package lastpage directly writes the |\newlabel| command to the @@ -14251,55 +13976,12 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % -% \begin{macro}{\hyper@pagehidden} -% The boolean value of the key |/Hid| is stored in switch -% \cmd{\ifHy@pdfpagehidden}. -% First previous |/Hid| entries are removed, then the new -% one is appended, if the value is true (the PDF default -% is false). -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hyper@pagehidden{% - \ifHy@useHidKey - \expandafter - \Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr\the\pdfpageattr^^J/Hid{} \END - \ifHy@pdfpagehidden - \edef\@processme{% - \global\pdfpageattr{% - \the\pdfpageattr - ^^J/Hid true % SPACE - }% - }% - \@processme - \fi - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr} -% Macro \cmd{\Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr} removes a |/Hid| -% entry from \cmd{\pdfpageattr}. It is called with -% the end marker |^^J/Hid{} \END|. The trick is the -% empty group that does not appear in legal -% \cmd{\pdfpageattr} code. It appears in argument -% |#2| and shows, whether the parameter text -% catches a really |/Hid| object or the end marker. -% \begin{macrocode} -\gdef\Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr#1^^J/Hid#2#3 #4\END{% - \ifx\\#2\\% - \global\pdfpageattr{#1}% - \else - \Hy@RemoveHidPageAttr#1#4\END - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} \pdf@ifdraftmode{}{% \g@addto@macro\Hy@EveryPageHook{% \hyper@pagetransition \hyper@pageduration - \hyper@pagehidden }% } % \end{macrocode} @@ -14406,19 +14088,8 @@ % % Since version 2011/10/05 v1.16 of package `atbegshi' % \cs{AtBeginShipoutFirst} does not add a additional box layer. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\Hy@FixNotFirstPage{% - \gdef\Hy@FixNotFirstPage{% - \setbox\AtBeginShipoutBox=\hbox{% - \copy\AtBeginShipoutBox - }% - }% -} -\ltx@ifpackagelater{atbegshi}{2011/10/05}{% -}{% - \AtBeginShipout{\Hy@FixNotFirstPage}% -} -% \end{macrocode} +% +% change 2020-10-01: the code has been removed as outdated. % % \begin{macrocode} % @@ -15396,22 +15067,10 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\hyper@pagehidden} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hyper@pagehidden{% - \ifHy@useHidKey - \special{pdf:put @thispage % - <>% - }% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} % \begin{macrocode} \g@addto@macro\Hy@EveryPageBoxHook{% \hyper@pagetransition \hyper@pageduration - \hyper@pagehidden } % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -16054,15 +15713,9 @@ \fi \fi }% - \def\hyper@pagehidden{% - \ifHy@useHidKey - \special{!hidden\ifHy@pdfpagehidden +\else -\fi}% - \fi - }% \g@addto@macro\Hy@EveryPageBoxHook{% \hyper@pagetransition \hyper@pageduration - \hyper@pagehidden }% \fi % \end{macrocode} @@ -16456,26 +16109,10 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\hyper@pagehidden} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\hyper@pagehidden{% - \ifHy@useHidKey - \pdfmark{% - pdfmark=/PUT,% - Raw={% - \string{ThisPage\string}% - <>% - }% - }% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} % \begin{macrocode} \g@addto@macro\Hy@EveryPageBoxHook{% \hyper@pagetransition \hyper@pageduration - \hyper@pagehidden } % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} @@ -18037,6 +17674,7 @@ % % \section{Driver-specific form support} % \subsection{pdfmarks} +% change 2020-06-20: added /Euro to encoding % \begin{macrocode} %<*pdfmark> \long\def\@Form[#1]{% @@ -18060,6 +17698,7 @@ /quotedblbase/quotedblleft/quotedblright/quoteleft% /quoteright/quotesinglbase/trademark/fi/fl/Lslash/OE/Scaron% /Ydieresis/Zcaron/dotlessi/lslash/oe/scaron/zcaron % + 160/Euro % 164/currency % 166/brokenbar % 168/dieresis/copyright/ordfeminine % @@ -19146,6 +18785,7 @@ /quotedblbase/quotedblleft/quotedblright/quoteleft% /quoteright/quotesinglbase/trademark/fi/fl/Lslash/OE% /Scaron/Ydieresis/Zcaron/dotlessi/lslash/oe/scaron/zcaron % + 160/Euro % 164/currency % 166/brokenbar % 168/dieresis/copyright/ordfeminine % @@ -19624,6 +19264,7 @@ /quotedblbase/quotedblleft/quotedblright/quoteleft/quoteright% /quotesinglbase/trademark/fi/fl/Lslash/OE/Scaron/Ydieresis% /Zcaron/dotlessi/lslash/oe/scaron/zcaron % + 160/Euro % 164/currency % 166/brokenbar % 168/dieresis/copyright/ordfeminine % @@ -22668,8 +22309,10 @@ % \begin{macrocode} % U+0374 GREEK NUMERAL SIGN; numeralsigngreek \DeclareTextCommand{\textnumeralsigngreek}{PU}{\83\164}% U+0374 +\DeclareTextCommand{\textdexiakeraia}{PU}{\83\164}% U+0374 % U+0375 GREEK LOWER NUMERAL SIGN; numeralsignlowergreek \DeclareTextCommand{\textnumeralsignlowergreek}{PU}{\83\165}% U+0375 +\DeclareTextCommand{\textaristerikeraia}{PU}{\83\165}% U+0375 % U+0386 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ALPHA WITH TONOS; Alphatonos \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{PU}{\textAlpha}{\83\206}% U+0386 % U+0388 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER EPSILON WITH TONOS; Epsilontonos @@ -22813,23 +22456,35 @@ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{PU}{\textupsilon}{\83\315}% U+03CD % U+03CE GREEK SMALL LETTER OMEGA WITH TONOS; omegatonos \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{PU}{\textomega}{\83\316}% U+03CE +% U+03D8 GREEK LETTER ARCHAIC KOPPA; +\DeclareTextCommand{\textQoppa}{PU}{\83\330}% U+03D8 +% U+03D9 GREEK SMALL LETTER ARCHAIC KOPPA; +\DeclareTextCommand{\textqoppa}{PU}{\83\331}% U+03D9 % U+03DA GREEK LETTER STIGMA; Stigmagreek \DeclareTextCommand{\textStigmagreek}{PU}{\83\332}% U+03DA +\DeclareTextCommand{\textStigma}{PU}{\83\332}% U+03DA % U+03DB GREEK SMALL LETTER STIGMA \DeclareTextCommand{\textstigmagreek}{PU}{\83\333}% U+03DB +\DeclareTextCommand{\textstigma}{PU}{\83\333}% U+03DB % U+03DC GREEK LETTER DIGAMMA; Digammagreek \DeclareTextCommand{\textDigammagreek}{PU}{\83\334}% U+03DC +\DeclareTextCommand{\textDigamma}{PU}{\83\334}% U+03DC % U+03DD GREEK SMALL LETTER DIGAMMA \DeclareTextCommand{\textdigammagreek}{PU}{\83\335}% U+03DD +\DeclareTextCommand{\textdigamma}{PU}{\83\335}% U+03DD %* \textdigammagreek -> \digamma (AmS) % U+03DE GREEK LETTER KOPPA; Koppagreek +\DeclareTextCommand{\textKoppa}{PU}{\83\336}% U+03DE \DeclareTextCommand{\textKoppagreek}{PU}{\83\336}% U+03DE % U+03DF GREEK SMALL LETTER KOPPA +\DeclareTextCommand{\textkoppa}{PU}{\83\337}% U+03DF \DeclareTextCommand{\textkoppagreek}{PU}{\83\337}% U+03DF % U+03E0 GREEK LETTER SAMPI; Sampigreek \DeclareTextCommand{\textSampigreek}{PU}{\83\340}% U+03E0 +\DeclareTextCommand{\textSampi}{PU}{\83\340}% U+03E0 % U+03E1 GREEK SMALL LETTER SAMPI \DeclareTextCommand{\textsampigreek}{PU}{\83\341}% U+03E1 +\DeclareTextCommand{\textsampi}{PU}{\83\341}% U+03E1 % U+03F6 GREEK REVERSED LUNATE EPSILON SYMBOL; % \backepsilon (AmS) \DeclareTextCommand{\textbackepsilon}{PU}{\83\366}% U+03F6 diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.ins b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.ins index e313a869b7..d8cc5275b1 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.ins +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.ins @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ %% 1995-2001 Sebastian Rahtz, with portions written by David Carlisle and Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2015 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Support Group -%% 2019-2020 LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2021 LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ %% version 2005/12/01 or later. %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -%% +%% %% The Current Maintainer of this work is Heiko Oberdiek. %% %% The list of all files belonging to the `Hyperref Bundle' is @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ %% %% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------ %% -\def\filedate{2020/01/14} +\def\filedate{2021/02/04} \def\batchfile{hyperref.ins} \input docstrip @@ -87,6 +87,7 @@ \file{puarenc.def}{\from{hyperref.dtx}{puarenc}} \file{psdextra.def}{\from{hyperref.dtx}{psdextra}} \file{nohyperref.sty}{\from{hyperref.dtx}{nohyperref}} + \file{hyperref-langpatches.def}{\from{hyperref.dtx}{lang}} } \Msg{***************************************************************} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex deleted file mode 100644 index ded7aeb799..0000000000 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/manual.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3383 +0,0 @@ -% This is the manual for the LaTeX hyperref package. -% -% Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Sebastian Rahtz. -% Copyright (C) 2003 Steve Peter and Karl Berry -% Copyright (C) 2006-2012 Heiko Oberdiek. -% Copyright (C) 2017-2019 David Carlisle Ulrike Fischer -% Copyright (C) 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project -% -% Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document -% under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or -% any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no -% Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover -% Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled -% ``GNU Free Documentation License.'' -% - -\def\mydate{January 2020} - -\RequirePackage{iftex} -\ifpdf % We are running pdfTeX in pdf mode -\ifx\directlua\undefinded -\documentclass[pdftex]{article} -\else -\documentclass[luatex]{article} -\fi -\else -\documentclass{article} -\fi - - -\usepackage{pifont} -\usepackage{calc} - -\usepackage{hologo} - -\def\OzTeX{O\kern-0.03em z\kern-0.15em \TeX} - -\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{% - \texttt{\textbackslash #1}% -} -\newcommand*{\xpackage}[1]{\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand*{\xoption}[1]{\textsf{#1}} - -% from doc.sty -\makeatletter -\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined -\newlanguage\l@nohyphenation -\fi -\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined - \newlanguage\l@nohyphenation -\fi -\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{% - \ensuremath\langle - \ifmmode \expandafter \nfss@text \fi - {% - \meta@font@select - \edef\meta@hyphen@restore - {\hyphenchar\the\font\the\hyphenchar\font}% - \hyphenchar\font\m@ne - \language\l@nohyphenation - #1\/% - \meta@hyphen@restore - }% - \ensuremath\rangle -} -\def\meta@font@select{\ttfamily\itshape} -\makeatother - -% Page layout. -\advance\textwidth by 1.1in -\advance\oddsidemargin by -.55in -\advance\evensidemargin by -.55in -% -\advance\textheight by 1in -\advance\topmargin by -.5in -\advance\footskip by -.5in -% -\pagestyle{headings} -% -% Avoid some overfull boxes. -\emergencystretch=.1\hsize -\hbadness = 3000 - -% these are from lshort.sty, but lshort.sty pulls in so many other -% packages it seems cleaner to just include them here. -% -\newcommand{\bs}{\symbol{'134}}%Print backslash -\newcommand{\ci}[1]{\texttt{\bs#1}} - -\makeatletter -\@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{% - % separate definition for HTML case to avoid - % nasty borders with double horizontal lines with - % large gaps. - \newsavebox{\cmdsyntaxbox}% - \newenvironment{cmdsyntax}{% - \par - % \small - \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}% - \vskip -\parskip - \noindent - \begin{lrbox}{\cmdsyntaxbox}% - \begin{tabular}{l}% - \rule{0pt}{1em}% - \ignorespaces - }{% - \end{tabular}% - \end{lrbox}% - \fbox{\usebox{\cmdsyntaxbox}}% - \par - \nopagebreak - \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}% - \vskip -\parskip - }% -}{% - \newenvironment{cmdsyntax}{% - \par - \small - \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}% - \vskip -\parskip - \noindent - \begin{tabular}{|l|}% - \hline - \rule{0pt}{1em}% - \ignorespaces - }{% - \\% - \hline - \end{tabular}% - \par - \nopagebreak - \addvspace{3.2ex plus 0.8ex minus 0.2ex}% - \vskip -\parskip - }% -} -\makeatother - -\usepackage{array,longtable} -\ifnum 0\ifluatex 1\else\ifxetex 1\fi\fi=0 % - \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}% - \usepackage{lmodern}% - \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}% -\else - \usepackage{fontspec}% - \renewcommand*{\ttdefault}{lmvtt}% -\fi - -\newcommand*{\Quote}[1]{\textquotedblleft#1\textquotedblright} - -\def\Hanh{H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh} - -\ifpdf - \usepackage[% -% pdftex,% might be luatex, just allow automatic default - colorlinks,% - hyperindex,% - plainpages=false,% - bookmarksopen,% - bookmarksnumbered, - pdfusetitle,% - ]{hyperref} - %%?? \def\pdfBorderAttrs{/Border [0 0 0] } % No border arround Links -\else - \usepackage{hyperref} -\fi - -\makeatletter -\@ifpackageloaded{tex4ht}{% -\author{Sebastian Rahtz (deceased)\and - Heiko Oberdiek (inactive)\and - The \LaTeX3 Project (\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues})} -}{% - \usepackage{bmhydoc}% -\author{Sebastian Rahtz\thanks{deceased}\and - Heiko Oberdiek\thanks{inactive}\and - The \LaTeX3 Project\thanks{\url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues}}} -} -\makeatother -\title{Hypertext marks in \hologo{LaTeX}: a manual for \xpackage{hyperref}} -\date{2020-05-15 v7.00e} - -\begin{document} - -% comes out too close to the toc, and we know it's page one anyway. -\thispagestyle{empty} -\maketitle -\tableofcontents -\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}% for bookmark levels - -\section{Introduction} - -The package derives from, and builds on, the work of the Hyper\hologo{TeX} -project, described at \texttt{http://xxx.lanl.gov/hypertex/}\footnote{Now: \url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/support/hypertex/hypertex}}. It extends -the functionality of all the \hologo{LaTeX} cross-referencing commands -(including the table of contents, bibliographies etc) to produce -\cs{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links; -it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc} -hypertext links, including those to external documents and URLs. - -The package is currently maintained at \url{https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/} and issues should -be reported there. - -This manual provides a brief overview of the \xpackage{hyperref} -package. For more details, you should read the additional documentation -distributed with the package, as well as the complete documentation by -processing \texttt{hyperref.dtx}. You should also read the chapter on -\xpackage{hyperref} in \textit{The \hologo{LaTeX} Web Companion}, where you will -find additional examples. - -The Hyper\hologo{TeX} specification\footnote{This is borrowed from an article -by Arthur Smith.} says that conformant viewers/translators must -recognize the following set of \cs{special} constructs: - -\begin{description} -\item[href:] \verb|html:| -\item[name:] \verb|html:| -\item[end:] \verb|html:| -\item[image:] \verb|html:| -\item[base\_name:] \verb|html:| -\end{description} - -The \emph{href}, \emph{name} and \emph{end} commands are used to do the -basic hypertext operations of establishing links between sections of -documents. The \emph{image} command is intended (as with current HTML -viewers) to place an image of arbitrary graphical format on the page in -the current location. The \emph{base\_name} command is be used to -communicate to the DVI viewer the full (URL) location of the current -document so that files specified by relative URLs may be retrieved -correctly. - -The \emph{href} and \emph{name} commands must be paired with an -\emph{end} command later in the \TeX\ file---the \TeX\ commands between -the two ends of a pair form an \emph{anchor} in the document. In the -case of an \emph{href} command, the \emph{anchor} is to be highlighted -in the \emph{DVI viewer}, and when clicked on will cause the scene to -shift to the destination specified by \emph{href\_string}. The -\emph{anchor} associated with a name command represents a possible -location to which other hypertext links may refer, either as local -references (of the form \verb|href="#name_string"| with the -\emph{name\_string} identical to the one in the name command) or as part -of a URL (of the form \emph{URL\#name\_string}). Here -\emph{href\_string} is a valid URL or local identifier, while -\emph{name\_string} could be any string at all: the only caveat is that -`$\verb|"|$' characters should be escaped with a backslash -($\backslash$), and if it looks like a URL name it may cause problems. - -However, the drivers intended to produce \emph{only} PDF use literal -PostScript or PDF \verb|\special| commands. The commands are defined in -configuration files for different drivers, selected by package options; -at present, the following drivers are supported: - -\begin{description} -\item[hypertex] DVI processors conforming to the Hyper\TeX\ guidelines (i.e.\ \textsf{xdvi}, \textsf{dvips} (with -the \textsf{-z} option), \textsf{\OzTeX}, and \textsf{Textures}) -\item[dvips] produces \verb|\special| commands tailored for \textsf{dvips} -\item[dvipsone] produces \verb|\special| commands tailored for \textsf{dvipsone} -\item[ps2pdf] a special case of output suitable for processing by earlier versions of Ghost\-script's -PDF writer; this is basically the same as that for \textsf{dvips}, but a few variations remained before version 5.21 -\item[tex4ht] produces \verb|\special| commands for use with \textsf{\TeX4ht} -\item[pdftex] pdf\TeX, \Hanh{}'s \TeX{} variant that writes PDF directly -\item[luatex] lua\TeX, Unicode \TeX{} variant that writes PDF directly -\item[dvipdfm] produces \verb|\special| commands for Mark Wicks' DVI to PDF driver \textsf{dvipdfm} -\item[dvipdfmx] produces \verb|\special| commands for driver - \textsf{dvipdfmx}, a successor of \textsf{dvipdfm} -\item[dviwindo] produces \verb|\special| commands that Y\&Y's Windows previewer interprets as hypertext jumps within the previewer -\item[vtex] produces \verb|\special| commands that MicroPress' HTML and - PDF-producing \TeX\ variants interpret as hypertext jumps within the - previewer -\item[textures] produces \verb|\special| commands that \textsf{Textures} interprets as hypertext jumps within the previewer -\item[xetex] produces \verb|\special| commands for Xe\TeX{} -\end{description} - -Output from \textsf{dvips} or \textsf{dvipsone} must be processed using -Acrobat Distiller to obtain a PDF file.\footnote{Make sure you turn off -the partial font downloading supported by \textsf{dvips} and -\textsf{dvipsone} in favor of Distiller's own system.} The result is -generally preferable to that produced by using the \textsf{hypertex} -driver, and then processing with \textsf{dvips -z}, but the DVI file is -not portable. The main advantage of using the Hyper\TeX\ \ci{special} -commands is that you can also use the document in hypertext DVI viewers, -such as \textsf{xdvi}. - -\begin{description} -\item[driverfallback] - If a driver is not given and cannot be autodetected, then use - the driver option, given as value to this option \textsf{driverfallback}. - Example: - \begin{quote} - \texttt{driverfallback=dvipdfm} - \end{quote} - Autodetected drivers (\textsf{pdftex}, \textsf{xetex}, \textsf{vtex}, - \textsf{vtexpdfmark}) are recognized from within \TeX\ and - therefore cannot be given as value to option \textsf{driverfallback}. - However a DVI driver program is run after the \TeX\ run is finished. - Thus it cannot be detected at \TeX\ macro level. Then package - \xpackage{hyperref} - uses the driver, given by \textsf{driverfallback}. If the driver - is already specified or can be autodetected, then option - \textsf{driverfallback} is ignored. -\end{description} - -\section{Implicit behavior} - -This package can be used with more or less any normal \LaTeX\ document -by specifying in the document preamble - -\begin{verbatim} -\usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -Make sure it comes \emph{last} of your loaded packages, to give it a -fighting chance of not being over-written, since its job is to redefine -many \LaTeX\ commands. Hopefully you will find that all cross-references -work correctly as hypertext. For example, \ci{section} commands will -produce a bookmark and a link, whereas \ci{section*} commands will only -show links when paired with a corresponding \ci{addcontentsline} -command. - -In addition, the \texttt{hyperindex} option (see below) attempts to make -items in the index by hyperlinked back to the text, and the option -\texttt{backref} inserts extra `back' links into the bibliography for -each entry. Other options control the appearance of links, and give -extra control over PDF output. For example, \texttt{colorlinks}, as its -name well implies, colors the links instead of using boxes; this is the -option used in this document. - - -\section{Package options} - -All user-configurable aspects of \xpackage{hyperref} are set using a -single `key=value' scheme (using the \xpackage{keyval} package) with the -key \texttt{Hyp}. The options can be set either in the optional argument -to the \cs{usepackage} command, or using the \cs{hypersetup} -macro. When the package is loaded, a file \texttt{hyperref.cfg} is read -if it can be found, and this is a convenient place to set options on a -site-wide basis. - -Note however that some options (for example \texttt{unicode}) can only be used as -packge options, and not in \verb|\hypersetup| as the option settings are processed -as the package is read. - -As an example, the behavior of a particular file could be controlled by: -\begin{itemize} - -\item a site-wide \texttt{hyperref.cfg} setting up the look of links, -adding backreferencing, and setting a PDF display default: - -\begin{verbatim} -\hypersetup{backref, -pdfpagemode=FullScreen, -colorlinks=true} -\end{verbatim} - -\item A global option in the file, which is passed down to -\textsf{hyperref}: - -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[dvips]{article} -\end{verbatim} - -\item File-specific options in the \cs{usepackage} commands, which -override the ones set in \texttt{hyperref.cfg}: - -\begin{verbatim} -\usepackage[colorlinks=false]{hyperref} -\hypersetup{pdftitle={A Perfect Day}} -\end{verbatim} -\end{itemize} - -As seen in the previous example, information entries -(pdftitle, pdfauthor, \dots) should be set after the package is loaded. -Otherwise \LaTeX\ expands the values of these options prematurely. -Also \LaTeX\ strips spaces in options. Especially option `pdfborder' -requires some care. Curly braces protect the value, if given -as package option. They are not necessary in \verb|\hypersetup|. - -\begin{verbatim} -\usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 0}]{hyperref} -\hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 0} -\end{verbatim} - -Package `kvoptions-patch' patches \LaTeX\ to make it aware -of key value options and to prevent premature value expansions. - -Some options can be given at any time, but many are restricted: before -\verb|\begin{document}|, only in \verb|\usepackage[...]{hyperref}|, -before first use, etc. - -In the key descriptions that follow, many options do not need a value, -as they default to the value true if used. These are the ones classed as -`boolean'. The values true and false can always be specified, however. - -\subsection{General options} - -Firstly, the options to specify general behavior and page size. - -\medskip -\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll} -draft & boolean & false & all hypertext options are turned off \\ -final & boolean & true & all hypertext options are turned on \\ -debug & boolean & false & extra diagnostic messages are printed in \\ - & & & the log file \\ -verbose & boolean & false & same as debug \\ -implicit & boolean & true & redefines \LaTeX\ internals \\ -setpagesize & boolean & true & sets page size by special driver commands -\end{longtable} - -\subsection{Options for destination names} - -Destinations names (also anchor, target or link names) are internal -names that identify a position on a page in the document. They -are used in link targets for inner document links or the bookmarks, -for example. - -Usually anchor are set, if \cs{refstepcounter} is called. -Thus there is a counter name and value. Both are used to -construct the destination name. By default the counter value -follows the counter name separated by a dot. Example for -the fourth chapter: -\begin{quote} - \verb|chapter.4| -\end{quote} -This scheme is used by: -\begin{description} -\item[\cs{autoref}] displays the description label for the - reference depending on the counter name. -\item[\cs{hyperpage}] is used by the index to get -page links. Page anchor setting (\verb|pageanchor|) must not -be turned off. -\end{description} - -It is very important that the destination names are unique, -because two destinations must not share the same name. -The counter value \cs{the} is not always unique -for the counter. For example, table and figures can be numbered -inside the chapter without having the chapter number in their -number. Therefore \xpackage{hyperref} has introduced \cs{theH} -that allows a unique counter value without messing up with -the appearance of the counter number. For example, the number -of the second table in the third chapter might be printed -as \texttt{2}, the result of \cs{thetable}. But the -destination name \texttt{table.2.4} is unique because it -has used \cs{theHtable} that gives \verb|2.4| in this case. - -Often the user do not need to set \cs{theH}. Defaults -for standard cases (chapter, \dots) are provided. And after \xpackage{hyperref} -is loaded, new counters with parent counters also define -\cs{theH} automatically, if \cs{newcounter}, \cs{@addtoreset} -or \cs{numberwithin} of package \xpackage{amsmath} are used. - -Usually problems with duplicate destination names can be solved -by an appropriate definition of \cs{theH}. If option -\texttt{hypertexnames} is disabled, then a unique artificial -number is used instead of the counter value. In case of page -anchors the absolute page anchor is used. With option \texttt{plainpages} -the page anchors use the arabic form. In both latter cases \cs{hyperpage} -for index links is affected and might not work properly. - -If an unnumbered entity gets an anchor (starred forms of -chapters, sections, \dots) or \cs{phantomsection} is used, -then the dummy counter name \texttt{section*} and an artificial -unique number is used. - -If the final PDF file is going to be merged with another file, than -the destination names might clash, because both documents might -contain \texttt{chapter.1} or \texttt{page.1}. Also \xpackage{hyperref} -sets anchor with name \texttt{Doc-Start} at the begin of the document. -This can be resolved by redefining \cs{HyperDestNameFilter}. -Package \xpackage{hyperref} calls this macro each time, it uses a -destination name. -The macro must be expandable and expects the destination name -as only argument. As example, the macro is redefined to add -a prefix to all destination names: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{\jobname-#1} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -In document \texttt{docA} the destination name \texttt{chapter.2} -becomes \texttt{docA-chapter.2}. - -Destination names can also be used from the outside in URIs(, if the -driver has not removed or changed them), for example: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -http://somewhere/path/file.pdf#nameddest=chapter.4 -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -However using a number seems unhappy. If another chapter is added -before, the number changes. But it is very difficult to pass -a new name for the destination to the anchor setting process that -is usually deep hidden in the internals. The first name of -\cs{label} after the anchor setting seems a good approximation: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} - \section{Introduction} - \label{intro} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Option \texttt{destlabel} checks for each \cs{label}, if there is -a new destination name active and replaces the destination -name by the label name. Because the destination name is already in use -because of the anchor setting, the new name is recorded in the \texttt{.aux} -file and used in the subsequent \hologo{LaTeX} run. The renaming is done by -a redefinition of \cs{HyperDestNameFilter}. That leaves the old -destination names intact (e.g., they are needed for \cs{autoref}). -This redefinition is also available as \cs{HyperDestLabelReplace}, -thus that an own redefinition can use it. -The following example also adds a prefix for \emph{all} destination names: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{% - \jobname-\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}% -} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The other case that only files prefixed that do not have a corresponding -\cs{label} is more complicate, because \cs{HyperDestLabelReplace} needs -the unmodified destination name as argument. This is solved by an -expandable string test (\cs{pdfstrcmp} of \hologo{pdfTeX} -or \cs{strcmp} of \hologo{XeTeX}, package \xpackage{pdftexcmds} also supports -\hologo{LuaTeX}): -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\usepackage{pdftexcmds} -\makeatletter -\renewcommand*{\HyperDestNameFilter}[1]{% - \ifcase\pdf@strcmp{#1}{\HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}} % - \jobname-#1% - \else - \HyperDestLabelReplace{#1}% - \fi -} -\makeatother -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -With option \texttt{destlabel} destinations can also named manually, -if the destination is not yet renamed: -\begin{quote} -\verb|\HyperDestRename{|\meta{destination}\verb|}{|\meta{newname}\verb|}| -\end{quote} - -Hint: Anchors can also be named and set by \cs{hypertarget}. - -\medskip -\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll} -destlabel & boolean & false & destinations are named by first \cs{label}\\ - & & & after anchor creation\\ -hypertexnames & boolean & true & use guessable names for links \\ -naturalnames & boolean & false & use \LaTeX-computed names for links \\ -plainpages & boolean & false & Forces page anchors to be named by the Arabic form \\ - & & & of the page number, rather than the formatted form. \\ -\end{longtable} - -\subsection{Configuration options} - -\begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{9cm}} -raiselinks & boolean & true & In the hypertex driver, the height of links is normally calculated by the driver as - simply the base line of contained text; this options forces \verb|\special| commands to - reflect the real height of the link (which could contain a graphic) \\ -breaklinks & boolean & false & Allows link text to break across lines; since this cannot be accommodated in PDF, it is - only set true by default if the pdftex driver is used. This makes links on multiple lines - into different PDF links to the same target. \\ -pageanchor & boolean & true & Determines whether every page is given an implicit anchor at the top left corner. If this - is turned off, \verb|\printindex| will not contain - valid hyperlinks. \\ -nesting & boolean & false & Allows links to be nested; no drivers currently support this. -\end{longtable} - -Note for option \verb|breaklinks|: -The correct value is automatically set according to the driver features. -It can be overwritten for drivers that do not support broken links. -However, at any case, the link area will be wrong and displaced. - -\subsection{Backend drivers} - -If no driver is specified, the package tries to find a driver in -the following order: -\begin{enumerate} -\item Autodetection, some \TeX\ processors can be detected at \TeX\ macro - level (pdf\TeX, Xe\TeX, V\TeX). -\item Option \textsf{driverfallback}. If this option is set, its value - is taken as driver option. -\item Macro \cs{Hy@defaultdriver}. The macro takes a driver file - name (without file extension). -\item Package default is \textsf{hypertex}. -\end{enumerate} -Many distributions are using a driver file \texttt{hypertex.cfg} that -define \cs{Hy@defaultdriver} with \texttt{hdvips}. This is recommended -because driver \textsf{dvips} provides much more features than -\textsf{hypertex} for PDF generation. - -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{.8\hsize}@{}} -driverfallback & Its value is used as driver option\\ - & if the driver is not given or autodetected.\\ -dvipdfm & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipdfm} driver.\\ -dvipdfmx & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipdfmx} driver.\\ -dvips & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvips} driver. \\ -dvipsone & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dvipsone} driver. \\ -dviwindo & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{dviwindo} Windows previewer. \\ -hypertex & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the Hyper\TeX-compliant drivers. \\ -latex2html & Redefines a few macros for compatibility with \textsf{latex2html}. \\ -nativepdf & An alias for \textsf{dvips} \\ -pdfmark & An alias for \textsf{dvips} \\ -pdftex & Sets up \textsf{hyperref} for use with the \textsf{pdftex} program.\\ -ps2pdf & Redefines a few macros for compatibility with - Ghostscript's PDF writer, otherwise identical to - \textsf{dvips}. \\ -tex4ht & For use with \textsf{\TeX4ht} \\ -textures & For use with \textsf{Textures} \\ -vtex & For use with MicroPress' \textsf{VTeX}; the PDF - and HTML backends are detected automatically. \\ -vtexpdfmark & For use with \textsf{VTeX}'s PostScript backend. \\ -xetex & For use with Xe\TeX\ (using backend for dvipdfm). -\end{longtable} -\smallskip - -If you use \textsf{dviwindo}, you may need to redefine the macro -\ci{wwwbrowser} (the default is \verb|C:\netscape\netscape|) to tell -\textsf{dviwindo} what program to launch. Thus, users of Internet -Explorer might add something like this to hyperref.cfg: - -\begin{verbatim} -\renewcommand{\wwwbrowser}{C:\string\Program\space - Files\string\Plus!\string\Microsoft\space - Internet\string\iexplore.exe} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Extension options} -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{8cm}@{}} -extension & text & & Set the file extension (e.g.\ \textsf{dvi}) which will be appended to file links - created if you use the \xpackage{xr} package. \\ -hyperfigures & boolean & & \\ -backref & text & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of - section numbers. This can only work properly \emph{if} there is a blank line after - each \verb|\bibitem|. Supported values are \verb|section|, \verb|slide|, \verb|page|, - \verb|none|, or \verb|false|. If no value is given, \verb|section| is taken as default.\\ -pagebackref & boolean & false & Adds `backlink' text to the end of each item in the bibliography, as a list of page - numbers. \\ -hyperindex & boolean & true & Makes the page numbers of index entries into hyperlinks. Relays on unique - page anchors (\verb|pageanchor|, \ldots) - \verb|pageanchors| and \verb|plainpages=false|. \\ -hyperfootnotes & boolean & true & Makes the footnote marks into hyperlinks to the footnote text. - Easily broken \ldots\\ -encap & & & Sets encap character for hyperindex \\ -linktoc & text & section & make text (\verb|section|), page number (\verb|page|), both (\verb|all|) or nothing (\verb|none|) be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\ -linktocpage & boolean & false & make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\ -breaklinks & boolean & false & allow links to break over lines by making links over multiple lines into PDF links to - the same target \\ -colorlinks & boolean & false & Colors the text of links and anchors. The colors chosen depend on the the type of - link. At present the only types of link distinguished are citations, page references, - URLs, local file references, and other links. - Unlike colored boxes, the colored - text remains when printing.\\ -linkcolor & color & red & Color for normal internal links. \\ -anchorcolor & color & black & Color for anchor text. Ignored by most drivers. \\ -citecolor & color & green & Color for bibliographical citations in text. \\ -filecolor & color & cyan & Color for URLs which open local files. \\ -menucolor & color & red & Color for Acrobat menu items. \\ -runcolor & color & filecolor & Color for run links (launch annotations). \\ -urlcolor & color & magenta & Color for linked URLs. \\ -allcolors & color & & Set all color options (without border and field options).\\ -frenchlinks & boolean & false & Use small caps instead of color for links.\\ -hidelinks & & & Hide links (removing color and border). \\ -\end{longtable} \smallskip - -Note that all color names must be defined before use, following the -normal system of the standard \LaTeX\ \xpackage{color} package. - -\subsection{PDF-specific display options} -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}lp{7.6cm}@{}} -bookmarks & boolean & true & A set of Acrobat bookmarks are written, in a manner similar to the - table of contents, requiring two passes of \LaTeX. Some postprocessing - of the bookmark file (file extension \texttt{.out}) may be needed to - translate \LaTeX\ codes, since bookmarks must be written in PDFEncoding. - To aid this process, the \texttt{.out} file is not rewritten by \LaTeX\ - if it is edited to contain a line \verb|\let\WriteBookmarks\relax| \\ -bookmarksopen & boolean & false & If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, show them with all the subtrees - expanded. \\ -bookmarksopenlevel & parameter & & level (\ci{maxdimen}) to which bookmarks are open \\ -bookmarksnumbered & boolean & false & If Acrobat bookmarks are requested, include section numbers. \\ -bookmarkstype & text & toc & to specify which `toc' file to mimic \\ -CJKbookmarks & boolean & false & - This option should be used to produce CJK bookmarks. - Package \verb|hyperref| - supports both normal and preprocessed mode of the \xpackage{CJK} package; - during the creation of bookmarks, it simply replaces CJK's macros - with special versions which expand to the corresponding character - codes. Note that without the `unicode' option of hyperref you get - PDF files which actually violate the PDF specification because - non-Unicode character codes are used -- some PDF readers localized - for CJK languages (most notably Acroread itself) support this. - Also note that option `CJKbookmarks' cannot be used together - with option `unicode'. - - No mechanism is provided to translate non-Unicode bookmarks to - Unicode; for portable PDF documents only Unicode encoding should - be used.\\ -pdfhighlight & name & /I & How link buttons behave when selected; /I is for inverse (the default); - the other possibilities are /N (no effect), /O (outline), and /P (inset - highlighting). \\ -citebordercolor & RGB color & 0 1 0 & The color of the box around citations \\ -filebordercolor & RGB color & 0 .5 .5 & The color of the box around links to files \\ -linkbordercolor & RGB color & 1 0 0 & The color of the box around normal links \\ -menubordercolor & RGB color & 1 0 0 & The color of the box around Acrobat menu links \\ -urlbordercolor & RGB color & 0 1 1 & The color of the box around links to URLs \\ -runbordercolor & RGB color & 0 .7 .7 & Color of border around `run' links \\ -allbordercolors & & & Set all border color options \\ -pdfborder & & 0 0 1 & The style of box around links; defaults to a box with lines of 1pt thickness, - but the colorlinks option resets it to produce no border. -\end{longtable} - -Note that the color of link borders can be specified \emph{only} as 3 -numbers in the range 0..1, giving an RGB color. You cannot use colors -defined in \TeX. Since version 6.76a this is no longer true. -Especially with the help of package \xpackage{xcolor} the usual -color specifications of package \xpackage{(x)color} can be used. -For further information see description of package \xpackage{hycolor}. - -The bookmark commands are stored in a file called -\textit{jobname}\texttt{.out}. The files is not processed by \LaTeX\ so -any markup is passed through. You can postprocess this file as needed; -as an aid for this, the \texttt{.out} file is not overwritten on the -next \TeX\ run if it is edited to contain the line -\begin{verbatim} -\let\WriteBookmarks\relax -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{PDF display and information options} -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\raggedright}p{\widthof{key value}}>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}} -baseurl & URL & & Sets the base URL of the PDF document \\ -pdfpagemode & name & empty & Determines how the file is opening in Acrobat; the possibilities are - \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseThumbs| (show thumbnails), \verb|UseOutlines| - (show bookmarks), \verb|FullScreen|, \verb|UseOC| (PDF 1.5), - and \verb|UseAttachments| (PDF 1.6). If no mode if explicitly chosen, but the - bookmarks option is set, \verb|UseOutlines| is used. \\ -pdftitle & text & & Sets the document information Title field \\ -pdfauthor & text & & Sets the document information Author field \\ -pdfsubject & text & & Sets the document information Subject field \\ -pdfcreator & text & & Sets the document information Creator field \\ -addtopdfproducer & text & & Adds additional text to the document information Producer field \\ -pdfkeywords & text & & Sets the document information Keywords field \\ -pdftrapped & name & empty & Sets the document information Trapped entry. Possible values are \verb|True|, \verb|False| and \verb|Unknown|. - An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\ -% -pdfinfo & key value list & empty & Alternative interface for setting the - document information.\\ -pdfview & name & XYZ & Sets the default PDF `view' for each link \\ -pdfstartpage & integer & 1 & Determines on which page the PDF file is opened. An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\ -pdfstartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view \\ -pdfremotestartview & name & Fit & Set the startup page view of remote PDF files \\ -pdfpagescrop & n n n n & & Sets the default PDF crop box for pages. This should be a set of four numbers \\ -pdfcenterwindow & boolean & false & position the document window in the center of the screen \\ -pdfdirection & name & empty & direction setting. Possible values: \verb|L2R| (left to right) and - \verb|R2L| (right to left)\\ -pdfdisplaydoctitle & boolean & false & display document title instead of file name in title bar\\ -pdfduplex & name & empty & paper handling option for print dialog. Possible vatues are: - \verb|Simplex| (print single-sided), - \verb|DuplexFlipShortEdge| (duplex and flip on the short edge of the sheet), - \verb|DuplexFlipLongEdge| (duplex and flip on the long edge of the sheet)\\ - -pdffitwindow & boolean & false & resize document window to fit document size \\ -pdflang & name & relax & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066)\\ -pdfmenubar & boolean & true & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\ -pdfnewwindow & boolean & false & make links that open another PDF file start a new window \\ -pdfnonfullscreenpagemode - & name & empty & page mode setting on exiting full-screen mode. Possible values are - \verb|UseNone|, \verb|UseOutlines|, \verb|UseThumbs|, and \verb|UseOC|\\ -pdfnumcopies & integer & empty & number of printed copies \\ -pdfpagelayout & name & empty & set layout of PDF pages. Possible values: - \verb|SinglePage|, \verb|OneColumn|, - \verb|TwoColumnLeft|, \verb|TwoColumnRight|, - \verb|TwoPageLeft|, and \verb|TwoPageRight| \\ -pdfpagelabels & boolean & true & set PDF page labels \\ -pdfpagetransition & name & empty & set PDF page transition style. Possible values are - \verb|Split|, \verb|Blinds|, \verb|Box|, \verb|Wipe|, - \verb|Dissolve|, \verb|Glitter|, \verb|R|, - \verb|Fly|, \verb|Push|, - \verb|Cover|, \verb|Uncover|, - \verb|Fade|. - The default according to the PDF~Reference is \verb|R|, - which simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\ -pdfpicktraybypdfsize - & boolean & false & specify whether PDF page size is used to select input paper tray in print dialog \\ -pdfprintarea & name & empty & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are - \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, - \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. - The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ -pdfprintclip & name & empty & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences. Possible values are - \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, - \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. - The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ -pdfprintpagerange & n n (n n)* - & empty & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences\\ -pdfprintscaling & name & empty & page scaling option for print dialog - (option /PrintScaling of viewer - preferences, PDF 1.6); - valid values are \verb|None| and - \verb|AppDefault| \\ -pdftoolbar & boolean & true & make PDF toolbar visible \\ -pdfviewarea & name & empty & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences. Possible values are - \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, - \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. - The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ -pdfviewclip & name & empty & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences Possible values are - \verb|MediaBox|, \verb|CropBox|, - \verb|BleedBox|, \verb|TrimBox|, and \verb|ArtBox|. - The dafault according to the PDF~Refence is \verb|CropBox| \\ -pdfwindowui & boolean & true & make PDF user interface elements visible \\ -unicode & boolean & false & Unicode encoded PDF strings -\end{longtable} - -Each link in Acrobat carries its own magnification level, which is set -using PDF coordinate space, which is not the same as \TeX's. The unit -is bp and the origin is in the lower left corner. See also -\verb|\hypercalcbp| that is explained on page \pageref{hypercalcbp}. -pdf\TeX\ -works by supplying default values for \texttt{XYZ} (horizontal $\times$ -vertical $\times$ zoom) and \texttt{FitBH}. However, drivers using -\texttt{pdfmark} do not supply defaults, so \textsf{hyperref} passes in -a value of -32768, which causes Acrobat to set (usually) sensible -defaults. The following are possible values for the \texttt{pdfview}, -\texttt{pdfstartview} and \texttt{pdfremotestartview} parameters. - -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\itshape}lp{7cm}@{}} -XYZ & left top zoom & Sets a coordinate and a zoom factor. If any one is null, the source link value is used. - \textit{null null null} will give the same values as the current page. \\ -Fit & & Fits the page to the window. \\ -FitH & top & Fits the width of the page to the window. \\ -FitV & left & Fits the height of the page to the window. \\ -FitR & left bottom right top & Fits the rectangle specified by the four coordinates to the window. \\ -FitB & & Fits the page bounding box to the window. \\ -FitBH & top & Fits the width of the page bounding box to the window. \\ -FitBV & left & Fits the height of the page bounding box to the window. \\ -\end{longtable} - -The \texttt{pdfpagelayout} can be one of the following values. - -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}lp{10cm}@{}} -SinglePage & Displays a single page; advancing flips the page \\ -OneColumn & Displays the document in one column; continuous scrolling. \\ -TwoColumnLeft & Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the left. \\ -TwoColumnRight & Displays the document in two columns, odd-numbered pages to the right.\\ -TwoPageLeft & Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the left (since PDF 1.5).\\ -TwoPageRight & Displays two pages, odd-numbered pages to the right (since PDF 1.5). -\end{longtable} - -Finally, the \texttt{pdfpagetransition} can be one of the following -values, where \textit{/Di} stands for direction of motion in degrees, -generally in 90$^{\circ}$\ steps, \textit{/Dm} is a horizontal -(\texttt{/H}) or vertical (\texttt{/V}) dimension (e.g.\ \texttt{Blinds -/Dm /V}), and \textit{/M} is for motion, either in (\texttt{/I}) or out -(\texttt{/O}). - -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{8.5cm}@{}} -Blinds & /Dm & Multiple lines distributed evenly across the screen sweep in the same direction to reveal the new - page. \\ -Box & /M & A box sweeps in or out. \\ -Dissolve & & The page image dissolves in a piecemeal fashion to reveal the new page. \\ -Glitter & /Di & Similar to Dissolve, except the effect sweeps across the screen. \\ -Split & /Dm /M & Two lines sweep across the screen to reveal the new page. \\ -Wipe & /Di & A single line sweeps across the screen to reveal the new page. \\ -R & & Simply replaces the old page with the new one. \\ -Fly & /Di /M & Changes are flown out or in (as specified by /M), in the direction - specified by /Di, to or from a location that is - offscreen except when /Di is None. \\ -Push & /Di & The old page slides off the screen while the new page slides in, - pushing the old page out in the direction - specified by /Di. \\ -Cover & /Di & The new page slides on to the screen in the direction specified - by /Di, covering the old page. \\ -Uncover & /Di & The old page slides off the screen in the direction specified by - /Di, uncovering the new page in the direction - specified by /Di. \\ -Fade & & The new page gradually becomes visible through the old one. - -\end{longtable} - -\subsection{Option \texttt{pdfinfo}} - -The information entries can be set using \texttt{pdftitle}, -\texttt{pdfsubject}, \dots. Option \texttt{pdfinfo} provides an alternative -interface. It takes a key value list. The key names are the names that -appear in the PDF information dictionary directly. Known keys such as -\texttt{Title}, \texttt{Subject}, \texttt{Trapped} and other are mapped to -options \texttt{pdftitle}, \texttt{subject}, \texttt{trapped}, \dots -Unknown keys are added to the information dictionary. Their values are text -strings (see PDF specification). -Example: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\hypersetup{ - pdfinfo={ - Title={My Title}, - Subject={My Subject}, - NewKey={Foobar}, - % ... - } -} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -\subsection{Big alphabetical list} - -The following is a complete listing of available options for -\textsf{hyperref}, arranged alphabetically. - -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}llp{7cm}@{}} -allbordercolors & & Set all border color options\\ -allcolors & & Set all color options (without border and field options)\\ -anchorcolor & \textit{black} & set color of anchors, ignored by most drivers. \\ -backref & \textit{false} & do bibliographical back references \\ -baseurl & \textit{empty} & set base URL for document \\ -bookmarks & \textit{true} & make bookmarks \\ -bookmarksnumbered & \textit{false} & put section numbers in bookmarks \\ -bookmarksopen & \textit{false} & open up bookmark tree \\ -bookmarksopenlevel & \ttfamily\ci{maxdimen} & level to which bookmarks are open \\ -bookmarkstype & \textit{toc} & to specify which `toc' file to mimic \\ -breaklinks & \textit{false} & allow links to break over lines \\ -CJKbookmarks & \textit{false} & to produce CJK bookmarks\\ -citebordercolor & \textit{0 1 0} & color of border around cites \\ -citecolor & \textit{green} & color of citation links \\ -colorlinks & \textit{false} & color links \\ - & \textit{true} & (\textsf{tex4ht}, \textsf{dviwindo}) \\ -debug & \textit{false} & provide details of anchors defined; same as verbose \\ -destlabel & \textit{false} & destinations are named by the first \verb|\label| after the anchor creation \\ -draft & \textit{false} & do not do any hyperlinking \\ -driverfallback & & default if no driver specified or detected\\ -dvipdfm & & use \textsf{dvipdfm} backend \\ -dvipdfmx & & use \textsf{dvipdfmx} backend \\ -dvips & & use \textsf{dvips} backend \\ -dvipsone & & use \textsf{dvipsone} backend \\ -dviwindo & & use \textsf{dviwindo} backend \\ -encap & & to set encap character for hyperindex \\ -extension & \textit{dvi} & suffix of linked files \\ -filebordercolor & \textit{0 .5 .5} & color of border around file links \\ -filecolor & \textit{cyan} & color of file links \\ -final & \textit{true} & opposite of option draft \\ -frenchlinks & \textit{false} & use small caps instead of color for links \\ -hidelinks & & Hide links (removing color and border) \\ -hyperfigures & \textit{false} & make figures hyper links \\ -hyperfootnotes & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked footnotes \\ -hyperindex & \textit{true} & set up hyperlinked indices \\ -hypertex & & use \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend \\ -hypertexnames & \textit{true} & use guessable names for links \\ -implicit & \textit{true} & redefine \LaTeX\ internals \\ -latex2html & & use \textsf{\LaTeX2HTML} backend \\ -linkbordercolor & \textit{1 0 0} & color of border around links \\ -linkcolor & \textit{red} & color of links \\ -linktoc & \textit{section} & make text be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\ -linktocpage & \textit{false} & make page number, not text, be link on TOC, LOF and LOT \\ -menubordercolor & \textit{1 0 0} & color of border around menu links \\ -menucolor & \textit{red} & color for menu links \\ -nativepdf & \textit{false} & an alias for \textsf{dvips} \\ -naturalnames & \textit{false} & use \LaTeX-computed names for links \\ -nesting & \textit{false} & allow nesting of links \\ -pageanchor & \textit{true} & put an anchor on every page \\ -pagebackref & \textit{false} & backreference by page number \\ -pdfauthor & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Author field \\ -pdfborder & \textit{0 0 1} & width of PDF link border \\ - & \textit{0 0 0} & (\texttt{colorlinks)} \\ -pdfborderstyle & & border style for links \\ -pdfcenterwindow & \textit{false} & position the document window in the center of the screen \\ -pdfcreator & \textit{LaTeX with} & text for PDF Creator field \\ - & \textit{hyperref} & \\ -pdfdirection & \textit{empty} & direction setting \\ -pdfdisplaydoctitle & \textit{false} & display document title instead - of file name in title bar\\ -pdfduplex & \textit{empty} & paper handling option for - print dialog\\ -pdffitwindow & \textit{false} & resize document window to fit document size \\ -pdfhighlight & \textit{/I} & set highlighting of PDF links \\ -pdfinfo & \textit{empty} & alternative interface for setting document information\\ -pdfkeywords & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Keywords field \\ -pdflang & \textit{relax} & PDF language identifier (RFC 3066) \\ -pdfmark & \textit{false} & an alias for \textsf{dvips} \\ -pdfmenubar & \textit{true} & make PDF viewer's menu bar visible \\ -pdfnewwindow & \textit{false} & make links that open another PDF \\ - & & file start a new window \\ -pdfnonfullscreenpagemode - & \textit{empty} & page mode setting on exiting - full-screen mode\\ -pdfnumcopies & \textit{empty} & number of printed copies\\ -pdfpagelabels & \textit{true} & set PDF page labels \\ -pdfpagelayout & \textit{empty} & set layout of PDF pages \\ -pdfpagemode & \textit{empty} & set default mode of PDF display \\ -pdfpagescrop & \textit{empty} & set crop size of PDF document \\ -pdfpagetransition & \textit{empty} & set PDF page transition style \\ -pdfpicktraybypdfsize - & \textit{empty} & set option for print dialog \\ -pdfprintarea & \textit{empty} & set /PrintArea of viewer preferences \\ -pdfprintclip & \textit{empty} & set /PrintClip of viewer preferences \\ -pdfprintpagerange & \textit{empty} & set /PrintPageRange of viewer preferences \\ -pdfprintscaling & \textit{empty} & page scaling option for print dialog \\ -pdfproducer & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Producer field \\ -pdfremotestartview & \textit{Fit} & starting view of remote PDF documents \\ -pdfstartpage & \textit{1} & page at which PDF document opens \\ -pdfstartview & \textit{Fit} & starting view of PDF document \\ -pdfsubject & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Subject field \\ -pdftex & & use \textsf{pdf\TeX} backend \\ -pdftitle & \textit{empty} & text for PDF Title field \\ -pdftoolbar & \textit{true} & make PDF toolbar visible \\ -pdftrapped & \textit{empty} & Sets the document information Trapped entry. - Possible values are \texttt{True}, \texttt{False} and \texttt{Unknown}. - An empty value means, the entry is not set.\\ -pdfview & \textit{XYZ} & PDF `view' when on link traversal \\ -pdfviewarea & \textit{empty} & set /ViewArea of viewer preferences \\ -pdfviewclip & \textit{empty} & set /ViewClip of viewer preferences \\ -pdfwindowui & \textit{true} & make PDF user interface elements visible \\ -plainpages & \textit{false} & do page number anchors as plain Arabic \\ -ps2pdf & & use \textsf{ps2pdf} backend \\ -psdextra & \textit{false} & define more short names for PDF string commands \\ -raiselinks & \textit{false} & raise up links (for \textsf{Hyper\TeX} backend) \\ -runbordercolor & \textit{0 .7 .7} & color of border around `run' links \\ -runcolor & \textit{filecolor} & color of `run' links\\ -setpagesize & \textit{true} & set page size by special driver commands \\ -tex4ht & & use \textsf{\TeX4ht} backend \\ -textures & & use \textsf{Textures} backend \\ -unicode & \textit{false} & Unicode encoded pdf strings, by defaut true with \textsf{Xe\TeX} and \textsf{Lu\TeX} \\ -urlbordercolor & \textit{0 1 1} & color of border around URL links \\ -urlcolor & \textit{magenta} & color of URL links \\ -verbose & \textit{false} & be chatty \\ -vtex & & use \textsf{VTeX} backend\\ -xetex & & use \textsf{Xe\TeX} backend\\ -\end{longtable} - -\section{Additional user macros} - -If you need to make references to URLs, or write explicit links, the -following low-level user macros are provided: - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{href}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]|\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent The \emph{text} is made a hyperlink to the \emph{URL}; this -must be a full URL (relative to the base URL, if that is defined). The -special characters \# and \~{} do \emph{not} need to be escaped in any -way (unless the command is used in the argument of another command). - -The optional argument \emph{options} recognizes the hyperref options -\texttt{pdfremotestartview}, \texttt{pdfnewwindow} and the following -key value options: -\begin{description} -\item[\texttt{page}:] Specifies the start page number of remote -PDF documents. First page is \verb|1|. -\item[\texttt{ismap}:] Boolean key, if set to \verb|true|, the -URL should appended by the coordinates as query parameters by -the PDF viewer. -\item[\texttt{nextactionraw}:] The value of key \verb|/Next| of -action dictionaries, see PDF specification. -\end{description} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{url}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent Similar to -\ci{href}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\ci{nolinkurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}}|. -Depending on the driver \verb|\href| also tries to detect the link type. -Thus the result can be a url link, file link, \dots - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{nolinkurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent Write \emph{URL} in the same way as \verb|\url|, - without creating a hyperlink. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hyperbaseurl}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent A base \emph{URL} is established, which is prepended to other -specified URLs, to make it easier to write portable documents. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hyperimage}\verb|{|\emph{imageURL}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent The link to the image referenced by the URL is inserted, using -\emph{text} as the anchor. - - For drivers that produce HTML, the image itself is inserted by the -browser, with the \emph{text} being ignored completely. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hyperdef}\verb|{|\emph{category}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent A target area of the document (the \emph{text}) is marked, and -given the name \emph{category.name} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hyperref}\verb|{|\emph{URL}\verb|}{|\emph{category}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent \emph{text} is made into a link to \emph{URL\#category.name} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hyperref}\verb|[|\emph{label}\verb|]{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent -\emph{text} is made into a link to the same place as -\verb|\ref{|\emph{label}\verb|}| would be linked. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hyperlink}\verb|{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hypertarget}\verb|{|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent A simple internal link is created with \verb|\hypertarget|, -with two parameters of an anchor \emph{name}, and anchor -\emph{text}. \verb|\hyperlink| has two arguments, the name of a -hypertext object defined somewhere by \verb|\hypertarget|, and the -\emph{text} which be used as the link on the page. - -Note that in HTML parlance, the \verb|\hyperlink| command inserts a -notional \# in front of each link, making it relative to the current -testdocument; \verb|\href| expects a full URL. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{phantomsection} -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent -This sets an anchor at this location. It works similar to -\verb|\hypertarget{}{}| with an automatically chosen anchor name. -Often it is used in conjunction -with \verb|\addcontentsline| for sectionlike things (index, bibliography, -preface). \verb|\addcontentsline| refers to the latest previous location -where an anchor is set. Example: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\cleardoublepage -\phantomsection -\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} -\printindex -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the -index points to the start of the index page, not to a location -before this page. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{autoref}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent -This is a replacement for the usual \verb|\ref| command that places a -contextual label in front of the reference. This gives your users a -bigger target to click for hyperlinks (e.g.\ `section 2' instead of -merely the number `2'). - -The label is worked out from the context of the original \verb|\label| -command by \textsf{hyperref} by using the macros listed below (shown -with their default values). The macros can be (re)defined in documents -using \verb|\(re)newcommand|; note that some of these macros are already -defined in the standard document classes. The mixture of lowercase and -uppercase initial letters is deliberate and corresponds to the author's -practice. - -For each macro below, \textsf{hyperref} checks \ci{*autorefname} before -\ci{*name}. For instance, it looks for \ci{figureautorefname} before -\ci{figurename}. - -\begin{longtable}{@{}lp{10cm}@{}} -\textit{Macro} & \textit{Default} \\ -\ci{figurename} & Figure \\ -\ci{tablename} & Table \\ -\ci{partname} & Part \\ -\ci{appendixname} & Appendix \\ -\ci{equationname} & Equation \\ -\ci{Itemname} & item \\ -\ci{chaptername} & chapter \\ -\ci{sectionname} & section \\ -\ci{subsectionname} & subsection \\ -\ci{subsubsectionname} & subsubsection \\ -\ci{paragraphname} & paragraph \\ -\ci{Hfootnotename} & footnote \\ -\ci{AMSname} & Equation \\ -\ci{theoremname} & Theorem\\ -\ci{page} & page\\ -\end{longtable} - -Example for a redefinition if \textsf{babel} is used: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} -\addto\extrasngerman{% - \def\subsectionautorefname{Unterkapitel}% -} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -Hint: \cs{autoref} works via the counter name that the reference -is based on. Sometimes \cs{autoref} chooses the wrong name, if -the counter is used for different things. For example, it happens -with \cs{newtheorem} if a lemma shares a counter with theorems. -Then package \xpackage{aliascnt} provides a method to generate a -simulated second counter that allows the differentiation between -theorems and lemmas: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass{article} - -\usepackage{aliascnt} -\usepackage{hyperref} - -\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem} - -\newaliascnt{lemma}{theorem} -\newtheorem{lemma}[lemma]{Lemma} -\aliascntresetthe{lemma} - -\providecommand*{\lemmaautorefname}{Lemma} - -\begin{document} - -We will use \autoref{a} to prove \autoref{b}. - -\begin{lemma}\label{a} - Nobody knows. -\end{lemma} - -\begin{theorem}\label{b} - Nobody is right. -\end{theorem}. - -\end{document} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{autopageref}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent -It replaces \verb|\pageref| and adds the name for page in front of -the page reference. First \ci{pageautorefname} is checked before -\ci{pagename}. - -For instances where you want a reference to use the correct counter, but -not to create a link, there are starred forms (these starred forms exist even if -hyperref has been loaded with \verb|implicit=false|): - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{ref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{pageref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{autoref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{autopageref*}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -A typical use would be to write -\begin{verbatim} -\hyperref[other]{that nice section (\ref*{other}) we read before} -\end{verbatim} - -We want \verb|\ref*{other}| to generate the correct number, but not to -form a link, since we do this ourselves with \ci{hyperref}. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{pdfstringdef}\verb|{|\emph{macroname}\verb|}{|\emph{\TeX string}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\ci{pdfstringdef} returns a macro containing the PDF string. (Currently -this is done globally, but do not rely on it.) All the following tasks, -definitions and redefinitions are made in a group to keep them local: - -\begin{itemize} -\item Switching to PD1 or PU encoding -\item Defining the \Quote{octal sequence commands} (\verb|\345|): \verb|\edef\3{\string\3}| -\item Special glyphs of \TeX: \verb|\{|, \verb|\%|, \verb|\&|, \verb|\space|, \verb|\dots|, etc. -\item National glyphs (\textsf{german.sty}, \textsf{french.sty}, etc.) -\item Logos: \verb|\TeX|, \verb|\eTeX|, \verb|\MF|, etc. -\item Disabling commands that do not provide useful functionality in bookmarks: -\verb|\label|, \verb|\index|, \verb|\glossary|, \verb|\discretionary|, \verb|\def|, \verb|\let|, etc. -\item \LaTeX's font commands like \verb|\textbf|, etc. -\item Support for \verb|\xspace| provided by the \xpackage{xspace} package -\end{itemize} - -In addition, parentheses are protected to avoid the danger of unsafe -unbalanced parentheses in the PDF string. For further details, see Heiko -Oberdiek's Euro\TeX\ paper distributed with \textsf{hyperref}. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{begin}\verb|{NoHyper}|\ldots\ci{end}\verb|{NoHyper}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - Sometimes we just don't want the wretched package interfering - with us. Define an environment we can put in manually, or include - in a style file, which stops the hypertext functions doing anything. - This is used, for instance, in the Elsevier classes, to stop - \verb|hyperref| playing havoc in the front matter. - -\subsection{Bookmark macros} - -\subsubsection{Setting bookmarks} - -Usually \textsf{hyperref} automatically adds bookmarks for -\verb|\section| and similar macros. But they can also set manually. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{pdfbookmark}\verb|[|\emph{level}\verb|]{|text\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -creates a bookmark with the specified text and at the given level (default is -0). As name for the internal anchor name is used (in conjunction with -level). Therefore the name must be unique (similar to \verb|\label|). - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{currentpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -creates a bookmark at the current level. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{subpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -creates a bookmark one step down in the bookmark hierarchy. -Internally the current level is increased by one. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{belowpdfbookmark}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}{|\emph{name}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -creates a bookmark below the current bookmark level. However after the -command the current bookmark level has not changed. - -\noindent \textbf{Hint:} Package \textsf{bookmark} replaces -\textsf{hyperref}'s bookmark organization by a new algorithm: -\begin{itemize} -\item Usually only one \LaTeX\ run is needed. -\item More control over the bookmark appearance (color, font). -\item Different bookmark actions are supported (external file links, - URLs, \dots). -\end{itemize} -Therefore I recommend using this package. - -\subsubsection{Replacement macros} - -\textsf{hyperref} takes the text for bookmarks from the arguments of -commands like \ci{section}, which can contain things like math, colors, -or font changes, none of which will display in bookmarks as is. - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{texorpdfstring}\verb|{|\emph{\TeX string}\verb|}{|\emph{PDFstring}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -For example, -\begin{verbatim} -\section{Pythagoras: - \texorpdfstring{$ a^2 + b^2 = c^2 $}{% - a\texttwosuperior\ + b\texttwosuperior\ = - c\texttwosuperior - }% -} -\section{\texorpdfstring{\textcolor{red}}{}{Red} Mars} -\end{verbatim} - -\ci{pdfstringdef} executes the hook \pdfstringdefPreHook before it -expands the string. Therefore, you can use this hook to perform -additional tasks or to disable additional commands. - -\begin{verbatim} -\expandafter\def\expandafter\pdfstringdefPreHook -\expandafter{% - \pdfstringdefPreHook - \renewcommand{\mycommand}[1]{}% -} -\end{verbatim} - -However, for disabling commands, an easier way is via -\ci{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}, which adds its argument to the -definition of \ci{pdfstringdefPreHook} (`@' can here be used as letter in -command names): - -\begin{verbatim} -\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% - \let~\textasciitilde - \def\url{\pdfstringdefWarn\url}% - \let\textcolor\@gobble -} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Utility macros} - -\label{hypercalcbp} -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{hypercalcbp}\verb|{|\emph{dimen specification}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -\noindent -\verb|\hypercalcbp| takes a \TeX\ dimen specification and -converts it to bp and returns the number without the unit. -This is useful for options \verb|pdfview|, \verb|pdfstartview| -and \verb|pdfremotestartview|. -Example: -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\hypersetup{ - pdfstartview={FitBH \hypercalcbp{\paperheight-\topmargin-1in - -\headheight-\headsep} -} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The origin of the PDF coordinate system is the lower left corner. - -Note, for calculations you need either package \xpackage{calc} or -\hologo{eTeX}. Nowadays the latter should automatically be enabled -for \hologo{LaTeX} formats. Users without \hologo{eTeX}, please, look -in the source documentation \verb|hyperref.dtx| for further -limitations. - -Also \cs{hypercalcbp} cannot be used in option specifications -of \cs{documentclass} and \cs{usepackage}, because -\hologo{LaTeX} expands the option lists of these commands. However -package \xpackage{hyperref} is not yet loaded and an undefined control -sequence error would arise. - -\section[New Features]{New Features% -\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}} - - -\subsection{Option `pdflinkmargin'} - - Option `pdflinkmargin' is an experimental option for specifying - a link margin, if the driver supports this. Default is 1 pt for - supporting drivers. - - -\begin{description} -\item[pdfTeX] -\begin{itemize} - \item The link area also depends on the surrounding box. - \item Settings have local effect. - \item When a page is shipped out, pdfTeX uses the current setting - of the link margin for all links on the page. -\end{itemize} - -\item[pdfmark] -\begin{itemize} - \item Settings have global effect. -\end{itemize} - -\item[xetex] -\begin{itemize} - \item Settings must be done in the preamble or the first page and then have global effect. - The key inserts the new (x)dvipdfmx special \verb|\special{dvipdfmx:config g #1}| (with the unit removed). -\end{itemize} - -\item[Other drivers] - Unsupported. -\end{description} - - -\subsection{Field option `calculatesortkey'} - - Fields with calculated values are calculated in document order - by default. If calculated field values depend on other calculated - fields that appear later in the document, then the correct calculation - order can be specified with option `calculatesortkey'. Its value is - used as key to lexicographically sort the calculated fields. - The sort key do not need to be unique. Fields that share the same - key are sorted in document order. - - - - Currently the field option `calculatesortkey' is only supported by - the driver for pdfTeX. - - -\subsection{Option `localanchorname'} - - When an anchor is set (e.g. via \verb|\refstepcounter|, then the - anchor name is globally set to the current anchor name. - - - For example: -\begin{verbatim} - \section{Foobar} - \begin{equation}\end{equation} - \label{sec:foobar} -\end{verbatim} - With the default global setting (localanchorname=false) - a reference to `sec:foobar' jumps to the equation before. - With option `localanchorname' the anchor of the equation - is forgotten after the environment and the reference - `sec:foobar' jumps to the section title. - - - Option `localanchorname' is an experimental option, there - might be situations, where the anchor name is not available - as expected. - - -\subsection{Option `customdriver'} - - The value of option `customdriver' is the name of an external - driver file without extension `.def'. The file must have - \verb|\ProvidesFile| with a version date and number that match the - date and number of `hyperref', otherwise a warning is given. - - Because the interface, what needs to be defined in the driver, - is not well defined and quite messy, the option is mainly intended - to ease developing, testing, debugging the driver part. - - -\subsection{Option `psdextra'} - - LaTeX's NFSS is used to assist the conversion of arbitrary - TeX strings to PDF strings (bookmarks, PDF information entries). - Many math command names (\verb|\geq|, \verb|\notin|, ...) are not in control - of NFSS, therefore they are defined with prefix `text' - (\verb|\textgeq|, \verb|\textnotin|, ...). They can be mapped to short names - during the processing to PDF strings. The disadvantage is that - they are many hundreds macros that need to be redefined for - each PDF string conversion. Therefore this can be enabled or - disabled as option `psdextra'. On default the option is turned - off (set to `false'). Turning the option on means - that the short names are available. Then \verb|\geq| can directly - be used instead of \verb|\textgeq|. - - -\subsection{\textbackslash XeTeXLinkBox} - - When XeTeX generates a link annotation, it does not look - at the boxes (as the other drivers), but only at the character - glyphs. If there are no glyphs (images, rules, ...), then - it does not generate a link annotation. Macro \verb|\XeTeXLinkBox| - puts its argument in a box and adds spaces at the lower left - and upper right corners. An additional margin can be specified - by setting it to the dimen register \verb|\XeTeXLinkMargin|. The default - is 2pt. - - Example: - - -\begin{verbatim} - % xelatex - \documentclass{article} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \setlength{\XeTeXLinkMargin}{1pt} - \begin{document} - \section{Hello World} - \newpage - \label{sec:hello} - \hyperref[sec:hello]{% - \XeTeXLinkBox{\rule{10mm}{10mm}}% - } - \end{document} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{\textbackslash IfHyperBooleanExists and \textbackslash IfHyperBoolean} -\begin{verbatim} - \IfHyperBooleanExists{OPTION}{YES}{NO} -\end{verbatim} - If a hyperref OPTION is a boolean, that means it takes values - `true' or `false', then \verb|\IfHyperBooleanExists| calls YES, otherwise NO. - - -\begin{verbatim} - \IfHyperBoolean{OPTION}{YES}{NO} -\end{verbatim} - Macro \verb|\IfHyperBoolean| calls YES, if OPTION exists as boolean and is - enabled. Otherwise NO is executed. - - - - Both macros are expandable. Additionally option `stoppedearly' is - available. It is enabled if \verb|\MaybeStopEarly| or \verb|\MaybeStopNow| - end hyperref prematurely. - - -\subsection{\textbackslash unichar} - - If a Unicode character is not supported by puenc.def, it can - be given by using \verb|\unichar|. Its name and syntax is inherited - from package `ucs'. However it is defined independently for - use in hyperref's \verb|\pdfstringdef| (that converts arbitrary - TeX code to PDF strings or tries to do this). - - - - Macro \verb|\unichar| takes a TeX number as argument, - examples for U+263A (WHITE SMILING FACE): -\begin{verbatim} - \unichar{"263A}% hexadecimal notation - \unichar{9786}% decimal notation -\end{verbatim} - `"' must not be a babel shorthand character or otherwise - active. Otherwise prefix it with \verb|\string|: -\begin{verbatim} - \unichar{\string"263A}% converts `"' to `"' with catcode 12 (other) -\end{verbatim} - Users of (n)german packages or babel options may use \verb|\dq| instead: -\begin{verbatim} - \unichar{\dq 263A}% \dq is double quote with catcode 12 (other) -\end{verbatim} - - -\subsection{\textbackslash ifpdfstringunicode} - - Some features of the PDF specification needs PDF strings. - Examples are bookmarks or the entries in the information dictionary. - The PDF specification allows two encodings `PDFDocEncoding' - (8-bit encoding) and `Unicode' (UTF-16). The user can help - using \verb|\texorpdfstring| to replace complicate TeX constructs - by a representation for the PDF string. However \verb|\texorpdfstring| - does not distinguish the two encodings. This gap closes - \verb|\ifpdfstringunicode|. It is only allowed in the second argument - of \verb|\texorpdfstring| and takes two arguments, the first allows - the full range of Unicode. The second is limited to the - characters available in PDFDocEncoding. - - - - As example we take a macro definition for the Vietnamese - name of Han The Thanh. Correctly written it needs some - accented characters, one character even with a double accent. - Class `tugboat.cls' defines a macro for the typesetted name: -\begin{verbatim} - \def\Thanh{% - H\`an~% - Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}% - ~Th\`anh% - } -\end{verbatim} - It's not entirely correct, the second accent over the `e' is not - an acute, but a hook. However standard LaTeX does not provide - such an accent. - - Now we can extend the definition to support hyperref. - The first and the last word are already supported automatically. - Characters with two or more accents are a difficult business in - LaTeX, because the NFSS2 macros of the LaTeX kernel do not support - more than one accent. Therefore also puenc.def misses support for - them. But we can provide it using \verb|\unichar|. The character - in question is: -\begin{verbatim} - % U+1EC3 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX AND HOOK ABOVE -\end{verbatim} - Thus we can put this together: -\begin{verbatim} - \def\Thanh{% - H\`an~% - \texorpdfstring{Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}% - {\ifpdfstringunicode{Th\unichar{"1EC3}}{Th\^e}}% - ~Th\`anh% - } -\end{verbatim} - For PDFDocEncoding (PD1) the variant above has dropped the - second accent. Alternatively we could provide a representation - without accents instead of wrong accents: -\begin{verbatim} - \def\Thanh{% - \texorpdfstring{% - H\`an~% - Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}% - ~Th\`anh% - }{% - \ifpdfstringunicode{% - H\`an Th\unichar{"1EC3} Th\`anh% - }{% - Han The Thanh% - }% - }% - } -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Customizing index style file with \textbackslash nohyperpage} - - Since version 2008/08/14~v6.78f. - - - - For hyperlink support in the index, hyperref inserts \verb|\hyperpage| - into the index macros. After processing with Makeindex, \verb|\hyperpage| - analyzes its argument to detect page ranges and page comma lists. - However, only the standard settings are supported directly: -\begin{verbatim} - delim_r "--" - delim_n ", " -\end{verbatim} - (See manual page/documentation of Makeindex that explains - the keys that can be used in style files for Makeindex.) - Customized versions of - \verb|delim_r, delim_n, suffix_2p, suffix_3p, suffix_mp| - needs markup that \verb|\hyperpage| can detect and knows that - this stuff does not belong to a page number. Makro - \verb|\nohyperpage| serves as this markup. Put the customized - code for these keys inside \verb|\nohyperpage|, e.g.: -\begin{verbatim} - suffix_2p "\\nohyperpage{f.}" - suffix_3p "\\nohyperpage{ff.}" -\end{verbatim} - (Depending on the typesetting tradition some space ``\verb|\\|,'' or ``\verb|~|'' - should be put before the first f inside \verb|\nohyperpage|.) - - -\subsection{Experimental option `ocgcolorlinks'} - - The idea are colored links, when viewed, but printed without colors. - This new experimental option `ocgcolorlinks' uses Optional Content - Groups, a feature introduced in PDF 1.5. - - A better implementation which hasn't the disadvantage to prevent line breaks is - in the ocgx2 package. Check its documentation for details how to use it. -\begin{itemize} - \item The option must be given for package loading: - \verb|\usepackage[ocgcolorlinks]{hyperref}| - \item Main disadvantage: Links cannot be broken across lines. - PDF reference 1.7: 4.10.2 ``Making Graphical Content Optional'': - Graphics state operations, such as setting the color, ..., - are still applied. - Therefore the link text is put in a box and set twice, with and - without color. - \item The feature can be switched of by \verb|\hypersetup{ocgcolorlinks=false}| - inside the document. - \item Supported drivers: pdftex, dvipdfm - \item The PDF version should be at least 1.5. It is automatically - set for pdfTeX, LuaTeX and dvipdfmx. -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Option `pdfa'} - - The new option `pdfa' tries to avoid violations of PDF/A in code - generated by hyperref. However, the result is usually not in PDF/A, - because many features aren't controlled by hyperref (XMP metadata, - fonts, colors, driver dependend low level stuff, ...). - - - - Currently, option `pdfa' sets and disables the following items: -\begin{itemize} - \item Enabled annotation flags: Print, NoZoom, NoRotate [PDF/A 6.5.3]. - \item Disabled annotation flags: Hidden, Invisible, NoView [PDF/A 6.5.3]. - \item Disabled: Launch action (\href{run:...} [PDF/A 6.6.1]. - \item Restricted: Named actions (\Acrobatmenu: NextPage, PrevPage, - FirstPage, LastPage) [PDF/A 6.6.1]. - \item Many things are disabled in PDF formulars: - \begin{itemize} - \item JavaScript actions [PDF/A 6.6.1] - \item Trigger events (additional actions) [PDF/A 6.6.2] - \item Push button (because of JavaScript) - \item Interactive Forms: Flag NeedAppearances is the default `false' - (Because of this, hyperref's implementation of Forms looks ugly). - [PDF/A 6.9] - \end{itemize} -\end{itemize} - - - - The default value of the new option `pdfa' is `false'. It influences - the loading of the package and cannot be changed after hyperref is - loaded (\verb|\usepackage{hyperref}|). - - - -\subsection{Option `linktoc' added} - - The new option `linktoc' allows more control which part - of an entry in the table of contents is made into a link: -\begin{itemize} - \item `linktoc=none' (no links) - \item `linktoc=section' (default behaviour, same as `linktocpage=false') - \item `linktoc=page' (same as `linktocpage=true') - \item `linktoc=all' (both the section and page part are links) -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Option `pdfnewwindow' changed} - - Before 6.77b: -\begin{itemize} - \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true - \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ (absent) - \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent) -\end{itemize} - Since 6.77b: -\begin{itemize} - \item pdfnewwindow=true $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow true - \item pdfnewwindow=false $\rightarrow$ /NewWindow false - \item pdfnewwindow={} $\rightarrow$ (absent) - \item unused pdfnewwindow $\rightarrow$ (absent) -\end{itemize} - - - - Rationale: There is a difference between setting to `false' - and an absent entry. In the former case the new document - replaces the old one, in the latter case the PDF viewer - application should respect the user preference. - - -\subsection{Flag options for PDF forms} - - PDF form field macros (\verb|\TextField|, \verb|\CheckBox|, ...) support - boolean flag options. The option name is the lowercase - version of the names in the PDF specification (1.7): - - \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html} - - \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/pdf_reference.pdf} - - Options (convert to lowercase) except flags in square brackets: - -\begin{itemize} - \item Table 8.16 Annotation flags (page 608): - -{\obeylines - 1 Invisible - 2 Hidden (PDF 1.2) - 3 Print (PDF 1.2) - 4 NoZoom (PDF 1.3) - 5 NoRotate (PDF 1.3) - 6 NoView (PDF 1.3) - [7 ReadOnly (PDF 1.3)] ignored for widget annotations, see table 8.70 - 8 Locked (PDF 1.4) - 9 ToggleNoView (PDF 1.5) - 10 LockedContents (PDF 1.7) -} - \item Table 8.70 Field flags common to all field types (page 676): - -{\obeylines - 1 ReadOnly - 2 Required - 3 NoExport -} - \item Table 8.75 Field flags specific to button fields (page 686): - -{\obeylines - 15 NoToggleToOff (Radio buttons only) - 16 Radio (set: radio buttons, clear: check box, pushbutton: clear) - 17 Pushbutton - 26 RadiosInUniso (PDF 1.5) -} - \item Table 8.77 Field flags specific to text fields (page 691): - -{\obeylines - 13 Multiline - 14 Password - 21 FileSelect (PDF 1.4) - 23 DoNotSpellCheck (PDF 1.4) - 24 DoNotScroll (PDF 1.4) - 25 Comb (PDF 1.5) - 26 RichText (PDF 1.5) -} - \item Table 8.79 Field flags specific to choice fields (page 693): - -{\obeylines - 18 Combo (set: combo box, clear: list box) - 19 Edit (only useful if Combo is set) - 20 (Sort) for authoring tools, not PDF viewers - 22 MultiSelect (PDF 1.4) - 23 DoNotSpellCheck (PDF 1.4) (only useful if Combo and Edit are set) - 27 CommitOnSelChange (PDF 1.5) -} - \item Table 8.86 Flags for submit-form actions (page 704): - -{\obeylines - [1 Include/Exclude] unsupported, use `noexport' (table 8.70) instead - 2 IncludeNoValueFields - [3 ExportFormat] handled by option `export' - 4 GetMethod - 5 SubmitCoordinates - [6 XFDF (PDF 1.4)] handled by option `export' - 7 IncludeAppendSaves (PDF 1.4) - 8 IncludeAnnotations (PDF 1.4) - [9 SubmitPDF (PDF 1.4)] handled by option `export' - 10 CanonicalFormat (PDF 1.4) - 11 ExclNonUserAnnots (PDF 1.4) - 12 ExclFKey (PDF 1.4) - 14 EmbedForm (PDF 1.5) -} -\end{itemize} - - New option `export' sets the export format of a submit action. - Valid values are (upper- or lowercase): -\begin{itemize} - \item FDF - \item HTML - \item XFDF - \item PDF (not supported by Acrobat Reader) -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Option `pdfversion'} - - This is an experimental option. It notifies `hyperref' about - the intended PDF version. Currently this is used in code for - PDF forms (implementation notes 116 and 122 of PDF spec 1.7). - - - - Values: 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. Values below 1.2 are not - supported, because most drivers expect higher PDF versions. - - - - The option must be used early, not after \verb|\usepackage{hyperref}|. - - - In theory this option should also set the PDF version, - but this is not generally supported. -\begin{itemize} - \item pdfTeX below 1.10a: unsupported. - pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a and < 1.30: \verb|\pdfoptionpdfminorversion| - pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.30: \verb|\pdfminorversion| - \item dvipdfm: configuration file, example: - TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/config/config, entry `V 2'. - \item dvipdfmx: configuration file, example: - TeX Live 2007, texmf/dvipdfm/dvipdfmx.cfg, entry `V 4'. - \item Ghostscript: option -dCompatibilityLevel (this is set in - `ps2pdf12', `ps2pdf13', `ps2pdf14'). -\end{itemize} - - - The current PDF version is used as default if this version - can be detected (only pdfTeX $\ge$ 1.10a). Otherwise the lowest - version 1.2 is assumed. Thus `hyperref' tries to avoid PDF code - that breaks this version, but is free to use ignorable higher PDF - features. - - -\subsection{Field option `name'} - - Many form objects uses the label argument - for several purposes: -\begin{itemize} - \item Layouted label. - \item As name in HTML structures. -\end{itemize} - Code that is suitable for layouting with TeX can - break in the structures of the output format. - If option `name' is given, then its value is used - as name in the different output structures. Thus - the value should consist of letters only. - - -\subsection{Option `pdfencoding'} - - The PDF format allows two encodings for bookmarks and entries - in the information dictionary: PDFDocEncoding and Unicode - as UTF-16BE. Option \xoption{pdfencoding} selects between these encodings: -\begin{itemize} - \item \xoption{pdfdoc} uses PDFDocEncoding. It uses just one byte per character, - but the supported characters are limited (244 in PDF-1.7). - \item \xoption{unicode} sets Unicode. It is encoded as UTF-16BE. Two bytes - are used for most characters, surrogates need four bytes. - \item \xoption{auto} PDFDocEncoding if the string does not contain characters - outside the encoding and Unicode otherwise. -\end{itemize} - - The luatex driver uses \xoption{unicode} by default. If another encoding should be forced, - it should be done in \verb|hypersetup|. - -\subsection{Color options/package hycolor} - - See documentation of package `hycolor'. - - -\subsection{Option pdfusetitle} - - If option pdfusetitle is set then hyperref tries to - derive the values for pdftitle and pdfauthor from - \verb|\title| and \verb|\author|. An optional argument for \verb|\title| and - \verb|\author| is supported (class amsart). - - -\subsection{Starred form of \textbackslash autoref} - - \verb|\autoref*| generates a reference without link as \verb|\ref*| or \verb|\pageref*|. - - -\subsection{Link border style} - - Links can be underlined instead of the default rectangle or - options \xoption{colorlinks}, \xoption{frenchlinks}. This is done by option - \verb|pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1}| - - Some remarks: - -\begin{itemize} - \item AR7/Linux seems to have a bug, that don't use the default - value \verb"1" for the width, but zero, thus that the underline - is not visible without \verb"/W 1". The same applies for - dashed boxes, eg.: - pdfborderstyle={/S/D/D[3 2]/W 1} - - \item The syntax is described in the PDF specification, look for - ``border style'', eg. - Table 8.13 ``Entries in a border style dictionary'' - (specification for version 1.6) - - \item The border style is removed by - pdfborderstyle={} - This is automatically done if option colorlinks is enabled. - - \item Be aware that not all PDF viewers support this feature, not - even Acrobat Reader itself: - - Some support: - \begin{itemize} - \item AR7/Linux: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed}, but the border width - must be given. - \item xpdf 3.00: \xoption{underline} and \xoption{dashed} - \end{itemize} - - Unsupported: - \begin{itemize} - \item AR5/Linux - \item ghostscript 8.50 - \end{itemize} -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}} - - The depth of the bookmarks can be controlled by the new - option \xoption{bookmarksdepth}. The option acts globally and - distinguishes three cases: -\begin{itemize} - \item \xoption{bookmarksdepth} without value - Then hyperref uses the current value of counter \xoption{tocdepth}. - This is the compatible behaviour and the default. - \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=", the value is number (also negative): - The depth for the bookmarks are set to this number. - \item \verb"bookmarksdepth=" - The is a document division name (part, chapter, ...). - It must not start with a digit or minus to avoid mixing up - with the number case. Internally hyperref uses the value - of macro \verb|\toclevel@|. - Examples: -\begin{verbatim} - \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=paragraph} - \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth=4} % same as before - \hypersetup{bookmarksdepth} % counter "tocdepth" is used -\end{verbatim} -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Option \xoption{pdfescapeform}} - - There are many places where arbitrary strings end up as - PS or PDF strings. The PS/PDF strings in parentheses form - require the protection of some characters, e.g. unmatched - left or right parentheses need escaping or the escape - character itself (backslash). - Since 2006/02/12~v6.75a the PS/PDF driver should do - this automatically. However I assume a problem with - compatibility, especially regarding the form part where - larger amounts of JavaScript code can be present. - It would be a pain to remove all the escaping, because - an additional escaping layer can falsify the code. - - Therefore a new option pdfescapeform was introduced: -\begin{itemize} - \item pdfescapeform=false - Escaping for the formulars are disabled, this is - the compatibility behaviour, therefore this is the default. - \item pdfescapeform=true - Then the PS/PDF drivers do all the necessary escaping. - This is the logical choice and the recommended setting. - For example, the user writes JavaScript as JavaScript - and do not care about escaping characters for PS/PDF - output. -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Default driver setting} - - (hyperref $\ge$ 6.72s) - If no driver is given, hyperref tries its best to guess the - most suitable driver. Thus it loads \xoption{hpdftex}, if pdfTeX is - detected running in PDF mode. Or it loads the corresponding - VTeX driver for VTeX's working modes. - Unhappily many driver programs run after the TeX compiler, - so hyperref does not have a chance (dvips, dvipdfm, ...). - In this case driver \xoption{hypertex} is loaded that supports the - HyperTeX features that are recognized by xdvi for example. - This behaviour, however, can easily be changed in the configuration - file \verb"hyperref.cfg": -\begin{verbatim} - \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hdvips} -\end{verbatim} - for dvips, or -\begin{verbatim} - \providecommand*{\Hy@defaultdriver}{hypertex} -\end{verbatim} - for the default behaviour of hyperref. - - See also the new option `driverfallback'. - -\subsection{Backref entries} - - Alternative interface for formatting of backref entries, example: - -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[12pt,UKenglish]{article} - -\usepackage{babel} -\usepackage[pagebackref]{hyperref} - -% Some language options are detected by package backref. -% This affects the following macros: -% \backrefpagesname -% \backrefsectionsname -% \backrefsep -% \backreftwosep -% \backreflastsep - -\renewcommand*{\backref}[1]{ - % default interface - % #1: backref list - % - % We want to use the alternative interface, - % therefore the definition is empty here. -} -\renewcommand*{\backrefalt}[4]{% - % alternative interface - % #1: number of distinct back references - % #2: backref list with distinct entries - % #3: number of back references including duplicates - % #4: backref list including duplicates - \par - #3 citation(s) on #1 page(s): #2,\par - \ifnum#1=1 % - \ifnum#3=1 % - 1 citation on page % - \else - #3 citations on page % - \fi - \else - #3 citations on #1 pages % - \fi - #2,\par - \ifnum#3=1 % - 1 citation located at page % - \else - #3 citations located at pages % - \fi - #4.\par -} - -% The list of distinct entries can be further refined: -\renewcommand*{\backrefentrycount}[2]{% - % #1: the original backref entry - % #2: the count of citations of this entry, - % in case of duplicates greater than one - #1% - \ifnum#2>1 % - ~(#2)% - \fi -} - -\begin{document} - - \section{Hello} - \cite{ref1, ref2, ref3, ref4} - \section{World} - \cite{ref1, ref3} - \newpage - - \section{Next section} - \cite{ref1} - \newpage - - \section{Last section} - \cite{ref1, ref2} - \newpage - - \pdfbookmark[1]{Bibliography}{bib} - \begin{thebibliography}{99} - \bibitem{ref1} Dummy entry one. - - \bibitem{ref2} Dummy entry two. - - \bibitem{ref3} Dummy entry three. - - \bibitem{ref4} Dummy entry four. - - \end{thebibliography} - -\end{document} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{\textbackslash phantomsection} - -Set an anchor at this location. It is often used in conjunction -with \verb|\addcontentsline| for sectionlike things (index, bibliography, -preface). \verb|\addcontentsline| refers to the latest previous location -where an anchor is set. - -\begin{verbatim} - \cleardoublepage - \phantomsection - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname} - \printindex -\end{verbatim} - -Now the entry in the table of contents (and bookmarks) for the -index points to the start of the index page, not to a location -before this page. - - - -\section{Acrobat-specific behavior} -If you want to access the menu options of Acrobat Reader or Exchange, the following -macro is provided in the appropriate drivers: - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{Acrobatmenu}\verb|{|\emph{menuoption}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\noindent The \emph{text} is used to create a button which activates the appropriate \emph{menuoption}. The following table lists the option names you can use---comparison of this with the menus in Acrobat Reader or Exchange will show what they do. Obviously some are only appropriate to Exchange. - -\medskip -\begin{longtable}{@{}l>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}p{9cm}@{}} -File & Open, Close, Scan, Save, SaveAs, Optimizer:SaveAsOpt, Print, PageSetup, Quit \\ -File$\rightarrow$Import & ImportImage, ImportNotes, AcroForm:ImportFDF \\ -File$\rightarrow$Export & ExportNotes, AcroForm:ExportFDF \\ -File$\rightarrow$DocumentInfo & GeneralInfo, OpenInfo, FontsInfo, SecurityInfo, Weblink:Base, AutoIndex:DocInfo \\ -File$\rightarrow$Preferences & GeneralPrefs, NotePrefs, FullScreenPrefs, Weblink:Prefs, AcroSearch:Preferences(Windows) - or, AcroSearch:Prefs(Mac), Cpt:Capture \\ -Edit & Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, SelectAll, Ole:CopyFile, TouchUp:TextAttributes, - TouchUp:FitTextToSelection, TouchUp:ShowLineMarkers, TouchUp:ShowCaptureSuspects, - TouchUp:FindSuspect, \\ - & Properties \\ -Edit$\rightarrow$Fields & AcroForm:Duplicate, AcroForm:TabOrder \\ -Document & Cpt:CapturePages, AcroForm:Actions, CropPages, RotatePages, InsertPages, ExtractPages, - ReplacePages, DeletePages, NewBookmark, SetBookmarkDest, CreateAllThumbs, - DeleteAllThumbs \\ -View & ActualSize, FitVisible, FitWidth, FitPage, ZoomTo, FullScreen, FirstPage, PrevPage, - NextPage, LastPage, GoToPage, GoBack, GoForward, SinglePage, OneColumn, TwoColumns, - ArticleThreads, PageOnly, ShowBookmarks, ShowThumbs \\ -Tools & Hand, ZoomIn, ZoomOut, SelectText, SelectGraphics, Note, Link, Thread, AcroForm:Tool, - Acro\_Movie:MoviePlayer, TouchUp:TextTool, Find, FindAgain, FindNextNote, - CreateNotesFile \\ -Tools$\rightarrow$Search & AcroSrch:Query, AcroSrch:Indexes, AcroSrch:Results, AcroSrch:Assist, AcroSrch:PrevDoc, - AcroSrch:PrevHit, AcroSrch:NextHit, AcroSrch:NextDoc \\ -Window & ShowHideToolBar, ShowHideMenuBar, ShowHideClipboard, Cascade, TileHorizontal, - TileVertical, CloseAll \\ -Help & HelpUserGuide, HelpTutorial, HelpExchange, HelpScan, HelpCapture, HelpPDFWriter, - HelpDistiller, HelpSearch, HelpCatalog, HelpReader, Weblink:Home \\ -Help(Windows) & About -\end{longtable} - -\section{PDF and HTML forms} -You must put your fields inside a \texttt{Form} environment (only one per file). - -There are six macros to prepare fields: - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{TextField}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{CheckBox}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{ChoiceMenu}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{choices}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{PushButton}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{Submit}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{Reset}\verb|[|\emph{parameters}\verb|]{|\emph{label}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -The way forms and their labels are laid out is determined by: -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{LayoutTextField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{LayoutChoiceField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{LayoutCheckField}\verb|{|\emph{label}\verb|}{|\emph{field}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -These macros default to \#1 \#2 - -What is actually shown in as the field is determined by: -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{MakeRadioField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{MakeCheckField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{MakeTextField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{MakeChoiceField}\verb|{|\emph{width}\verb|}{|\emph{height}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -\begin{cmdsyntax} -\ci{MakeButtonField}\verb|{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -\end{cmdsyntax} - -These macros default to \verb|\vbox to #2{\hbox to #1{\hfill}\vfill}|, except the -last, which defaults to \#1; it is used for buttons, and the special \ci{Submit} and \ci{Reset} -macros. - -You may also want to redefine the following macros: -\begin{verbatim} -\def\DefaultHeightofSubmit{12pt} -\def\DefaultWidthofSubmit{2cm} -\def\DefaultHeightofReset{12pt} -\def\DefaultWidthofReset{2cm} -\def\DefaultHeightofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip} -\def\DefaultWidthofCheckBox{0.8\baselineskip} -\def\DefaultHeightofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip} -\def\DefaultWidthofChoiceMenu{0.8\baselineskip} -\def\DefaultHeightofText{\baselineskip} -\def\DefaultHeightofTextMultiline{4\baselineskip} -\def\DefaultWidthofText{3cm} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Forms environment parameters} - -\smallskip -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}l>{\itshape}lp{9cm}@{}} -action & URL & The URL that will receive the form data if a \textsf{Submit} button is included in the form \\ -encoding & name & The encoding for the string set to the URL; FDF-encoding is usual, and \texttt{html} is the only - valid value \\ -method & name & Used only when generating HTML; values can be \texttt{post} or \texttt{get} \\ -\end{longtable} - -\subsection{Forms optional parameters} -Note that all colors must be expressed as RGB triples, in the range 0..1 (i.e.\ \texttt{color=0 0 -0.5}) - -\smallskip -\begin{longtable}{@{}>{\ttfamily}ll>{\itshape}ll@{}} -accesskey & key & & (as per HTML) \\ -align & number & 0 & alignment within text field; 0 is left-aligned,\\* - & & & 1 is centered, 2 is right-aligned. \\ -altname & name & & alternative name,\\* - & & & the name shown in the user interface\\ -backgroundcolor & & & color of box \\ -bordercolor & & & color of border \\ -bordersep & & & box border gap \\ -borderwidth & & 1 & width of box border, the value is a dimension\\ - & & & or a number with default unit bp\\ -calculate & & & JavaScript code to calculate the value of the field \\ -charsize & dimen & & font size of field text \\ -checkboxsymbol & char & 4 (\ding{\number`4}) & symbol used for check boxes (ZapfDingbats), \\ -&&& the value is a character or \cs{ding}\verb|{|\texttt{\itshape number}\verb|}|, \\ -&&& see package \xpackage{pifont} from bundle \xpackage{psnfss} \\ -checked & boolean & false & whether option selected by default \\ -color & & & color of text in box \\ -combo & boolean & false & choice list is `combo' style \\ -default & & & default value \\ -disabled & boolean & false & field disabled \\ -format & & & JavaScript code to format the field \\ -height & dimen & & height of field box \\ -hidden & boolean & false & field hidden \\ -keystroke & & & JavaScript code to control the keystrokes on entry \\ -mappingname & name & & the mapping name to be used when exporting\\* - & & & the field data\\ -maxlen & number & 0 & number of characters allowed in text field \\ -menulength & number & 4 & number of elements shown in list \\ -multiline & boolean & false & whether text box is multiline \\ -name & name & & name of field (defaults to label) \\ -onblur & & & JavaScript code \\ -onchange & & & JavaScript code \\ -onclick & & & JavaScript code \\ -ondblclick & & & JavaScript code \\ -onfocus & & & JavaScript code \\ -onkeydown & & & JavaScript code \\ -onkeypress & & & JavaScript code \\ -onkeyup & & & JavaScript code \\ -onmousedown & & & JavaScript code \\ -onmousemove & & & JavaScript code \\ -onmouseout & & & JavaScript code \\ -onmouseover & & & JavaScript code \\ -onmouseup & & & JavaScript code \\ -onselect & & & JavaScript code \\ -password & boolean & false & text field is `password' style \\ -popdown & boolean & false & choice list is `popdown' style \\ -radio & boolean & false & choice list is `radio' style \\ -radiosymbol & char & H (\ding{\number`H}) & symbol used for radio fields (ZapfDingbats), \\ -&&& the value is a character or \cs{ding}\verb|{|\texttt{\itshape number}\verb|}|, \\ -&&& see package \xpackage{pifont} from bundle \xpackage{psnfss} \\ -readonly & boolean & false & field is readonly \\ -rotation & number & 0 & rotation of the widget annotation \\* - & & & (degree, counterclockwise, multiple of 90)\\ -tabkey & & & (as per HTML) \\ -validate & & & JavaScript code to validate the entry \\ -value & & & initial value \\ -width & dimen & & width of field box -\end{longtable} - -\section{Defining a new driver} -A hyperref driver has to provide definitions for eight macros: - -\smallskip -\noindent 1. \verb|\hyper@anchor| - -\noindent 2. \verb|\hyper@link| - -\noindent 3. \verb|\hyper@linkfile| - -\noindent 4. \verb|\hyper@linkurl| - -\noindent 5. \verb|\hyper@anchorstart| - -\noindent 6. \verb|\hyper@anchorend| - -\noindent 7. \verb|\hyper@linkstart| - -\noindent 8. \verb|\hyper@linkend| -\smallskip - -The draft option defines the macros as follows -\begin{verbatim} -\let\hyper@@anchor\@gobble -\gdef\hyper@link##1##2##3{##3}% -\def\hyper@linkurl##1##2{##1}% -\def\hyper@linkfile##1##2##3{##1}% -\let\hyper@anchorstart\@gobble -\let\hyper@anchorend\@empty -\let\hyper@linkstart\@gobbletwo -\let\hyper@linkend\@empty -\end{verbatim} - -\section{Special support for other packages} - -Package \xpackage{hyperref} aims to cooperate with other packages, but there are -several possible sources for conflict, such as - -\begin{itemize} - -\item Packages that manipulate the bibliographic mechanism. Peter -William's \xpackage{harvard} package is supported. However, the -recommended package is Patrick Daly's \xpackage{natbib} package that has -specific \xpackage{hyperref} hooks to allow reliable interaction. This -package covers a very wide variety of layouts and citation styles, all -of which work with \xpackage{hyperref}. - -\item Packages that typeset the contents of the \ci{label} and \ci{ref} -macros, such as \xpackage{showkeys}. Since the \xpackage{hyperref} package -redefines these commands, you must set \texttt{implicit=false} for these -packages to work. - -\item Packages that do anything serious with the index. -\end{itemize} - -The \xpackage{hyperref} package is distributed with variants on two useful -packages designed to work especially well with it. These are \xpackage{xr} -and \xpackage{minitoc}, which support crossdocument links using \hologo{LaTeX}'s -normal \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanisms and per-chapter tables of contents, -respectively. - - -\subsection{Package Compatibility} - -Currently only package loading orders are available: - - - -Note: hyperref loads package \xpackage{nameref} at \verb|\begin{document}|. -Sometimes this is too late, thus this package must be loaded -earlier. - - -\subsubsection{algorithm} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{float} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}% eg. -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{amsmath} - - The environments equation and eqnarray are not supported too well. - For example, there might be spacing problems (eqnarray isn't recommended - anyway, see CTAN:info/l2tabu/, the situation for equation is unclear, - because nobody is interested in investigating). Consider using the - environments that package amsmath provide, e.g. gather for equation. - The environment equation can even redefined to use gather: - -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{amsmath} - \let\equation\gather - \let\endequation\endgather -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{amsrefs} - - Package loading order: - -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{amsrefs} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{arydshln, longtable} - - Package longtable must be put before hyperref and arydshln, - hyperref after arydshln generates an error, thus the - resulting package order is then: - -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{longtable} - \usepacakge{hyperref} - \usepackage{arydshln} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{babel/magyar.ldf} - - The old version 2005/03/30 v1.4j will not work. - You need at least version 1.5, maintained by P\'eter Szab\'o, - see CTAN:language/hungarian/babel/. - - -\subsubsection{babel/spanish.ldf} - - Babel's spanish.ldf redefines `\verb|\.|' to support `\verb|\...|'. - In bookmarks (\verb|\pdfstringdef|) only `\verb|\.|' is supported. - If `\verb|\...|' is needed, - \verb|\texorpdfstring{\...}{\dots}| - can be used instead. - - -\subsubsection{bibentry} - - Workaround: - -\begin{verbatim} - \makeatletter - \let\saved@bibitem\@bibitem - \makeatother - - \usepackage{bibentry} - \usepackage{hyperref} - - \begin{document} - - \begingroup - \makeatletter - \let\@bibitem\saved@bibitem - \nobibliography{database} - \endgroup -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{bigfoot} - - Hyperref does not support package `bigfoot'. And package - `bigfoot' does not support hyperref's footnotes and disables - them (hyperfootnotes=false). - - -\subsubsection{chappg} - - Package `chappg' uses \verb|\@addtoreset| that is redefined by `hyperref'. - The package order is therefore: - -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{chappg} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{cite} - - This is from Mike Shell: - cite.sty cannot currently be used with hyperref. - However, I can do a workaround via: - -\begin{verbatim} - \makeatletter - \def\NAT@parse{\typeout{This is a fake Natbib command to fool Hyperref.}} - \makeatother - - \usepackage[hypertex]{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - - so that hyperref will not redefine any of the biblabel stuff - so cite.sty - will work as normal - although the citations will not be hyperlinked, of - course (But this may not be an issue for many people). - - -\subsubsection{count1to} - - Package `count1to' adds several \verb|\@addtoreset| commands that confuse - `hyperref'. Therefore \verb|\theH<...>| has to be fixed: - -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{count1to} - \AtBeginDocument{% *after* \usepackage{count1to} - \renewcommand*{\theHsection}{\theHchapter.\arabic{section}}% - \renewcommand*{\theHsubsection}{\theHsection.\arabic{subsection}}% - \renewcommand*{\theHsubsubsection}{\theHsubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}% - \renewcommand*{\theHparagraph}{\theHsubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}% - \renewcommand*{\theHsubparagraph}{\theHparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}% - } -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{dblaccnt} - - pd1enc.def or puenc.def should be loaded before: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{dblaccnt} -\end{verbatim} - or see entry for \xoption{vietnam}. - - -\subsubsection{easyeqn} - Not compatible, breaks. - - -\subsubsection{ellipsis} - - This packages redefines \verb|\textellipsis| - after package hyperref (pd1enc.def/puenc.def should be loaded before): -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{ellipsis} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{float} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{float} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} -\begin{itemize} - \item Several \verb|\caption| commands are not supported inside one float object. - \item Anchor are set at top of the float object, if its style is controlled - by float.sty. -\end{itemize} - -\subsubsection{endnotes} - Unsupported. - -\subsubsection{foiltex} - Update to version 2008/01/28 v2.1.4b: - Since version 6.77a hyperref does not hack into \verb|\@begindvi|, - it uses package `atbegshi' instead, that hooks into \verb|\shipout|. - Thus the patch of `foils.cls' regarding hyperref is now obsolete - and causes an undefined error message about \verb|\@hyperfixhead|. - This is fixed in FoilTeX 2.1.4b. - - -\subsubsection{footnote} - - This package is not supported, you have to disable hyperref's footnote - support by using option \verb"hyperfootnotes=false". - - -\subsubsection{geometry} - - Driver `dvipdfm' and program `dvipdfm' might generate a warning: - Sorry. Too late to change page size - Then prefer the program `dvipdfmx' or use one of the following - workarounds to move the \verb|\special| of geometry to an earlier - location: - -\begin{verbatim} - \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes - \usepackage{atbegshi} - \AtBeginDocument{% - \let\OrgAtBeginDvi\AtBeginDvi - \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst - } - \usepackage[ - paperwidth=170mm, - paperheight=240mm - ]{geometry} - \AtBeginDocument{% - \let\AtBeginDvi\OrgAtBeginDvi - } - \usepackage{hyperref} - - or - - \documentclass[dvipdfm]{article}% or other classes - \usepackage{atbegshi} - \let\AtBeginDvi\AtBeginShipoutFirst - \usepackage[ - paperwidth=170mm, - paperheight=240mm - ]{geometry} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{IEEEtran.cls} - - version $\ge$ V1.6b (because of \verb|\@makecaption|, see ChangeLog) - - -\subsubsection{index} - - version $\ge$ 1995/09/28 v4.1 (because of \verb|\addcontentsline| redefinition) - - -\subsubsection{lastpage} - - Compatible. - - -\subsubsection{linguex} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{linguex} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{ltabptch} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{longtable} - \usepackage{ltabptch} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{mathenv} - - Unsupported. - - - - Both `mathenv' and `hyperref' messes around with - environment `eqnarray'. You can load `mathenv' after - `hyperref' to avoid an error message. But \verb|\label| - will not work inside environment `eqnarray' properly, - for example. - - -\subsubsection{minitoc-hyper} - - This package is obsolete, use the uptodate original - package minitoc instead. - - -\subsubsection{multind} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{multind} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{natbib} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{natbib} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{nomencl} -Example for introducing links for the page numbers: -\begin{verbatim} - \renewcommand*{\pagedeclaration}[1]{\unskip, \hyperpage{#1}} -\end{verbatim} - - -For equations the following might work: -\begin{verbatim} - \renewcommand*{\eqdeclaration}[1]{% - \hyperlink{equation.#1}{(Equation~#1)}% - } - But the mapping from the equation number to the anchor name - is not available in general. -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{parskip} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{parskip} - \usepackage{hyperref}[2012/08/20] -\end{verbatim} - - - Both packages want to redefine \verb|\@starttoc|. - - -\subsubsection{prettyref} -\begin{verbatim} -%%% example for prettyref %%% -\documentclass{article} -\usepackage{prettyref} -\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} - -%\newrefformat{FIG}{Figure~\ref{#1}}% without hyperref -\newrefformat{FIG}{\hyperref[{#1}]{Figure~\ref*{#1}}} - -\begin{document} - This is a reference to \prettyref{FIG:ONE}. - \newpage - \begin{figure} - \caption{This is my figure} - \label{FIG:ONE} - \end{figure} -\end{document} -%%% example for prettyref %%% - \end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{ntheorem} -\begin{verbatim} - ntheorem-hyper.sty is an old patched version of ntheorem.sty. - Newer versions of ntheorem know the option hyperref: - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage[hyperref]{ntheorem} - But there are still unsolved problems (options thref, ...). -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{setspace} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{setspace} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{sidecap} -\begin{verbatim} - Before 2002/05/24 v1.5h: - \usepackage{nameref} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{sidecap} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{subfigure} -\begin{verbatim} - 1995/03/06 v2.0: - \usepackage{subfigure} - \usepackage{hyperref} - % hypertexnames is set to false. - v2.1: - \usepackage{nameref} - \usepackage{subfigure} - \usepackage{hyperref} - or - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{subfigure} - v2.1.2: - please update - v2.1.3: - \usepackage{hyperref} - \usepackage{subfigure} - or vice versa? -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{titleref} -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{nameref} - \usepackage{titleref}% without usetoc - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{tabularx} - - Linked footnotes are not supported inside environment `tabularx', - because they uses the optional argument of \verb|\footnotetext|, see - section `Limitations'. Before version 2011/09/28 6.82i - hyperref had disabled footnotes entirely by `hyperfootnotes=false'. - - -\subsubsection{titlesec} - - \xpackage{nameref} supports titlesec, but hyperref does not - (unsolved is the anchor setting, missing with unnumbered - section, perhaps problems with page breaks with numbered ones). - - -\subsubsection{ucs/utf8x.def} - - The first time a multibyte UTF8 sequence is called, it - does some calculations and stores the result in a macro - for speeding up the next calls of that UTF8 sequence. - However this makes the first call non-expandable and - will break if used in information entries or bookmarks. - Package \xpackage{ucs} offers \verb|\PrerenderUnicode| or \verb|\PreloadUnicodePage| - to solve this: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{ucs} - \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc} - \usepackage{hyperref}% or with option unicode - \PrerenderUnicode{^^c3^^b6}% or \PrerenderUnicodePage{1} - \hypersetup{pdftitle={Umlaut example: ^^c3^^b6}} -\end{verbatim} - The notation with two carets avoids trouble with 8-bit bytes - for the README file, you can use the characters directly. - - -\subsubsection{varioref} - There are too many problems with varioref. Nobody has time to - sort them out. Therefore this package is now unsupported. - - - Perhaps you are lucky and some of the features of varioref works - with the following loading order: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{nameref} - \usepackage{varioref} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - - - Also some babel versions can be problematic. For exmample, - 2005/05/21 v3.8g contains a patch for varioref that breaks - the hyperref support for varioref. - - - - Also unsupported: -\begin{itemize} -\item \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| do not uppercase the first letter. -\item \verb|\vpageref[]{...}| - On the same page a previous space is not suppressed. -\end{itemize} - -\subsubsection{verse} - - Version 2005/08/22 v2.22 contains support for hyperref. - - For older versions see example from - de.comp.text.tex (2005/08/11, slightly modified): - -\begin{verbatim} - \documentclass{article} - - % package order does not matter - \usepackage{verse} - \usepackage{hyperref} - - \makeatletter - % make unique poemline anchors - \newcounter{verse@env} - \setcounter{verse@env}{0} - \let\org@verse\verse - \def\verse{% - \stepcounter{verse@env}% - \org@verse - } - \def\theHpoemline{\arabic{verse@env}.\thepoemline} - - % add anchor for before \addcontentsline in \@vsptitle - \let\org@vsptitle\@vsptitle - \def\@vsptitle{% - \phantomsection - \org@vsptitle - } - \makeatother - - \begin{document} - - \poemtitle{Poem 1} - \begin{verse} - An one-liner. - \end{verse} - - \newpage - - \poemtitle{Poem 2} - \begin{verse} - Another one-liner. - \end{verse} - - \end{document} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{vietnam} -\begin{verbatim} - % pd1enc.def should be loaded before package dblaccnt: - \usepackage[PD1,OT1]{fontenc} - \usepackage{vietnam} - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsubsection{XeTeX} - - Default for the encoding of bookmarks is `pdfencoding=auto'. - That means the strings are always treated as unicode strings. - Only if the string restricts to the printable ASCII set, - it is written as ASCII string. The reason is that the - \verb|\special| does not support PDFDocEncoding. - - In older versions hyperref contained special conversion code from - UTF-16BE back to UTF-8 in a number of places for - xetex to avoid the xdvipdfmx warning - - \verb"Failed to convert input string to UTF16..." - - This is no longer needed with a current xdvipdfmx, so this code has - been removed. \verb|\csname HyPsd@XeTeXBigCharstrue\endcsname| should no - longer be used. - - -\section[Limitations]{Limitations% -\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}} -\subsection{Wrapped/broken link support} - - Only few drivers support automatically wrapped/broken links, - e.g. pdftex, dvipdfm, hypertex. Other drivers lack this - feature, e.g. dvips, dvipsone. - - Workarounds: -\begin{itemize} -\item For long section or caption titles in the table of contents - or list of figures/tables option \xoption{linktocpage} can be used. - Then the page number will be a link, and the overlong section - title is not forced into an one line link with overfull \verb|\hbox| - warning. -\item ``\verb|\url|''s are caught by package \xpackage{breakurl}. -\item The option \xoption{breaklinks} is intended for internal use. But it - can be used to force link wrapping, e.g. when printing a - document. However, when such a document is converted to PDF - and viewed with a PDF viewer, the active link area will be - misplaced. - - Another limitation: some penalties are ``optimized'' by TeX, - thus there are missing break points, especially within - \verb|\url|. (See thread ``hyperref.sty, breaklinks and url.sty 3.2'' - in comp.text.tex 2005-09). -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Links across pages} - - In general they have problems: -\begin{itemize} - \item Some driver doesn't support them at all (see above). - \item The driver allows it, but the link result might include - the footer and/or header, or an error message can - occur sometimes. -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Footnotes} - - LaTeX allows the separation of the footnote mark and the - footnote text (\verb|\footnotemark|, \verb|\footnotetext|). This interface - might be enough for visual typesetting. But the relation between - \verb|\footnotemark| to \verb|\footnotetext| is not as strong as \verb|\ref| to \verb|\label|. - Therefore it is not clear in general which \verb|\footnotemark| references - which \verb|\footnotetext|. But that is necessary to implement hyperlinking. - Thus the implementation of hyperref does not support the optional - argument of \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext|. - - -\section[Hints]{Hints% -\footnote{This section moved from the README file, needs more integration into the manual}} - -\subsection{Spaces in option values} - - Unhappily LaTeX strips spaces from options if they are given - in \verb|\documentclass| or \verb|\usepackage| (or \verb|\RequirePackage|), e.g.: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage[pdfborder=0 0 1]{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - Package hyperref now gets -\begin{verbatim} - pdfborder=001 -\end{verbatim} - and the result is an invalid PDF file. - As workaround braces can be used: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage[pdfborder={0 0 1}]{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - Some options can also be given in \verb|\hypersetup| -\begin{verbatim} - \hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 1} -\end{verbatim} - In \verb|\hypersetup| the options are directly processed as key value - options (see package keyval) without space stripping in the value part. - - - - Alternatively, LaTeX's option handling system can be adapted - to key value options by one of the packages \xpackage{kvoptions-patch} - (from project \xpackage{kvoptions}) or \xpackage{xkvltxp} (from project \xpackage{xsetkeys}). - - -\subsection{Index with makeindex} -\begin{itemize} - \item Package hyperref adds \verb|\hyperpage| commands by the encap - mechanism (see documentation of Makeindex), - if option hyperindex is set (default). - \verb|\hyperpage| uses the page anchors that are set by - hyperref at each page (default). However in the - default case page numbers are used in anchor names - in arabic form. If the page numbers in other formats - are used (book class with \verb|\frontmatter|, \verb|\romannumbering|, ...), - then the page anchors are not unique. Therefore option - \verb"plainpages=false" is recommended. - \item The encap mechanism of Makeindex allows to use one command only - (see documentation of Makeindex). - If the user sets such a command, hyperref suppresses its - \verb|\hyperpage| command. With logical markup this situation - can easily be solved: -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{makeidx} - \makeindex - \usepackage[hyperindex]{hyperref} - \newcommand*{\main}[1]{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}} - ... - \index{Some example|main} -\end{verbatim} - \item Scientic Word/Scientific WorkPlace users can use - package robustindex with hyperindex=false. - \item Other encap characters can be set by option \xoption{encap}. - Example for use of ``?'': -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage[encap=?]{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - \item Another possibility is the insertion of \verb|\hyperpage| by - a style file for makeindex. For this case, hyperref's - insertion will be disabled by \verb"hyperindex=false". - \verb|\hyperpage| will be defined regardless of setting of hyperindex. -\begin{verbatim} -%%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%% -delim_0 ", \\hyperpage{" -delim_1 ", \\hyperpage{" -delim_2 ", \\hyperpage{" -delim_n "}, \\hyperpage{" -delim_t "}" -encap_prefix "}\\" -encap_infix "{\\hyperpage{" -encap_suffix "}" -%%% cut %%% hyperindex.ist %%% cut %%% -\end{verbatim} -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{Warning \texttt{"bookmark level for unknown defaults to 0"}} - - Getting rid of it: -\begin{verbatim} -\makeatletter -\providecommand*{\toclevel@}{0} -\makeatother -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Link anchors in figures} - - The caption command increments the counter and here is the - place where hyperref set the corresponding anchor. Unhappily - the caption is set below the figure, so the figure is not - visible if a link jumps to a figure. - In this case, try package \xpackage{hypcap} that implements - a method to circumvent the problem. - - -\subsection{Additional unicode characters in bookmarks and pdf information entries:} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[pdftex]{article} -\usepackage[unicode]{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - -Support for additional unicode characters: - - Example: \verb|\.{a}| and \verb|\d{a}| - - 1. Get a list with unicode data, eg: - - http://www.unicode.org/Public/UNIDATA/UnicodeData.txt - - 2. Identify the characters (\verb|\.{a}|, \verb|\d{a}|): -\begin{verbatim} - 0227;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT ABOVE;... - 1EA1;LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DOT BELOW;... -\end{verbatim} - - 3. Calculate the octal code: - - The first characters of the line in the file are - hex values, convert each byte and prepend them - with a backslash. (This will go into the PDF file.) - -\begin{verbatim} - 0227 -> \002\047 - 1EA1 -> \036\241 -\end{verbatim} - - 4. Transform into a form understood by hyperref: - - Hyperref must know where the first byte starts, - this is marked by \verb"9" (8 and 9 cannot occur in - octal numbers): - -\begin{verbatim} - \002\047 -> \9002\047 - \036\241 -> \9036\241 -\end{verbatim} - - Optional: \verb"8" is used for abbreviations: - -\begin{verbatim} - \900 = \80, \901 = \81, \902 = \82, ... - - \9002\047 -> \82\047 -\end{verbatim} - - 5. Declare the character with LaTeX: - -\begin{verbatim} -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\.}{PU}{a}{\82\047} -\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\d}{PU}{a}{\9036\241} - -\begin{document} -\section{\={a}, \d{a}, \'{a}, \.{a}} -\end{document} - \end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Footnotes} - - The footnote support is rather limited. It is beyond the scope - to use \verb|\footnotemark| and \verb|\footnotetext| out of order or reusing - \verb|\footnotemark|. Here you can either disable hyperref's footnote - support by \verb"hyperfootnotes=false" or fiddle with internal macros, - nasty examples: - -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass{article} -\usepackage{hyperref} -\begin{document} -Hello% -\footnote{The first footnote} -World% -\addtocounter{footnote}{-1}% -\addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% -\footnotemark. -\end{document} - - or - -\documentclass{article} - -\usepackage{hyperref} - -\begin{document} - -\makeatletter - -A% - \footnotemark - \let\saved@Href@A\Hy@footnote@currentHref - % remember link name -B% - \footnotemark - \let\saved@Href@B\Hy@footnote@currentHref -b% - \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}% - \addtocounter{Hfootnote}{-1}% generate the same anchor - \footnotemark -C% - \footnotemark - \let\saved@Href@C\Hy@footnote@currentHref - - \addtocounter{footnote}{-2}% - \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@A -\footnotetext{AAAA}% - \addtocounter{footnote}{1}% - \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@B -\footnotetext{BBBBB}% - \addtocounter{footnote}{1}% - \let\Hy@footnote@currentHref\saved@Href@C -\footnotetext{CCCC}% - -\end{document} -\end{verbatim} - -\subsection{Subordinate counters} - - Some counters do not have unique values and require the value - of other counters to be unique. For example, sections or figures - might be numbered within chapters or \verb|\newtheorem| is used with - an optional counter argument. Internally LaTeX uses \verb|\@addtoreset| - to reset a counter in dependency to another counter. Package - hyperref hooks into \verb|\@addtoreset| to catch this situation. - Also \verb|\numberwithin| of package amsmath is caught by hyperref. - - - - However, if the definition of subordinate counters take place - before hyperref is loaded, the old meaning of \verb|\@addtoreset| is - called without hyperref's additions. Then the companion counter - macro \verb|\theH| can be redefined accordingly. Or move the - definition of subordinate counters after hyperref is loaded. - - Example for \verb|\newtheorem|, problematic case: -\begin{verbatim} - \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section] - \usepackage{hyperref} -\end{verbatim} - Solution a) -\begin{verbatim} - \usepackage{hyperref} - \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section} -\end{verbatim} - Solution b) -\begin{verbatim} - \newtheorem{corA}{CorollaryA}[section] - \usepackage{hyperref} - \newcommand*{\theHcorA}{\theHsection.\number\value{corA}} -\end{verbatim} - -\section{History and acknowledgments} - -The original authors of \textsf{hyperbasics.tex} and -\textsf{hypertex.sty}, from which this package descends, are Tanmoy -Bhattacharya and Thorsten Ohl. Package \xpackage{hyperref} -started as a simple port of their work to \hologo{LaTeXe} standards, but -eventually I rewrote nearly everything, because I didn't understand a -lot of the original, and was only interested in getting it to work with -\hologo{LaTeX}. I would like to thank Arthur Smith, Tanmoy Bhattacharya, Mark -Doyle, Paul Ginsparg, David Carlisle, T.\ V.\ Raman and Leslie Lamport -for comments, requests, thoughts and code to get the package into its -first useable state. Various other people are mentioned at the point in -the source where I had to change the code in later versions because of -problems they found. - -Tanmoy found a great many of the bugs, and (even better) often provided -fixes, which has made the package more robust. The days spent on -Rev\TeX\ are entirely due to him! The investigations of Bill Moss -into the later versions including -native PDF support uncovered a good many bugs, and his testing is -appreciated. Hans Hagen provided a lot of -insight into PDF. - -Berthold Horn provided help, encouragement and sponsorship for the -\textsf{dvipsone} and \textsf{dviwindo} drivers. Sergey Lesenko provided -the changes needed for \textsf{dvipdf}, and \Hanh{} supplied all the -information needed for \textsf{pdftex}. Patrick Daly kindly updated his -\xpackage{natbib} package to allow easy integration with -\xpackage{hyperref}. Michael Mehlich's \xpackage{hyper} package (developed -in parallel with \textsf{hyperref}) showed me solutions for some -problems. Hopefully the two packages will combine one day. - -The forms creation section owes a great deal to: T.\ V.\ Raman, for -encouragement, support and ideas; Thomas Merz, whose book \emph{Web -Publishing with Acrobat/PDF} provided crucial insights; D.\ P.\ Story, -whose detailed article about pdfmarks and forms solved many practical -problems; and Hans Hagen, who explained how to do it in \textsf{pdftex}. - -Steve Peter recreated the manual source in July 2003 after it had been -lost. - -Especial extra thanks to David Carlisle for the \xpackage{backref} module, -the ps2pdf and dviwindo support, frequent general rewrites of my bad -code, and for working on changes to the \xpackage{xr} package to suit -\xpackage{hyperref}. - -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \let\chapter=\section - % subsections goes into bookmarks but not toc - \hypersetup{bookmarksopenlevel=1} - \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}} - % The \section command acts as \subsection. - % Additionally the title is converted to lowercase except - % for the first letter. - \def\section{% - \let\section\lc@subsection - \lc@subsection - } - \def\lc@subsection{% - \@ifstar{\def\mystar{*}\lc@sec}% - {\let\mystar\@empty\lc@sec}% - } - \def\lc@sec#1{% - \lc@@sec#1\@nil - } - \def\lc@@sec#1#2\@nil{% - \begingroup - \def\a{#1}% - \lowercase{% - \edef\x{\endgroup - \noexpand\subsection\mystar{\a#2}% - }% - }% - \x - } - \include{fdl} -\endgroup - -\end{document} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.dtx index f6ea1c856a..ec02e2eceb 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/nameref.dtx @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ %% 2000 Sebastian Rahtz, Heiko Oberdiek %% 2001-2012 Heiko Oberdiek %% 2016-2019 Oberdiek Package Suport Group -%% 2019-2020 The LaTeX3 Project +%% 2019-2021 The LaTeX3 Project %% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues %% %% This file is part of the `Hyperref Bundle'. @@ -33,11 +33,12 @@ %\ProvidesFile{nameref.drv} % \fi % \ProvidesFile{nameref.dtx} - [2019/09/16 v2.46 Cross-referencing by name of section]% + [2021-04-02 v2.47 Cross-referencing by name of section]% % % % \iffalse %<*driver> +\PassOptionsToPackage{numbered}{hypdoc} \documentclass{ltxdoc} \usepackage[numbered]{hypdoc} \usepackage{bmhydoc} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty index d73ba4013f..369f0bea06 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/xr-hyper.sty @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ %% xr-hyper package (beta release) -%% Copyright (C) 1993-2020 David Carlisle +%% Copyright (C) 1993-2021 David Carlisle %% This is a modified version of the xr package from the Standard LaTeX %% tools distribution. It has some internal changes to cooperate with @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ %% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{xr-hyper} - [2020-05-15 v7.00e eXternal References (DPC)] + [2021-02-04 v7.00g eXternal References (DPC)] \def\externaldocument{\@testopt\XR@cite{}} \let\externalcitedocument\externaldocument diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.dtx index 587b47cb53..eb64a63b55 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.dtx @@ -27,12 +27,12 @@ %<*dtx> \makeatletter % -\def\AM@fileversion{v0.5r} +\def\AM@fileversion{v0.5s} \def\AM@Git@Date@process$#1: #2 #3${\AM@Git@Date@process@i#2\END} \def\AM@Git@Date@process@i#1-#2-#3\END{\def\AM@Git@Date{#1/#2/#3}} \def\AM@Git@SHA@process$#1: #2${\def\AM@Git@SHA{#2}} -\AM@Git@Date@process$Date: 2021-01-09 21:30:43 +0100 $ -\AM@Git@SHA@process$SHA-1: 835dfb0d7e5502acd5c811aa9c00b2e44eae9cbd $ +\AM@Git@Date@process$Date: 2021-02-05 15:10:20 +0100 $ +\AM@Git@SHA@process$SHA-1: 96070951ed4fc4b97d5a7a910640f7dbd57cc928 $ % % % @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ % % \GetFileInfo{pdfpages.dtx} % -% \CheckSum{5059} +% \CheckSum{5060} % % \CharacterTable % {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ % simple |\includegraphics{doc.pdf}| normally produces `|Overfull \hbox|' % and `|Overfull \vbox|' warnings, because the size of the inserted pages % does not match the print space. -% +% % The |pdfpages| package makes it easy to insert pages of external \PDF\ % documents without worrying about the print space. Here are some % features of the |pdfpages| package: Several logical pages can be @@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ % However, there's a glimmer of hope. Some links may be extracted and later % reinserted by a package called \emph{pax} which can be downloaded from % CTAN \cite{pax}. Have a look at it! -% -% +% +% % \section{Usage} % \subsection{Package Options} % @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ % |\usepackage[|\meta{options}|]{pdfpages}| % % \begin{quote} -% \meta{option} -- +% \meta{option} -- % \begin{minipage}[t]{.8\linewidth} % \setlength\leftmargini{3.5em} % \begin{description} @@ -231,14 +231,14 @@ % % % \subsection{Commands} -% +% % \DescribeMacro{\includepdf} % Inserts pages of an external \PDF\ document. -% +% % \medskip\noindent % \begin{minipage}{\linewidth} % |\includepdf[|\meta{key=val}|]{|\meta{filename}|}| -% +% % \begin{quote} % \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,--~}>{\raggedright}p{.8\linewidth}} % \meta{key=val} & A comma separated list of options @@ -250,11 +250,11 @@ % \end{quote} % \end{minipage}\bigskip % -% +% % \noindent % The following list describes all possible options of % |\includepdf|. All options are using the \meta{key=value} syntax. -% +% % \newcommand*{\df}[1]{(Default: \mbox{|#1|})} % % \setlength{\leftmargini}{\parindent} @@ -266,8 +266,8 @@ % \begin{description} % \makeatletter\@beginparpenalty=10000\makeatother % \item[pages] Selects pages to insert. The argument is a comma -% separated list, containing page numbers -% (|pages={3,5,6,8}|), ranges of page numbers +% separated list, containing page numbers +% (|pages={3,5,6,8}|), ranges of page numbers % (|pages={4-9}|) or any combination. % To insert empty pages use |{}|. % \par @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ % \meta{m}|-|\meta{n}. This selects all pages from % \meta{m} to \meta{n}. Omitting \meta{m} defaults % to the first page; omitting \meta{n} defaults to -% the last page of the document. Another way to +% the last page of the document. Another way to % select the last page of the document, is to use the % keyword |last|. (This is only permitted in a % page range.) @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ % all pages in reverse order. % \par\df{pages=1} % \item[nup] Puts multiple logical pages onto each sheet -% of paper. The syntax of this option is: +% of paper. The syntax of this option is: % |nup=|\meta{xnup}|x|\meta{ynup}. Where % \meta{xnup} and \meta{ynup} specify the number of % logical pages in horizontal and vertical direction, @@ -321,16 +321,16 @@ % \emph{top} margin, respectively, whereas in `twoside' % documents positive values shift the pages to the % \emph{outer} and to the \emph{top} margin, -% respectively. See Chapter~\ref{sec:layout} and +% respectively. See Chapter~\ref{sec:layout} and % Figure~\ref{fig:layout}. \df{offset=0 0} % \item[frame] Puts a frame around each logical page. The frame is % made of lines of thickness |\fboxrule|. Either `true' % or `false' (or no value, which is equivalent to `true'). % \df{frame=false} -% \item[column] Pdfpages normally uses `row-major' layout, where +% \item[column] Pdfpages normally uses `row-major' layout, where % successive pages are placed in rows along the paper. % The |column| option changes the output into a -% `column-major' layout, where successive pages are +% `column-major' layout, where successive pages are % arranged in columns down the paper. % Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which % is equivalent to `true'). \df{column=false} @@ -374,13 +374,13 @@ % \item[pagecommand] Declares \LaTeX\ commands, which are executed % on each sheet of paper. % \df{pagecommand=\{\bslash thispagestyle\{empty\}\}} -% \item[turn] By default pages in landscape format are displayed +% \item[turn] By default pages in landscape format are displayed % in landscape orientation (if the \PDF\ viewer supports % this). With \texttt{turn=false} this can be prohibited. % Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which % is equivalent to `true'). \df{turn=true} % \item[noautoscale] By default pages are scaled automatically. -% This can be suppressed with the +% This can be suppressed with the % \texttt{noautoscale} option. % In combination with the \texttt{scale} option % (from graphicx) the user has full control over @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ % the cutting edge is always on the inner side. % Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which is % equivalent to `true'). \df{doublepagestwist=false} -% \item[doublepagestwistodd] Turns the pages such, that the +% \item[doublepagestwistodd] Turns the pages such, that the % cutting edge is always on the outer side. % Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which is % equivalent to `true'). \df{doublepagestwistodd=false} @@ -489,14 +489,14 @@ % \begin{description} % \makeatletter\@beginparpenalty=10000\makeatother % \item[link] Inserted pages become a target -% of a hyperlink. The name of the link is +% of a hyperlink. The name of the link is % `\texttt{\meta{filename}.\meta{page number}}'. -% The filename extension of \meta{filename} +% The filename extension of \meta{filename} % \emph{must not} be stripped. % Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which % is equivalent to `true'). % \df{link=false} -% \item[linkname] Changes the default linkname created by the option +% \item[linkname] Changes the default linkname created by the option % \texttt{link}. Instead of \meta{filename} the % value of this option is used. E.g.~\texttt{ % linkname=mylink} produces the linknames @@ -504,10 +504,10 @@ % \item[thread] Combines inserted pages to an article thread. % Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which % is equivalent to `true'). \df{thread=false} -% \item[threadname] Several threads are distinguished by their +% \item[threadname] Several threads are distinguished by their % threadnames. By default the threadname is equal % to the filename (plus filename extension), but it -% can be changed with this option. This is useful if +% can be changed with this option. This is useful if % the same file is inserted twice or more times and % should not be combined to one single thread. % Or the other way round if pages from different @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ %^^A \meta{right} \meta{top}}, %^^A \texttt{xyz \meta{left} \meta{top} \meta{zoom}}, % and \texttt{Region}. -% +% % See \cite{PDFRef} for a details description of these % \PDF\ destinations. The |region| destination was % added by pdfpages and is not a real \PDF\ @@ -591,9 +591,9 @@ % \item[\meta{section}:] \LaTeX\ sectioning name % -- e.g., section, subsection, \ldots % \item[\meta{level}:] Number, denoting depth of -% section -- e.g., 1 for section level, 2 for +% section -- e.g., 1 for section level, 2 for % subsection level, \ldots -% \item[\meta{heading}:] Title inserted in the +% \item[\meta{heading}:] Title inserted in the % table of contents. % \item[\meta{label}:] Name of the label. This label % can be referred to with |\ref| and |\pageref|. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ % The |addtotoc| option % accepts multiple sets of the above mentioned five % arguments, all separated by commas. The sets must -% be sorted such that the \meta{page number}s are in +% be sorted such that the \meta{page number}s are in % ascending order. (Strictly speaking they must have % the same order as the page numbers specified by % the |pages| option.) @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ % % Like \texttt{addtotoc}, \texttt{addtolist} accepts % multiple sets of the above mentioned four arguments, -% all separated by commas. The proper recursive +% all separated by commas. The proper recursive % definition is: % % \texttt{addtolist=}\{\meta{lof-list}\} @@ -733,11 +733,11 @@ % |\externaldocument|. % \df{xr-prefix=\{\}} % -% +% % \end{description} % % \end{itemize} -% +% % % \begin{figure} % \centering @@ -821,11 +821,11 @@ % % % \noindent -% Internally the command |\includepdf| -% makes use of the |\includegraphics| command from the |graphicx| +% Internally the command |\includepdf| +% makes use of the |\includegraphics| command from the |graphicx| % (actually |graphics|) package. Hence it is possible to use % all the options of |\includegraphics|, too. -% Options which are not interpreted by |\includepdf| +% Options which are not interpreted by |\includepdf| % are passed directly to |\includegraphics|. % % Especially the `trim' and `clip' options of |\includegraphics| @@ -834,7 +834,7 @@ % Just use the `trim' and `clip' options as if they were options % of |\includepdf|. They will be passed to |\includegraphics| % internally. -% +% % % \begin{samepage} % \bigskip\noindent @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ % \meta{file-page-list} & \meta{filename}[\textbf{,}^^A % \meta{page spec}]^^A % [\textbf{,}\meta{file-page-list}]\\ -% A comma separated list of filenames and +% A comma separated list of filenames and % optional \meta{page spec} specifiers. % A \meta{page spec} can be everything the % option |pages| accepts. @@ -861,12 +861,12 @@ % \end{quote} % \end{samepage} % -% The |\includepdfmerge| command uses the same options as +% The |\includepdfmerge| command uses the same options as % |\includepdf| with -% one exception. The option |pages| has no meaning for +% one exception. The option |pages| has no meaning for % |\includepdfmerge|. Instead the \meta{page spec} specifier % is used to specify which pages should be inserted. -% The \meta{page spec} specifier accepts the same values as +% The \meta{page spec} specifier accepts the same values as % the |pages| option. If no \meta{page spec} specifier is given, % only the first page will be inserted. % @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ % So it would be more pleasant to insert the title page of % each document than the first page. This can be done with % the \meta{page spec} specifier. The following example inserts -% the second page of \textit{doc1.pdf} and the third page of +% the second page of \textit{doc1.pdf} and the third page of % \textit{doc2.pdf} and \textit{doc3.pdf}: % % \begin{quote} @@ -933,19 +933,19 @@ % entries of a thread information dictionary in low-level \PDF\ % commands. % (See \cite{PDFRef} for more information.) -% +% % \smallskip % |\renewcommand*{\threadinfodict}|\\\hspace*{\parindent} % | {/Title (My first thread) /Author (That's me!)}| -% -% +% +% % % \subsection{The Layout}\label{sec:layout} -% +% % The default layout can be changed by the options |delta| % and |offset|. Figure~\ref{fig:layout} shows the % meaning of these options. -% +% % The inserted logical pages are being centered on the % sheet of paper by default. To displace them use the |offset| % option, which argument should be two dimensions. E.g.~ @@ -956,17 +956,17 @@ % the \emph{right} and to the \emph{top} margin, respectively, % whereas in `twoside' documents positive values shift the pages % to the \emph{outer} and to the \emph{top} margin, respectively. -% +% % By default logical pages are being arranged side by side. % To put some space between them, use the |delta| option, % whose argument should be two dimensions. % Figure~\ref{fig:layout} shows the meaning of |delta|. -% +% % The layout options |delta| and |offset| % \textit{always} refer to a sheet of paper in portrait -% orientation. No matter whether you have set the +% orientation. No matter whether you have set the % |landscape| option to |true|, or not. -% +% % If you are confused about horizontal\,(|x|) % and vertical\,(|y|) directions, just set the option % |turn=false|. Now your \PDF\ viewer shows the pages in @@ -1001,8 +1001,8 @@ % \begin{description} % \item[pagecolor] % When setting the background color with |\pagecolor| -% (a command from \textit{color.sty}), the first -% |\pagecolor| \emph{must} precede |\usepackage{pdfpages}|. +% (a command from \textit{color.sty}), the first +% |\pagecolor| \emph{must} precede |\usepackage{pdfpages}|. % \begin{quote} % |\usepackage{color}|\\ % |\pagecolor{white}|\\ @@ -1057,13 +1057,13 @@ % % \StopEventually{ % \begin{thebibliography}{9} -% +% % \bibitem{pdftex} % H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh, % Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen, % \textit{The \pdfTeX\ user manual}, % \url{http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex} -% +% % \bibitem{PDFRef} % \textit{PDF Reference}, Adobe Systems Incorporated,\\ % \url{http://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html} @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ % Heiko Oberdiek, % \textit{pax: Extract and reinsert PDF annotations with pdfTeX} % \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/pax} -% +% % \end{thebibliography} % } % @@ -1117,7 +1117,7 @@ \DeclareOption{null}{\def\AM@driver{null}} % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions +\ProcessOptions % \end{macrocode} % \subsection{Detection of TeX-Engine} % @@ -1156,6 +1156,7 @@ \newif\ifAM@DVIoutput\AM@DVIoutputfalse \newdimen\AM@pagewidth \newdimen\AM@pageheight +\newdimen\AM@fboxrule \input{pp\AM@driver.def} \ifx\AM@endinput\relax\expandafter\endinput\fi \ifAM@pkg@survey @@ -1370,7 +1371,7 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % \macro{\includepdf} -% This command inserts any pages of an external +% This command inserts any pages of an external % \PDF\ document. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\includepdf}[2][]{% @@ -1532,7 +1533,7 @@ {\def\AM@xnup{\@ne}\def\AM@ynup{\@ne}% \def\AM@xnupminusi{\z@}\def\AM@ynupminusi{\z@}}{}% \@ifundefined{AM@deltax} - {\def\AM@deltax{-\fboxrule}\def\AM@deltay{-\fboxrule}}{}% + {\def\AM@deltax{-\AM@fboxrule}\def\AM@deltay{-\AM@fboxrule}}{}% \@ifundefined{AM@xoffset} {\def\AM@xoffset{\z@}\def\AM@yoffset{\z@}}{}% \def\AM@xpos{\z@}\def\AM@ypos{\z@}% @@ -1581,12 +1582,13 @@ \fi}{}% % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} - \ifthenelse{\boolean{AM@frame}} - {\global\let\AM@fbox\fbox} + \ifthenelse{\boolean{AM@frame}}% + {\global\let\AM@fbox\fbox + \setlength\AM@fboxrule{\fboxrule}}% {\global\let\AM@fbox\relax - \setlength{\fboxrule}{\z@}}% - \ifthenelse{\boolean{AM@reflect}} - {\global\let\AM@reflectbox\reflectbox} + \setlength\AM@fboxrule{\z@}}% + \ifthenelse{\boolean{AM@reflect}}% + {\global\let\AM@reflectbox\reflectbox}% {\global\let\AM@reflectbox\relax}% \setbox\AM@pagebox\null % \end{macrocode} @@ -1600,9 +1602,6 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \AM@firstpagetrue % \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{\z@}% -% \end{macrocode} % Determine scaling factor: % The logical pages are scaled such, that they match on % one sheet of paper. @@ -1643,7 +1642,7 @@ % Calculate required scaling in horizontal direction. % \begin{macrocode} \def\AM@xscale{% - (\AM@pagewidth - \tw@\fboxrule*\AM@xnup + (\AM@pagewidth - \tw@\AM@fboxrule*\AM@xnup - \AM@deltax * \AM@xnupminusi) / (\AM@xnup * \real{\strip@pt\wd\@tempboxa}) }% @@ -1654,7 +1653,7 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \setlength{\@tempdimb}{\ht\@tempboxa + \dp\@tempboxa}% \def\AM@yscale{ - (\AM@pageheight - \tw@\fboxrule*\AM@ynup + (\AM@pageheight - \tw@\AM@fboxrule*\AM@ynup - \AM@deltay *\AM@ynupminusi) / (\AM@ynup * \real{\strip@pt\@tempdimb}) }% @@ -1674,7 +1673,7 @@ \fi % \end{macrocode} % Determine horizontal and vertical margins. -% |\AM@xoffset| and |\AM@yoffset| are \textit{not} +% |\AM@xoffset| and |\AM@yoffset| are \textit{not} % taken into account for this calculation. % \begin{macrocode} \let\AM@filelist@save\@filelist @@ -1699,11 +1698,11 @@ \edef\AM@templateheight{\the\@tempdima}% \setlength{\@tempdimb}{\ht\@tempboxa + \dp\@tempboxa}% \def\AM@xmargin{% - (\AM@pagewidth - (\wd\@tempboxa+\tw@\fboxrule)*\AM@xnup + (\AM@pagewidth - (\wd\@tempboxa+\tw@\AM@fboxrule)*\AM@xnup - \AM@deltax * \AM@xnupminusi) * \real{.5}% }% \def\AM@ymargin{% - (\AM@pageheight - (\@tempdimb+\tw@\fboxrule)*\AM@ynup + (\AM@pageheight - (\@tempdimb+\tw@\AM@fboxrule)*\AM@ynup - \AM@deltay * \AM@ynupminusi) * \real{.5}% }% \setlength{\@tempdima}{\AM@xmargin}% @@ -1815,7 +1814,7 @@ % Smaller pages are \emph{not} scaled up, just their local offset % is adjusted. % \begin{macrocode} - \setlength{\@tempdima}{(\AM@templatewidth - \AM@localwd) + \setlength{\@tempdima}{(\AM@templatewidth - \AM@localwd) * \real{.5}}% \edef\AM@localxoff{\the\@tempdima}% \setlength{\@tempdima}{(\AM@templateheight - \AM@localht) @@ -1904,25 +1903,25 @@ \ifthenelse{\boolean{AM@landscape}} {\def\AM@xpos{% \AM@xmargin \AM@add\AM@xoffset + \AM@localxoff + - (\AM@templatewidth + \AM@deltax + \tw@\fboxrule) * + (\AM@templatewidth + \AM@deltax + \tw@\AM@fboxrule) * (\AM@ynupi - 1) }% \def\AM@ypos{% \AM@texcoord + \AM@ymargin + \AM@yoffset + \AM@localyoff + - (\AM@templateheight + \AM@deltay + \tw@\fboxrule) * + (\AM@templateheight + \AM@deltay + \tw@\AM@fboxrule) * (\AM@xnupi - 1) }% } {\def\AM@xpos{% \AM@xmargin \AM@add\AM@xoffset + \AM@localxoff + - (\AM@templatewidth + \AM@deltax + \tw@\fboxrule) * + (\AM@templatewidth + \AM@deltax + \tw@\AM@fboxrule) * (\AM@xnupi - 1) }% \def\AM@ypos{% \AM@texcoord + \AM@ymargin + \AM@yoffset + \AM@localyoff + - (\AM@templateheight + \AM@deltay + \tw@\fboxrule) * + (\AM@templateheight + \AM@deltay + \tw@\AM@fboxrule) * (\AM@ynup-\AM@ynupi) }% }% @@ -1930,7 +1929,6 @@ \edef\AM@xpos{\strip@pt\@tempdima}% \setlength{\@tempdima}{\AM@ypos}% \edef\AM@ypos{\strip@pt\@tempdima}% - \setlength{\fboxsep}{\z@}% % \end{macrocode} % Calculate |fitr| coordinates, if |linkfit=region|. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1964,6 +1962,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macrocode} \global\pdfpages@includegraphics@status\@ne + \fboxsep=\z@ \AM@hyper@begin@ii\noexpand\AM@fbox{% \noexpand\AM@ARBug@hook \noexpand\AM@reflectbox{% @@ -2226,7 +2225,7 @@ \fi \advance\@tempcntb\AM@inc \whiledo{\@tempcnta\AM@rel\@tempcntb}{% - \AM@checkpagenumber{\the\@tempcnta}% + \AM@checkpagenumber{\the\@tempcnta}% \AM@append{\the\@tempcnta}% \advance\@tempcnta\AM@inc }% @@ -2306,8 +2305,8 @@ % \macro{\AM@getfirst} % \macro{\AM@getfirsti} % \macro{\AM@getfirstii} -% Parameter |#1| must be a macro containing a csv-list. -% |\AM@getfirst| removes the first item of this list +% Parameter |#1| must be a macro containing a csv-list. +% |\AM@getfirst| removes the first item of this list % \textit{and} stores it in |\toks@|. % \begin{macrocode} \newif\ifAM@endoflist\AM@endoflistfalse @@ -2711,7 +2710,7 @@ % \macro{\AM@hyper@begin@i} % \macro{\AM@hyper@begin@ii} % \macro{\AM@hyper@end} -% Add hypertext operations (targets, links and threads) to +% Add hypertext operations (targets, links and threads) to % the inserted pages. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\AM@hyper@begin@i}{% @@ -2779,7 +2778,7 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % \macro{\AM@filluppagelist} -% The number of items in |\AM@pagelist| and +% The number of items in |\AM@pagelist| and % |\AM@doclist| should be a multiple of % $|\AM@xnup|\nobreak\times\nobreak|\AM@ynup|$. % If not, fill up the lists with empty items. @@ -2876,7 +2875,7 @@ }% \@tempcnta=\z@ \@tempcntb=\AM@signature\relax - \whiledo{\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb}{% + \whiledo{\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb}{% \ifAM@landscape \ifAM@signaturestar \AM@first\AM@last\AM@first\AM@last @@ -2931,7 +2930,7 @@ \def\AM@gobble##1\END,{}% \ifx\\#1\\% \expandafter\AM@setphantompage - \else + \else \def\AM@phantompage{#1}% \expandafter\AM@gobble \fi @@ -2941,21 +2940,21 @@ \newcommand{\AM@setphantomdoc}{} \def\AM@setphantomdoc#1,#2\END{\edef\AM@phantomdoc{#1}} % \end{macrocode} -% \macro{\AM@addtotoc} +% \macro{\AM@addtotoc} % \macro{\AM@parse@toclist} % \macro{\AM@parse@toclisti} % \macro{\AM@rm@from@toclist} % \macro{\AM@rm@from@toclisti} % These macros add entries to the table of contents (toc). -% +% % |\AM@parse@addtotoc| reads the next entries from the list % |\AM@toclist| and prepares some macros (|\AM@toc@page|, % |\AM@toc@section|, etc.), which are used by |\AM@addtotoc|. -% +% % The list |\AM@toclist| is a comma separated list and must % contain a multiple of five entries, which there are: % \meta{page number}, \meta{section}, \meta{level}, -% \meta{heading} and \meta{label}. +% \meta{heading} and \meta{label}. % \meta{section} is e.g., `chapter', `section', `subsection', etc. % and \meta{level} is a number, denoting depth of section e.g., % chapter=0, section=1, etc. @@ -3072,7 +3071,7 @@ \def\AM@lof@heading{\ignorespaces #3}% \edef\AM@lof@label{\AM@trim@space{#4}}% \AM@checkinteger{\AM@lof@page}% - \ifAM@integer\else + \ifAM@integer\else \PackageError{pdfpages} {Missing number.\MessageBreak Page number in option `addtolist' is not a number} @@ -3424,7 +3423,7 @@ % % \end{macrocode} -% Check if the graphics package was loaded with an +% Check if the graphics package was loaded with an % incompatible driver option (e.g. dvips). % \begin{macrocode} %<*pppdftexdef> @@ -3438,7 +3437,7 @@ \aftergroup\endinput}{} \endgroup % \end{macrocode} -% Check for \texttt{pdftex.def} version \texttt{2000/05/12 v0.02u} +% Check for \texttt{pdftex.def} version \texttt{2000/05/12 v0.02u} % or higher: % \begin{list}{$\ast$}{\versionlist} % \makeatletter\@beginparpenalty=10000\makeatother @@ -3479,12 +3478,12 @@ % is used repeatedly on the same file. Heiko is aware of this and will provide % a solution in pdftex.def. Until then we will use the original graphicx's filename % from |\Gread@@pdftex|. -% +% % \def\AM@getpagecount{% % \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\includegraphics{\AM@currentdocname}}% % \edef\AM@pagecount{\the\AM@lastsavedimageresourcepages}% % } -% +% % \begin{macrocode} %<*(pppdftexdef,ppluatexdef)> \let\AM@Gread@@pdftex\Gread@@pdftex @@ -3654,7 +3653,7 @@ % % \subsubsection{\VTeX\ driver} % -% Check if the graphics package was loaded with an +% Check if the graphics package was loaded with an % incompatible driver option (e.g. dvips). % \begin{macrocode} \begingroup @@ -3781,7 +3780,7 @@ % % \subsubsection{\XeTeX\ driver} % -% Check if the graphics package was loaded with an +% Check if the graphics package was loaded with an % incompatible driver option (e.g. dvips). % \begin{macrocode} \begingroup @@ -4029,7 +4028,7 @@ \def\AM@getpagecount{% \ifx\AM@pagecount\AM@undefined \AM@notsupported{Page selections} - \def\AM@pagecount{1}% + \def\AM@pagecount{1}% \gdef\AM@getpagecount{% \def\AM@pagecount{1}% }% @@ -4071,12 +4070,12 @@ % Link to original document. % \begin{macrocode} \def\AM@linktodoc@special@begin{Links} -\let\AM@linktodoc@special@end\relax +\let\AM@linktodoc@special@end\relax % \end{macrocode} % Survey. % \begin{macrocode} \def\AM@survey@special@begin{\AM@notsupported{Option survey}} -\let\AM@survey@special@end\relax +\let\AM@survey@special@end\relax % \end{macrocode} % Thread. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -4109,7 +4108,7 @@ \fi }}{} % \end{macrocode} -% +% % \iffalse % % @@ -4297,8 +4296,8 @@ % \end{macrocode} % Survey. % \begin{macrocode} -\let\AM@survey@special@begin\relax -\let\AM@survey@special@end\relax +\let\AM@survey@special@begin\relax +\let\AM@survey@special@end\relax % \end{macrocode} % Thread. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -4809,8 +4808,21 @@ % \item Option |openrighteach| added. % \end{itemize} % +% \subsection*{2021/01/09 v0.5r} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item |\pdfpages@includegraphics@status| added. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \subsection*{2021/02/05 v0.5s} +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Pdfpages redefined |\fboxsep| and |\fboxrule| inside +% |\includepdf|. Thereby causing unexpected results if |\fbox| was used +% inside option |picturecommand|. This bug is fixed. Now |\fboxsep| and +% |\fboxrule| equal the values which were active just before +% calling |\includepdf|. +% \end{itemize} % \Finale -% +% % \iffalse %<*example1> \documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{article} @@ -4866,10 +4878,10 @@ landscape orientation, you use a PDF viewer that does not support this option.) \begin{example} -\includepdf[nup=1x2, landscape, +\includepdf[nup=1x2, landscape, pages=4-7, turn=false]{dummy.pdf} \end{example} -\includepdf[nup=1x2, landscape, +\includepdf[nup=1x2, landscape, pages=4-7, turn=false]{dummy.pdf} \begin{example} @@ -4898,7 +4910,7 @@ option \texttt{column}. \noindent Sometimes it might be useful to put an empty page -at the beginning. +at the beginning. \begin{example} \includepdf[nup=2x2, pages={{},5-7}]{dummy.pdf} \end{example} @@ -4908,7 +4920,7 @@ at the beginning. \section{Changing Layout} To put some space between the logical pages, use the option -\texttt{delta}. +\texttt{delta}. Any options of \verb|\includegraphics| are allowed in \verb|\includepdf| as well. See the \texttt{scale} @@ -4939,7 +4951,7 @@ document use the \texttt{trim} and \texttt{clip} options of the \texttt{graphicx} package. \begin{example} -\includepdf[nup=2x2, pages=1-4, +\includepdf[nup=2x2, pages=1-4, trim=0 40mm 0 40mm, clip, pagecommand={}]{dummy.pdf} \end{example} @@ -4948,12 +4960,12 @@ options of the \texttt{graphicx} package. \noindent The option \verb|pagecommand={\thispagestyle{empty}}| is set by default. If you don't want the page style -to be set to empty, you can remove this default +to be set to empty, you can remove this default setting by using the \texttt{pagecommand} option as follows: \verb|pagecommand={}|. -\includepdf[nup=2x2, pages=1-4, +\includepdf[nup=2x2, pages=1-4, trim=0 40mm 0 40mm, clip, pagecommand={}]{dummy.pdf} @@ -5046,7 +5058,7 @@ and the \hyperlink{dummy.pdf.2}{second page}. \includepdf[pages=1-2, link]{dummy.pdf} -Inserting the same page twice would result in two +Inserting the same page twice would result in two identical link names. To prevent this use the option \texttt{linkname} to specify another name for the links. @@ -5130,11 +5142,11 @@ The next pages were inserted using the following command: \end{verbatim} \noindent -See Chapter \ref{cha:main} (\nameref{cha:main}) on page +See Chapter \ref{cha:main} (\nameref{cha:main}) on page \pageref{cha:main}.\par\noindent -See Section \ref{sec:first} (\nameref{sec:first}) on page +See Section \ref{sec:first} (\nameref{sec:first}) on page \pageref{sec:first}.\par\noindent -See Section \ref{sec:second} (\nameref{sec:second}) on page +See Section \ref{sec:second} (\nameref{sec:second}) on page \pageref{sec:second}. \includepdf[pages=1-6, diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.pdf index 26938f7a4c..a1227b99fc 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/pdfpages.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/README.md index 5a81783008..6449aa4218 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/README.md +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/README.md @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Copyright (C) Marei Peischl , 2018–2021 - tuda-ci 2021/01/12 v3.09 + tuda-ci 2021/02/05 v3.10 *************************************************************************** @@ -222,3 +222,7 @@ leaflets | DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex | tudaleaflet.cls - additional options to adjust titlepage color scheme * v3.09 (2021-01-12) - small patch including layout adjustments for department=mecheng + * v3.10 (2021-02-05) + - fix \thanks for titlepage=false + - extend support for all CreativeCommons 4.0 Licenses + - improve documentation \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.pdf index 8de312940f..a7c7b78b11 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.pdf index 8edd5fee14..d1270e8b44 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaExercise.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaExercise.pdf index 1ddc03da5a..05e4a5f36d 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaExercise.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaExercise.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.pdf index 5f4b5e6670..dbfddf45dd 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLetter.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLetter.pdf index 6f7c5b4a7d..f736d21be9 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLetter.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaLetter.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPhD.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPhD.pdf index dcdc21c3a9..e5cdb52c8f 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPhD.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPhD.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPoster.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPoster.pdf index 72870c3e57..1e543dabe8 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPoster.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPoster.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf index 8738115c85..a23df0332f 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaReport.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaReport.pdf index c4c7d571af..6e5319f17d 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaReport.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaReport.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.pdf index 4fe2f0763e..008e6dbff9 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaThesis.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaThesis.pdf index c82924bdb5..c636d73341 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaThesis.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/doc/DEMO-TUDaThesis.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex index 1f51b96269..c06c6549f2 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaAnnouncement.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Beschreibung \title{\LaTeX{} im Corporate Design der TU~Darmstadt} \subtitle{Aushänge mit tudaposter} -\titleinfo{Zusätzliche Informationen, die unterhalb des Untertitels eingefügt werden.} +\titleinfo{Zusätzliche Information, die unterhalb des Untertitels eingefügt wird.} %\addTitleBoxLogo*{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{example-image}} \footerqrcode{https://peitex.de} @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Beschreibung \maketitle -\section*{Grundlegende Informationen} +\section*{Grundlegende Hinweise} Die Dokumentenklasse tudaposter dient der Erstellung von Aushängen und Nicht"=wissenschaftlichen Plakaten im Stil der TU-Darmstadt. Sie ist Teil des TUDa-CI-Bundles. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex index 783bffcef2..3fdd31e5af 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaBeamer.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib index 960fe16096..96c2a0eb0b 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaBibliography.bib' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex index 6df89b6b32..8ec128cf81 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaExercise.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco index b19be8ca74..1bf5af516e 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaFromaddress.lco' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex index 770caadc3c..0366d25f33 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaLeaflet.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex index 995757a467..a8baf3cf51 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaLetter.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex index 3cdc7720cf..9dbf82e98f 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaPhD.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -156,9 +156,9 @@ Sie ist Teil des TUDa-CI-Bundles und basiert in Teilen auf dem tuddesign-Paket v Sie verwendet die Dokumentenklasse \file{tudapub.cls}, allerdings mit erweiterten Einstellungen. In diesem Dokument werden überwiegend die speziell auf Abschlussarbeiten ausgelegten Möglichkeiten beschrieben. Weitere Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten finden sich in der Datei \file{DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf} \cite{tudapub}. -Es ist voreingestellt, dass eine PDF/A-Datei erzeugt wird. Die beste Kompatibilität hierfür bietet Lua\LaTeX. Bei anderen Compilern kann dies entsprechend der Informationen in DEMO-TUDaPub zu Problemen führen. In diesem Fall sollte entweder der Compiler gewechselt oder \code{pdfa=false} aktiviert werden. +Es ist voreingestellt, dass eine PDF/A-Datei erzeugt wird. Die beste Kompatibilität hierfür bietet Lua\LaTeX. Bei anderen Compilern kann dies entsprechend der Angaben in DEMO-TUDaPub zu Problemen führen. In diesem Fall sollte entweder der Compiler gewechselt oder \code{pdfa=false} aktiviert werden. -Für weitere Informationen kann ein Blick in die zur Dokumentenklasse gehörigen Dokumentation (tudapub.pdf) hilfreich sein. Sie wird zusammen mit den Quelldateien verteilt. +Für weitere Hinweise kann ein Blick in die zur Dokumentenklasse gehörigen Dokumentation (DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf) hilfreich sein. Sie wird zusammen mit den Quelldateien verteilt. \minisec{Unterschiede der Demodateien DEMO-TUDaThesis und DEMO-TUDaPhD} Zwar basieren alle drei DEMO-Dateien auf der Klasse \code{tudapub}, allerdings sind die Basiseinstelungen dem Dokumententyp angepasst. @@ -176,8 +176,7 @@ Da die Basisklasse für beide identisch ist, kann jede Option abgeändert werden Schriftgröße&11pt&11pt&9pt\\\midrule ruledheaders§ion&chapter&all\\\midrule Basisklasse&scrreprt&scrbook&scrartcl\\\midrule - thesis&\ttfamily type=bachelor&\ttfamily type=dr, - dr=rernat + thesis&\ttfamily type=bachelor&\ttfamily type=dr, dr=rernat &\FeatureFalse\\\midrule marginpar&\FeatureFalse&\FeatureFalse&\FeatureTrue\\\midrule Affidavit\newline\rlap{(Selbstständigkeitserklärung)}&\FeatureTrue&\FeatureTrue&\FeatureFalse\\\midrule @@ -212,7 +211,7 @@ Die Klasse kann wie für Dokumentenklassen üblich eingebunden werden Die Option \code{thesis} wechselt hierbei in den Modus, der spezielle Features für Abschlussarbeiten freischaltet, die in diesem Dokument beschrieben werden. Darüber hinaus lässt sich die Klasse verwenden wie die Standard-KOMA-Script-Klasse, auf der sie basiert. -Voreingstellt ist hierbei \code{scrreprt}, dieses Dokument verwendet jedoch \code{class=scrboook}. +Voreingestellt ist hierbei \code{scrreprt}, dieses Dokument verwendet jedoch \code{class=scrboook}. Allgemein bietet \KOMAScript{} viele Möglichkeiten zu Anpassungen. Wie in der tudapub-Demo-Datei beschrieben, können hier jedoch nicht alle erläutert werden, ein Blick in die offizielle Dokumentation ist daher häufig hilfreich \cite{scrguide}. @@ -235,9 +234,9 @@ Falls die Hauptsprache nicht Deutsch ist, wäre daher die folgende Konfiguration \usepackage[ngerman, main=]{babel} \end{verbatim} -\section{Ãœbergabe der Titelinformationen} +\section{Ãœbergabe der Titeleidaten} -Die Titelinformationen werden analog zur klassichen Titelerzeugung mit \verb+\maketitle+ übergeben. Allerdings wurden die Felder um ein paar speziellere Daten erweitert. Sofern nicht anders angegeben, verfügen alle Makros über ein notwendiges Argument für die Datenübergabe, z.\,B. +Die Daten werden analog zur klassichen Titeleierzeugung mit \verb+\maketitle+ übergeben. Allerdings wurden die Felder um ein paar speziellere Daten erweitert. Sofern nicht anders angegeben, verfügen alle Makros über ein notwendiges Argument für die Datenübergabe, z.\,B. \begin{verbatim} \title{\LaTeX{} im Corporate Design der TU Darmstadt} \end{verbatim} @@ -265,7 +264,7 @@ Es ist zu beachten, dass für die Erzeugung der Titelseite nach Ãœbergabe aller \end{verbatim} Für die Erstellung Fachbereichsspezifischer Templates existiert hierfür auch ein Makro, dass ohne den Aufruf von \verb+\reviewer+ Änderungen zulässt. \begin{verbatim} - \setupReviewName{Ersatzwort für „Gutachten“} + \setupReviewName{Ersatzwort für „Gutachten“} \end{verbatim} Setzt die ersten beiden Bezeichner. Alternativ ist es auch möglich Positionen einzeln zu benennen \verb+\setupReviewName[1]{Erstferent}+, eine Ãœbergabe als Komma-Liste ist als \verb+\setupReviewName*{Bezeicher1,Bezeicher2}+ möglich. \item[institution] Einrichtung. Dieser Eintrag, wie auch die beiden folgenden, werden unterhalb des Logos auf der Titelseite platziert. @@ -301,12 +300,13 @@ Es ist zu beachten, dass für die Erzeugung der Titelseite nach Ãœbergabe aller Dies ist Bestandteil der Vorbereitung zur Anpassung der Standardlizenz, die durch die Universitätsbibliothek angepasst wurde. Die entsprechende Diskussion findet sich unter \url{https://github.com/tudace/tuda_latex_templates/issues/251} und eine Anpassung der Voreinstellung bei TUDa-CI ist für Version 4.0 vorgesehen. - Die vorgefertigten Lizenzschlüssel lauten: \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-2.0-de+ (noch aktuelle Voreinstellung), \verb+cc-by-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-4.0+. - Unterstützung bei der Wahl einer passenden Creative Commons Lizenz bietet das Projekt über seinen Lizenzfinder unter \url{http://creativecommons.org/choose/} + Die vorgefertigten Lizenzschlüssel lauten: \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-2.0-de+ (noch aktuelle Voreinstellung), \verb+cc-by-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-sa-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-sa-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nd-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-4.0+. + Unterstützung bei der Wahl einer passenden Creative Commons Lizenz bietet das Projekt über seinen Lizenzfinder unter \url{http://creativecommons.org/choose/}. + Ab Version 3.10 werden alle (Stand: Januar 2021) dort vorgeschlagenen Lizenzen von tuda-ci unterstützt. Falls ein davon abweichender Wert gewählt wird, wird dieser direkt an der Stelle des Lizenztextes verwendet. Falls der Text Gleichheitszeichen oder Kommata enthält ist eine Gruppierung notwendig. \item[titleimage] Hier kann Code übergeben werden, der den farbigen Block im unteren Teil der Titelseite ersetzt. Als Maße können hier die Längen \verb+\layerwidth+ und \verb+\layerheight+ verwendet werden. Sie passen sich dem Verfügbaren Platz an. Für ein Beispiel sei auf die TUDapub-Dokumentation verwiesen. - \item[titleintro] Ab Version 2.03 kann zusätzlich über diesen Hook ein beliebiger Text direkt nach dem Untertitel und vor den automatischen Informationen ergänzt werden. + \item[titleintro] Ab Version 2.03 kann zusätzlich über diesen Hook ein beliebiger Text direkt nach dem Untertitel und vor den automatischen Daten ergänzt werden. \item[titleaddendum] Wie \code{\tbs{}titleintro} jedoch als letztes Element des Blocks. \end{description} @@ -314,6 +314,15 @@ Es ist zu beachten, dass für die Erzeugung der Titelseite nach Ãœbergabe aller Das Makro \verb+\affidavit+ erzeugt eine Selbstständigkeitserklärung mit Unterschriftenzeile. Hier wird der oben übergebene Name/Signatur eingefügt. In diesem Dokument findet sich das Affidavit direkt nach der Titelei. +Ab Version 3.06 verfügt \verb+\affidavit+ zusätzlich über ein optionales Argument, über das der Modus eingestellt werden kann. +Es besteht die Unterscheidung zwischen \verb+digital+ und \verb+print+. Hier wird entsprechend der Vorgabe unter \url{https://www.tu-darmstadt.de/studieren/studierende_tu/studienorganisation_und_tucan/hilfe_und_faq/artikel_details_de_en_37824.de.jsp} der entsprechende Text automatisch ausgewählt. + +\begin{verbatim} +\affidavit[digital] +\end{verbatim} + +Da für Dissertationen bisher keine Option der rein digitalen Abgabe besteht, entfällt dort diese Unterscheidungsmöglichkeit. + Es besteht zusätzlich die Möglichkeit ein anderssprachiges Affidavit als Ergänzung mit abzudrucken. Um die Struktur und die ggf. notwendige Sprachumschaltung zu erledigen, existiert hierfür ab Version 2.03 eine Umgebung: \begin{verbatim} @@ -341,8 +350,8 @@ Die Option \code{custommargins} verfügt ab Version 1.10 auch über den Wert \co Hierbei ist zu beachten, dass die Einstellungen als Ausgangspunkt den Voreingestellten Satzspiegel nutzen (je nach Option mit Randnotizspalte oder ohne). Es ist möglich diese Optionen vor den eigenen mit zurückzusetzen: \begin{verbatim} \geometry{ -reset, - + reset, + } \end{verbatim} Die gilt insbesondere für die Optionen \code{includehead}, \code{includefoot} und \code{includemp}. @@ -376,7 +385,7 @@ thesis={type=drfinal,dr=phil} Im folgenden findet sich die Bedeutung der einzelnen Optionen: \begin{description} -\item[type=] Auswahl des Typus. Dieser wird auf die Titelseite gesetzt und wählt zudem aus welche Informationen für die Titelseite zwingend übergeben werden müssen. +\item[type=] Auswahl des Typus. Dieser wird auf die Titelseite gesetzt und wählt zudem aus welche Daten für die Titelseite zwingend übergeben werden müssen. Es stehen die folgenden Werte zur Verfügung (die Werte in Klammern sind die notwendigen Titeldaten): \begin{itemize} \item \code{sta}: Studienarbeit (title, author, date) @@ -396,7 +405,7 @@ Im folgenden findet sich die Bedeutung der einzelnen Optionen: \begin{verbatim} \drtext{Zur Erlangung des Grades \ldots} \end{verbatim} -\item[department=] Die Fachbereiche sind fest als Textbausteine in deutscher sowie englischer Sprache hinterlegt. Diese Option ermöglicht die Auswahl als Dokumentenklassenoption. Aus Kompatibilitätsgründen kann jedoch auch das Makro \code{department}-Makro hierfür genutzt werden. Zur Verfügung stehen:\par +\item[department=] Die Fachbereiche sind fest als Textbausteine in Deutscher sowie Englischer Sprache hinterlegt. Diese Option ermöglicht die Auswahl als Dokumentenklassenoption. Aus Kompatibilitätsgründen kann jedoch auch das Makro \code{department}-Makro hierfür genutzt werden. Zur Verfügung stehen:\par \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{${}\to{}$}l@{}} arch & Architektur\\ bauing& Bau- und Umweltingenieurwissenschaften\\ @@ -421,9 +430,9 @@ Im folgenden findet sich die Bedeutung der einzelnen Optionen: \end{description} \minisec{Abweichung von den Vorgaben für die Titelseite} -Da es möglich sein kann von dieser Vorgabe abzuweichen, existiert für Sonderfälle die Dokumentenklassenoption \code{instbox=false}. Damit wird die automatische Verarbeitung der Daten für die Boxen auf der der Titelseite unterdrückt. In diesem Fall ist der Autor jedoch selbst für die Einhaltung der Vorschriften verantwortlich. Weitere Informationen zur Konstruktion der Boxen findet sich in den Verwendungshinweisen zu Basisklasse TUDaPub. Zusätzlich sei auf die Möglichkeiten des \code{\textbackslash{}department}-Makros verwiesen, sofern die Abweichung sich auf den Text beschränkt. +Da es möglich sein kann von dieser Vorgabe abzuweichen, existiert für Sonderfälle die Dokumentenklassenoption \code{instbox=false}. Damit wird die automatische Verarbeitung der Daten für die Boxen auf der der Titelseite unterdrückt. In diesem Fall ist der Autor jedoch selbst für die Einhaltung der Vorschriften verantwortlich. Weitere Information zur Konstruktion der Boxen findet sich in den Verwendungshinweisen der Basisklasse TUDaPub. Zusätzlich sei auf die Möglichkeiten des \code{\textbackslash{}department}-Makros verwiesen, sofern die Abweichung sich auf den Text beschränkt. -\section{Erhöhter Zeilenabstand -- Informationen zum setspace-Paket} +\section{Erhöhter Zeilenabstand -- Hinweise zum setspace-Paket} Sofern die Vorgaben es erfordern, ist es möglich mit dem setspace-Paket den Durchschuss zu erhöhen. Allerdings beeinflusst dies natürlich sämtliche Zeilenabstände. Ein erhöhter Zeilenabstand sollte daher erst nach der Titelseite aktiviert werden. Allgemein ist es jedoch empfehlenswert auch für Verzeichnisse und sonstige Sonderelemente außerhalb des Fließtextes auf bei normalen Einstellungen zu bleiben. Setspace liefert hierfür die Möglichkeit, das Paket ohne Optionen zu laden und später über Makros, wie \code{\tbs{}onehalfspacing} das Umschalten zu verzögern. Alternativ kann auch durch die Umgebungen, wie \code{singlespace} lokal wieder zum Normalzustand gewechselt werden, sofern dies erforderlich ist. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex index 07ba6f38e1..5e507a8d3f 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaPoster.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPub.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPub.tex index 2f5df4da44..be5897affd 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPub.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaPub.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaPub.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaPub.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Option \code{titlepage} erlaubt es üblicherweise, zwischen Tite Die Makros wie \code{author}, \code{title}, \code{subtitle} und \code{date} entsprechen der normalen Verwendung. Für die Institutszuweisung kann ebenfalls wie gewohnt \code{thanks} verwendet werden. -Zusätzlich stehen die Makros \code{titleimage} und \code{addTitleBox} zur Verfügung um weitere Informationen bereit zu stellen. +Zusätzlich stehen die Makros \code{titleimage} und \code{addTitleBox} zur Verfügung um weitere Daten zu übergeben. \minisec{titleimage} Das Makro \code{titleimage} akzeptiert beliebigen Inhalt. Dieser wird bündig mit der oberen Ecke im Hauptteil der Titelseite platziert. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Für die Verwendung ist wichtig, dass alle im Dokument genutzten Sprachen gelade \subsection{PDF/A Konformität} Die Klasse TUDaPub unterstützt den Standard PDF/A 2b. Der PDF/A-Modus ist automatisch aktiviert. die zugehörige Option kann jedoch über \code{pdfa=false} ausgeschaltet werden. -Nun wird zusätzlich eine \code{\textbackslash.xmpdata}-Datei generiert. Ãœblicherweise werden die Titelinformationen direkt übernommen. +Nun wird zusätzlich eine \code{\textbackslash.xmpdata}-Datei generiert. Ãœblicherweise werden die Titeldaten direkt übernommen. Dies kann jedoch bei der Verwendung einiger Makros innerhalb der Felder zu Problemen führen. Beispielsweise enthält der Titel für dieses Dokument das Makro \code{\LaTeX}. Es können daher nur Textelemente übernommen werden. Ähnlich den Linkbezeichnungen über PDF-Lesezeichen. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaReport.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaReport.tex index 7e07e2574a..fc9b4efe7f 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaReport.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaReport.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaReport.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaReport.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex index 235b6b5a0c..ea8cd6ab05 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaSciPoster.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -59,16 +59,16 @@ \begin{document} \title{\pck{tcolorbox}-Poster im Corporate Design der TU~Darmstadt} \author{Marei Peischl\thanks{kontakt@peitex.de} \and der \TeX-Löwe} -\institute{pei\TeX{} \TeX{}nical Solutions, Regensburg} -\titlegraphic{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{example-image}}%TODO größe +\institute{pei\TeX{} \TeX{}nical Solutions, Hamburg} +\titlegraphic{\includegraphics[width=.5\linewidth]{example-image}} \footerqrcode{https://www.peitex.de} -\footer{Fußzeile: Falls neben den Logos andere Informationen erforderlich sind} +\footer{Fußzeile: Falls neben den Logos andere Angaben erforderlich sind} -%Instituts/Sponsorenlogos +%Instituts/Sponsorenlogos von links nach rechts \footergraphics{ - \includegraphics[height=\height ]{example-image} - \includegraphics[height=\height ]{example-image} - \includegraphics[height=\height ]{example-image} + \includegraphics[height=\height]{example-image} + \includegraphics[height=\height]{example-image} + \includegraphics[height=\height]{example-image} } \begin{tcbposter}[ @@ -79,121 +79,93 @@ % showframe, %Gitter einblenden. Für Platzierung häufig hilfreich },] - \begin{posterboxenv}[title=Zusammenfassung]{name=intro,column=1,row=1,span=4} - Die \cls{tudasciposter}-Klasse basiert auf dem \pck{tcolorbox} Paket von Thomas F. Sturm. - Sie versucht einen einfachen Weg zu bieten, wissenschaftliche Poster im Corporate Design der TU Darmstadt zu erstellen. Dieses Dokument dient als Dokumentation und Verwendungsbeispiel. - - Dieses Dokument verwendet unterschiedliche Boxentypen. Dies ist selbstverständlich für die praktische Verwendung nicht empfehlenswert. Dieser Modus dient lediglich Demonstrationszwecken. - \end{posterboxenv} - - \begin{posterboxenv}[title=Titelei]{name=title, row=2, span=2,rowspan=2} - Die Definition des Titelblockes funktioniert analog zu Standard-\LaTeX{} mit \macro{maketitle}. - - Für die Datenübergabe stehen die Makros \macro{title}, \macro{author}, \macro{institute} und \macro{titlegraphic} zur Verfügung. Letztere wird rechtsbündig unterhalb des TUDa-Logos platziert. Die \macro{linewidth} zu diesem Zeitpunkt entspricht der Breite des TUDa-Logos. - - Zusätzlich zu den Titeldaten stehen über \macro{setqrcode} und \macro{setfoot} Makros zur Verfügung, die die Fußzeile füllen. - Ein Beispiel ist in der Datei \file{DEMO"=TUDaSciPoster.tex} gezeigt - \end{posterboxenv} - -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Fußzeile]{name=footer,below=title, span=2, rowspan=2 } - Die Fußzeile ist grundsätzlich aktiviert, kann jedoch über die Klassenoption \code{footer=false} deaktiviert werden. In diesem Fall werden jedoch mit \macro{thanks} übergebene Zusätzliche Titelinformationen nicht angezeigt. - - Für die Ãœbergabe weiterer Daten stehen die Makros \macro{footer}, \macro{footergraphics} und \macro{footerqrcode} zur Verfügung. - - \macro{footergraphics} ist für die Ãœbergabe von Logos gedacht und \macro{footerqrcode} übernimmt eine URL die anschließend in der Rechten unteren Ecke als QRCode platziert wird. - - Die Fußzeile selbst erhält die Daten aus \macro{thanks}, kann jedoch ergänzt werden. Sie hat die Breite des Satzspiegels abzüglich der Logos/QRcode. -\end{posterboxenv} - - -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Platzierung der Boxen]{name=positioning,below=footer, span=2} -Bei der \pck{poster}-Bibliothek des \pck{tcolorbox} Paketes, werden die Boxen manuell positioniert. - -Dies benötigt zwar einen zusätzlichen Arbeitsschritt, erlaubt jedoch einer feinere Ausrichtung der Boxen, auch relativ zueinander. - -Diese Mechanismen ermöglichen Auch Querverweise einfacher zu positionieren. Hierfür ist ein Blick in die \pck{tcolorbox}-Dokumentation hilfreich, -\end{posterboxenv} - \begin{posterboxenv}[title=Zusammenfassung]{name=intro,column=1,row=1,span=4} Die \cls{tudasciposter}-Klasse basiert auf dem \pck{tcolorbox} Paket von Thomas F. Sturm. - Sie versucht einen einfachen Weg zu bieten, wissenschaftliche Poster im Corporate Design der TU Darmstadt zu erstellen. Dieses Dokument dient als Dokumentation und Verwendungsbeispiel. + Sie versucht einen einfachen Weg zu bieten, wissenschaftliche Poster im Corporate Design der TU Darmstadt zu erstellen. Dieses Dokument dient zur Dokumentation und als Verwendungsbeispiel. Dieses Dokument verwendet unterschiedliche Boxentypen. Dies ist selbstverständlich für die praktische Verwendung nicht empfehlenswert. Dieser Modus dient lediglich Demonstrationszwecken. \end{posterboxenv} -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Titelei]{name=title, row=2, span=2,rowspan=2} - Die Definition des Titelblockes funktioniert analog zu Standard-\LaTeX{} mit \macro{maketitle}. +% Titelei +\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Titelei]{name=title, row=2, span=2, rowspan=2} + Die Definition des Titelblockes lehnt sich an die Standard-\LaTeX{}-Strukturierung mit Hilfe von \macro{maketitle} an. - Für die Datenübergabe stehen die Makros \macro{title}, \macro{author}, \macro{institute} und \macro{titlegraphic} zur Verfügung. Letztere wird rechtsbündig unterhalb des TUDa-Logos platziert. Die \macro{linewidth} zu diesem Zeitpunkt entspricht der Breite des TUDa-Logos. + Für die Datenübergabe stehen die Makros \macro{title}, \macro{author}, \macro{institute} und \macro{titlegraphic} zur Verfügung. Letztere wird rechtsbündig unterhalb des TUDa-Logos platziert. Der Wert von \macro{linewidth} zu diesem Zeitpunkt entspricht der Breite des TUDa-Logos. Zusätzlich zu den Titeldaten stehen über \macro{setqrcode} und \macro{setfoot} Makros zur Verfügung, die die Fußzeile füllen. Ein Beispiel ist in der Datei \file{DEMO"=TUDaSciPoster.tex} gezeigt \end{posterboxenv} +% Fußzeile \begin{posterboxenv}[title=Fußzeile]{name=footer,below=title, span=2, rowspan=2 } - Die Fußzeile ist grundsätzlich aktiviert, kann jedoch über die Klassenoption \code{footer=false} deaktiviert werden. In diesem Fall werden jedoch mit \macro{thanks} übergebene Zusätzliche Titelinformationen nicht angezeigt. + Die Fußzeile ist grundsätzlich aktiviert, kann jedoch mit Hilfe der Klassenoption \code{footer=false} ausgeschaltet werden. In diesem Fall werden jedoch mit \macro{thanks} übergebene zusätzliche Titeldaten nicht angezeigt. Für die Ãœbergabe weiterer Daten stehen die Makros \macro{footer}, \macro{footergraphics} und \macro{footerqrcode} zur Verfügung. - \macro{footergraphics} ist für die Ãœbergabe von Logos gedacht und \macro{footerqrcode} übernimmt eine URL die anschließend in der Rechten unteren Ecke als QRCode platziert wird. + \macro{footergraphics} ist für die Ãœbergabe von Logos gedacht und \macro{footerqrcode} übernimmt einen URL die anschließend in der rechten unteren Ecke als QRCode platziert wird. Die Fußzeile selbst erhält die Daten aus \macro{thanks}, kann jedoch ergänzt werden. Sie hat die Breite des Satzspiegels abzüglich der Logos/QRcode. \end{posterboxenv} - -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Platzierung der Boxen]{name=positioning,below=footer, span=2} +% Platzierung der Boxen +\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Platzierung der Boxen]{name=positioning, below=footer, span=2} Bei der \pck{poster}-Bibliothek des \pck{tcolorbox} Paketes, werden die Boxen manuell positioniert. Dies benötigt zwar einen zusätzlichen Arbeitsschritt, erlaubt jedoch einer feinere Ausrichtung der Boxen, auch relativ zueinander. - Diese Mechanismen ermöglichen Auch Querverweise einfacher zu positionieren. Hierfür ist ein Blick in die \pck{tcolorbox}-Dokumentation hilfreich, + Diese Mechanismen ermöglichen auch, Querverweise einfacher zu positionieren. Hierfür ist ein Blick in die \pck{tcolorbox}-Dokumentation hilfreich. \end{posterboxenv} -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Eine Box im Stil TUDa-boxed, TUDa-boxed]{name=boxed,column=3, row=2, span=2} - Die Boxen können in verschiedenen Varianten Gestaltet werden. Die Voreinstellung entspricht den offiziellen Vorgaben, jedoch kann es aus unterschiedlichen Gründen notwendig sein, eine klarere Abgrenzung zu setzen (lobale Klassenoption \code{boxstyle=boxed} oder lokaler Stil \code{TUDa-boxed}). +% Eine Box im Stil TUDa-boxed +\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Eine Box im Stil TUDa-boxed, TUDa-boxed]{name=boxed, column=3, row=2, span=2} + Die Boxen können in verschiedenen Varianten gestaltet werden. Die Voreinstellung entspricht den offiziellen Vorgaben, jedoch kann es aus unterschiedlichen Gründen notwendig sein, eine klarere Abgrenzung zu setzen (lobale Klassenoption \code{boxstyle=boxed} oder lokaler Stil \code{TUDa-boxed}). \end{posterboxenv} +% Eine Box im Stil TUDa-colored +\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Eine Box im Stil TUDa-colored, TUDa-colored]{name=colored, column=3, row=3, span=2} + Boxentyp zwischen dem Stil \code{boxed} und dem Stil \code{official}. -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Eine Box im Stil TUDa-colored, TUDa-colored]{name=colored,column=3, row=3, span=2} - Eine Zwischenstufe zwischen dem \code{boxed} und dem \code{official} Stil stellt dieser Boxentyp dar. - - Einstellung über globale Klassenoption \code{style=colored} oder lokaler Stil \code{TUDa-colored} + Einstellung dieser Option ist sowohl über die Nutzung der globalen Klassenoption \code{style=colored} als auch durch die Verwendung des lokalen Stils\code{TUDa-colored} möglich. \end{posterboxenv} +% Box ohne Titel mit Abbildung \begin{posterboxenv}[TUDa-colored]{name=colored-notitle,column=3,row=4, rowspan=2} \includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{example-image} - \captionof{figure}{Ein Beispielbild, in einer Box ohne Titel. In diesem Fall sind der Stil {TUDa} und TUDa-colored identisch} + \captionof{figure}{Ein Beispielbild, in einer Box ohne Titel (\code{boxed-notitle}). In diesem Fall sind der Stil {TUDa} und TUDa-colored identisch} \end{posterboxenv} -\begin{posterboxenv}[TUDa-boxed]{name=boxed-notitle,column=4, below=colored} - Ein Beispiel für die den Stil \code{boxed} ohne Titel. +% Box ohne Titel +\begin{posterboxenv}[TUDa-boxed]{name=notitle, column=4, below=colored} + Ein Beispiel für den Stil \code{boxed} ohne einen eigenen Titel. \end{posterboxenv} - -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Box mit Link,TUDa-boxed]{name=relative,column=4, above=row6} - Beispiel mit Pfeil, um zwei Boxen miteinander zu Verknüpfen oder Leseabzweigungen zu generieren. +% Box mit Verweis +\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Box mit Verweis,TUDa-boxed]{name=verweis,column=4, above=row6} + Beispielbox mit Pfeil, um zwei Boxen miteinander zu verknüpfen oder Leseabzweigungen zu generieren. \end{posterboxenv} %Zwischen den Boxen kann direkt TikZ-Code eingegeben werden. Das Namensschema der Boxen als Koordinaten lautet % TCBPOSTER@.ankerpunkt -% Für genauere Erläuterungen zur Syntax, bietet die tikz-Anleitung genauere Informationen, weitere benannte Koordinaten finden sich in der tcolorbox-Dokumentation -\draw[accentcolor,line width=4pt,->] ([yshift=-1cm]TCBPOSTER@relative.east) -| ([xshift=1cm]TCBPOSTER@colored.east) -- (TCBPOSTER@colored.east); +% Für genauere Erläuterungen zur Syntax, bietet die tikz-Anleitung genauere Angaben, weitere benannte Koordinaten finden sich in der tcolorbox-Dokumentation +\draw[accentcolor,line width=4pt,->] ([yshift=-1cm]TCBPOSTER@verweis.east) -| ([xshift=1cm]TCBPOSTER@colored.east) -- (TCBPOSTER@colored.east); -\begin{posterboxenv}[title=relative Positionierung,TUDa-boxed]{name=relative,column=4, between=boxed-notitle and relative} - Beispiel für die relative Positionierung, diese Box zwischen zwei Boxen platziert. +% Relative Positionierung +\begin{posterboxenv}[title=Relative Positionierung,TUDa-boxed]{name=relative, column=4, between=notitle and verweis} + Diese Box wird zwischen den beiden Boxen \code{notitle} und \code{verweis} platziert. \end{posterboxenv} +% Papierformat \begin{posterboxenv}[title=Papierformat]{name=paper,column=3,span=2,below=row5} -Die Klasse \cls{tudasciposter} unterstützt die Papierformate A0, A1, A2 und A3. Der Wert wird über die Klassenoption \code{paper} ausgewählt: + Die Klasse \cls{tudasciposter} unterstützt die Papierformate A0, A1, A2 und A3. Der Wert wird über die Klassenoption \code{paper} ausgewählt: \begin{verbatim} paper=a0 \end{verbatim} -Die Voreinstellung entspricht \code{a0}. -Die Änderung des Papierformates ist keine Skalierung, da Schriftgrößen nicht direkt skalieren. + Die Voreinstellung entspricht \code{a0}. + Die Änderung des Papierformates ist keine Skalierung, da Schriftgrößen nicht direkt skalieren. -Um eine Skalierung eines größeren auf ein kleineres Designs zu erreichen, empfiehlt es sich das Ausgangsformat beim Druck zu skalieren oder ggf. die PDF-Datei mit Paketen wie \pck{pdfpages} oder eine PDF-Drucker umzurechnen. + Um eine Skalierung eines größeren auf ein kleineres Design zu erreichen, empfiehlt es sich, das Ausgangsformat beim Druck zu skalieren (Drucken in eine Datei mit Skalierung) oder ggf. die PDF-Datei mit Paketen wie \pck{pdfpages} umzurechnen. \end{posterboxenv} \end{tcbposter} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex index f4f3d087d1..f9d2b852d8 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/example/DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `DEMO-TUDaThesis.tex' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ custommargins=true,% Ränder werden mithilfe von typearea automatisch berechnet marginpar=false,% Kopfzeile und Fußzeile erstrecken sich nicht über die Randnotizspalte %BCOR=5mm,%Bindekorrektur, falls notwendig - parskip=half-,%Absatzkennzeichnung durch Abstand vgl. KOMA-Sript + parskip=half-,%Absatzkennzeichnung durch Abstand vgl. KOMA-Script fontsize=11pt,%Basisschriftgröße laut Corporate Design ist mit 9pt häufig zu klein % logofile=example-image, %Falls die Logo Dateien nicht vorliegen ]{tudapub} @@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ Sie ist Teil des TUDa-CI-Bundles wurde vom in Teilen tuddesign-Paket von C.~v.~L Sie verwendet die Dokumentenklasse \file{tudapub.cls}, allerdings mit erweiterten Einstellungen. In diesem Dokument werden überwiegend die speziell auf Abschlussarbeiten ausgelegten Möglichkeiten beschrieben. Weitere Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten finden sich in der Datei \file{DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf} \cite{tudapub}. -Es ist voreingestellt, dass eine PDF/A-Datei erzeugt wird. Die beste Kompatibilität hierfür bietet Lua\LaTeX. Bei anderen Compilern kann dies entsprechend der Informationen in DEMO-TUDaPub zu Problemen führen. In diesem Fall sollte entweder der Compiler gewechselt oder \code{pdfa=false} aktiviert werden. +Es ist voreingestellt, dass eine PDF/A-Datei erzeugt wird. Die beste Kompatibilität hierfür bietet Lua\LaTeX. Bei anderen Compilern kann dies entsprechend der Angaben in DEMO-TUDaPub zu Problemen führen. In diesem Fall sollte entweder der Compiler gewechselt oder \code{pdfa=false} aktiviert werden. -Für weitere Informationen kann ein Blick in die zur Dokumentenklasse gehörigen Dokumentation (tudapub.pdf) hilfreich sein. Sie wird zusammen mit den Quelldateien verteilt. +Für weitere Hinweise kann ein Blick in die zur Dokumentenklasse gehörigen Dokumentation (DEMO-TUDaPub.pdf) hilfreich sein. Sie wird zusammen mit den Quelldateien verteilt. \minisec{Unterschiede der Demodateien DEMO-TUDaThesis und DEMO-TUDaPhD} Zwar basieren alle drei DEMO-Dateien auf der Klasse \code{tudapub}, allerdings sind die Basiseinstelungen dem Dokumententyp angepasst. @@ -205,9 +205,9 @@ Falls die Hauptsprache nicht Deutsch ist, wäre daher die folgende Konfiguration \usepackage[ngerman, main=]{babel} \end{verbatim} -\section{Ãœbergabe der Titelinformationen} +\section{Ãœbergabe der Titeldaten} -Die Titelinformationen werden analog zur klassichen Titelerzeugung mit \verb+\maketitle+ übergeben. Allerdings wurden die Felder um ein paar speziellere Daten erweitert. Sofern nicht anders angegeben, verfügen alle Makros über ein notwendiges Argument für die Datenübergabe, z.\,B. +Die Daten werden analog zur klassichen Titeleierzeugung mit \verb+\maketitle+ übergeben. Allerdings wurden die Felder um ein paar speziellere Daten erweitert. Sofern nicht anders angegeben, verfügen alle Makros über ein notwendiges Argument für die Datenübergabe, z.\,B. \begin{verbatim} \title{\LaTeX{} im Corporate Design der TU Darmstadt} \end{verbatim} @@ -257,7 +257,11 @@ Es ist zu beachten, dass für die Erzeugung der Titelseite nach Ãœbergabe aller \item[publishers] Wird hier für die Ortsangabe verwendet und ist mit \enquote{Darmstadt}, bzw. \enquote{Darmstadt -- D17} (bei Dissertationen) vorbelegt. \item[tuprints] \label{page:tuprints}Ãœbergabe der Daten, sofern das dokument über tuprints Veröffentlicht werden soll. \begin{verbatim} - \tuprints{urn=1234, printid=12345, doi=10.25534/tuprints-1234} + \tuprints{ + urn=1234, + printid=12345, + doi=10.25534/tuprints-1234 + } \end{verbatim} Falls das Argument kein Gleichheitszeichen erkennt, wird der Wert als \code{printid} gesetzt und keine URN angegeben. @@ -267,12 +271,13 @@ Es ist zu beachten, dass für die Erzeugung der Titelseite nach Ãœbergabe aller Dies ist Bestandteil der Vorbereitung zur Anpassung der Standardlizenz, die durch die Universitätsbibliothek angepasst wurde. Die entsprechende Diskussion findet sich unter \url{https://github.com/tudace/tuda_latex_templates/issues/251} und eine Anpassung der Voreinstellung bei TUDa-CI ist für Version 4.0 vorgesehen. - Die vorgefertigten Lizenzschlüssel lauten: \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-2.0-de+ (noch aktuelle Voreinstellung), \verb+cc-by-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-4.0+. - Unterstützung bei der Wahl einer passenden Creative Commons Lizenz bietet das Projekt über seinen Lizenzfinder unter \url{http://creativecommons.org/choose/} + Die vorgefertigten Lizenzschlüssel lauten: \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-2.0-de+ (noch aktuelle Voreinstellung), \verb+cc-by-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-sa-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-sa-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nd-4.0+, \verb+cc-by-nc-nd-4.0+. + Unterstützung bei der Wahl einer passenden Creative Commons Lizenz bietet das Projekt über seinen Lizenzfinder unter \url{http://creativecommons.org/choose/}. + Ab Version 3.10 werden alle (Stand: Januar 2021) dort vorgeschlagenen Lizenzen von tuda-ci unterstützt. - Falls ein davon abweichender Wert gewählt wird, wird dieser direkt an der Stelle des Lizenztextes verwendet. Falls der Text Gleichheitszeichen oder Kommata enthält ist eine Gruppierung notwendig + Falls ein davon abweichender Wert gewählt wird, wird dieser direkt an der Stelle des Lizenztextes verwendet. Falls der Text Gleichheitszeichen oder Kommata enthält ist eine Gruppierung notwendig. \item[titleimage] Hier kann Code übergeben werden, der den farbigen Block im unteren Teil der Titelseite ersetzt. Als Maße können hier die Längen \verb+\layerwidth+ und \verb+\layerheight+ verwendet werden. Sie passen sich dem Verfügbaren Platz an. Für ein Beispiel sei auf die TUDapub-Dokumentation verwiesen. - \item[titleintro] Ab Version 2.03 kann zusätzlich über diesen Hook ein beliebiger Text direkt nach dem Untertitel und vor den automatischen Informationen ergänzt werden. + \item[titleintro] Ab Version 2.03 kann zusätzlich über diesen Hook ein beliebiger Text direkt nach dem Untertitel und vor den automatischen Daten ergänzt werden. \item[titleaddendum] Wie \code{\tbs{}titleintro} jedoch als letztes Element des Blocks. \end{description} @@ -281,7 +286,7 @@ Das Makro \verb+\affidavit+ erzeugt eine Selbstständigkeitserklärung mit Unter In diesem Dokument findet sich das Affidavit direkt nach der Titelei. Ab Version 3.06 verfügt \verb+\affidavit+ zusätzlich über ein optionales Argument, über das der Modus eingestellt werden kann. -Es besteht die Unterscheidung zwischen \verb+digital+ und \verb+print+. Hier wird entsprechend der Informationen unter \url{https://www.tu-darmstadt.de/studieren/studierende_tu/studienorganisation_und_tucan/hilfe_und_faq/artikel_details_de_en_37824.de.jsp} der entsprechende Text automatisch ausgewählt. +Es besteht die Unterscheidung zwischen \verb+digital+ und \verb+print+. Hier wird entsprechend der Vorgabe unter \url{https://www.tu-darmstadt.de/studieren/studierende_tu/studienorganisation_und_tucan/hilfe_und_faq/artikel_details_de_en_37824.de.jsp} der entsprechende Text automatisch ausgewählt. \begin{verbatim} \affidavit[digital] @@ -351,7 +356,7 @@ thesis={type=drfinal,dr=phil} Im folgenden findet sich die Bedeutung der einzelnen Optionen: \begin{description} -\item[type=] Auswahl des Typus. Dieser wird auf die Titelseite gesetzt und wählt zudem aus welche Informationen für die Titelseite zwingend übergeben werden müssen. +\item[type=] Auswahl des Typus. Dieser wird auf die Titelseite gesetzt und wählt zudem aus welche Daten für die Titelseite zwingend übergeben werden müssen. Es stehen die folgenden Werte zur Verfügung (die Werte in Klammern sind die notwendigen Titeldaten): \begin{itemize} \item \code{sta}: Studienarbeit (title, author, date) @@ -406,9 +411,9 @@ Im folgenden findet sich die Bedeutung der einzelnen Optionen: \end{description} \minisec{Abweichung von den Vorgaben für die Titelseite} -Da es möglich sein kann von dieser Vorgabe abzuweichen, existiert für Sonderfälle die Dokumentenklassenoption \code{instbox=false}. Damit wird die automatische Verarbeitung der Daten für die Boxen auf der der Titelseite unterdrückt. In diesem Fall ist der Autor jedoch selbst für die Einhaltung der Vorschriften verantwortlich. Weitere Informationen zur Konstruktion der Boxen findet sich in den Verwendungshinweisen zu Basisklasse TUDaPub. Zusätzlich sei auf die Möglichkeiten des \code{\textbackslash{}department}-Makros verwiesen, sofern die Abweichung sich auf den Text beschränkt. +Da es möglich sein kann von dieser Vorgabe abzuweichen, existiert für Sonderfälle die Dokumentenklassenoption \code{instbox=false}. Damit wird die automatische Verarbeitung der Daten für die Boxen auf der der Titelseite unterdrückt. In diesem Fall ist der Autor jedoch selbst für die Einhaltung der Vorschriften verantwortlich. Weitere Information zur Konstruktion der Boxen findet sich in den Verwendungshinweisen der Basisklasse TUDaPub. Zusätzlich sei auf die Möglichkeiten des \code{\textbackslash{}department}-Makros verwiesen, sofern die Abweichung sich auf den Text beschränkt. -\section{Erhöhter Zeilenabstand -- Informationen zum setspace-Paket} +\section{Erhöhter Zeilenabstand -- Hinweise zum setspace-Paket} Sofern die Vorgaben es erfordern, ist es möglich mit dem setspace-Paket den Durchschuss zu erhöhen. Allerdings beeinflusst dies natürlich sämtliche Zeilenabstände. Ein erhöhter Zeilenabstand sollte daher erst nach der Titelseite aktiviert werden. Allgemein ist es jedoch empfehlenswert auch für Verzeichnisse und sonstige Sonderelemente außerhalb des Fließtextes auf bei normalen Einstellungen zu bleiben. Setspace liefert hierfür die Möglichkeit, das Paket ohne Optionen zu laden und später über Makros, wie \code{\tbs{}onehalfspacing} das Umschalten zu verzögern. Alternativ kann auch durch die Umgebungen, wie \code{singlespace} lokal wieder zum Normalzustand gewechselt werden, sofern dies erforderlich ist. diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty index 8d208e60d5..00ddfe3e5d 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `beamercolorthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{beamercolorthemeTUDa} [\filedate\space\fileversion] diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty index d14bb87e0c..3b37cab7fd 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `beamerfontthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{beamerfontthemeTUDa} [\filedate\space\fileversion] diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty index 981e8d5ba9..7f601653e8 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `beamerinnerthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesExplPackage{beamerinnerthemeTUDa}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Inner~beamer~theme~of~tuda-ci} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty index 3e50759302..c5f13e9296 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `beamerouterthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesExplPackage{beamerouterthemeTUDa}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Outer~beamer~theme~of~tuda-ci} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty index fad8a59b72..aaf6d668e8 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplPackage{beamerthemeTUDa-mecheng}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{specific tudabeamer configuration for the department of mechanical engineering} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa.sty index 298ec134eb..c02aa76dc4 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/beamerthemeTUDa.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `beamerthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `beamerthemeTUDa.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{beamerthemeTUDa} [\filedate\space\fileversion\space beamer theme using the Corporate Design of TU Darmstadt] diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a0paper.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a0paper.clo index 5a14a4ef3e..b35377871e 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a0paper.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a0paper.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-a0paper.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-a0paper.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesExplFile{tuda-a0paper.clo}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{tuda-ci~size~adjustments~for~a0paper} \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_setup_title_sizes: { \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_title_fontsize: {{125pt}{165pt}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a1paper.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a1paper.clo index bb908952a4..d0482d01dd 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a1paper.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a1paper.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-a1paper.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-a1paper.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesExplFile{tuda-a1paper.clo}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{tuda-ci~size~adjustments~for~a0paper} \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_setup_title_sizes: { \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_title_fontsize: {{86pt}{120pt}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a2paper.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a2paper.clo index 0ea9d0d0f4..55cb9ce12e 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a2paper.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a2paper.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-a2paper.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-a2paper.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesExplFile{tuda-a2paper.clo}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{tuda-ci~size~adjustments~for~a0paper} \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_setup_title_sizes: { \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_title_fontsize: {{65pt}{82pt}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a3paper.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a3paper.clo index 7772fe8b8f..d9cacf1719 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a3paper.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a3paper.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-a3paper.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-a3paper.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesExplFile{tuda-a3paper.clo}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{tuda-ci~size~adjustments~for~a3paper} \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_setup_title_sizes: { \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_title_fontsize: {{47pt}{61pt}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a4paper.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a4paper.clo index 2756305686..9517e882a8 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a4paper.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a4paper.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-a4paper.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-a4paper.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesExplFile{tuda-a4paper.clo}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{tuda-ci~size~adjustments~for~a4paper} \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_setup_title_sizes: { \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_title_fontsize: {{36pt}{47pt}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a5paper.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a5paper.clo index 5ecb345480..155fc7915b 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a5paper.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-a5paper.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-a5paper.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-a5paper.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesExplFile{tuda-a5paper.clo}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{tuda-ci~size~adjustments~for~a5paper} \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_setup_title_sizes: { \cs_set:Nn \ptxcd_title_fontsize: {{22pt}{28pt}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-pgfplots.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-pgfplots.sty index b6e16e6df5..06047ba14f 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-pgfplots.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tuda-pgfplots.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tuda-pgfplots.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tuda-pgfplots.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} % Special thanks to: Sebastian Schöps Institut Theorie Elektromagnetischer Felder (TEMF), TU Darmstadt % The original version of this file has been inspired by the colorscheme in the Metropolis beamer theme by Matthias Vogelgesang https://github.com/matze/mtheme \ProvidesPackage{tuda-pgfplots}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space tuda-ci pgfplots color schemes] diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudabeamer.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudabeamer.cls index 79d08e9757..88ec0b5b88 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudabeamer.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudabeamer.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudabeamer.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudabeamer.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesClass{tudabeamer} [\filedate\space\fileversion\space] diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.def b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.def index 17699574ca..28f535c554 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.def +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.def @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudacolors.def' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudacolors.def' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \ProvidesFile{tudacolors.def} [\filedate\space\fileversion\space Color definitions for tuda-ci] diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.sty index ad0c8aafef..b9b76f849c 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudacolors.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudacolors.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudacolors.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplPackage{tudacolors}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Color definition for TU Darmstadt's tuda-ci bundle} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaexercise.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaexercise.cls index 0845489e97..fd0dabed9c 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaexercise.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaexercise.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudaexercise.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudaexercise.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplClass{tudaexercise} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudafonts.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudafonts.sty index c70586aedc..6b02df7ce1 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudafonts.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudafonts.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudafonts.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudafonts.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \ProvidesPackage{tudafonts} [\filedate\space\fileversion\space diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaleaflet.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaleaflet.cls index 317c49c013..35813f97b5 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaleaflet.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaleaflet.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudaleaflet.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudaleaflet.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplPackage{tudaleaflet}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Leaflets using the Corporate Design of TU Darmstadt} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaletter.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaletter.cls index b99f5820f0..91dfdec967 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaletter.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaletter.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudaletter.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudaletter.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplClass{tudaletter} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudalettersize10pt.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudalettersize10pt.clo index 87a02bbd6b..4baa0d2e0e 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudalettersize10pt.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudalettersize10pt.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudalettersize10pt.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudalettersize10pt.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This file is a slightly modified version of scrsize10pt.clo diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudamecheng.cfg b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudamecheng.cfg index f628dfef22..dc824490f4 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudamecheng.cfg +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudamecheng.cfg @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudamecheng.cfg' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudamecheng.cfg' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplFile{tudamecheng.cfg} {\filedate}{\fileversion}{Special Features the department of mechanical engineering of Darmstadt's Corporate Design (tuda-ci)} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaposter.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaposter.cls index a612ad9478..a5a614ceb1 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaposter.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudaposter.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudaposter.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudaposter.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplPackage{tudaposter}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Poster Layouts for the Corporate Design of TU Darmstadt} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudapub.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudapub.cls index 5be60f893d..852a87a963 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudapub.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudapub.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudapub.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudapub.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplClass{tudapub} @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ \@maketitle \fi \ifx\titlepagestyle\@empty\else\thispagestyle{\titlepagestyle}\fi - \@thanks\global\let\@thanks\@empty + \global\let\@thanks\@empty \endgroup \fi } diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudarules.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudarules.sty index c0a58d0e12..50efbc4b85 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudarules.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudarules.sty @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudarules.sty' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudarules.sty' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplPackage{tudarules}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Creation of colored bars for tuda-ci bundle} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasciposter.cls b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasciposter.cls index bc8657201a..1ce4463ae7 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasciposter.cls +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasciposter.cls @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudasciposter.cls' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudasciposter.cls' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplPackage{tudasciposter}{\filedate}{\fileversion}{Scientific Poster Layout for TU Darmstadt} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasize9pt.clo b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasize9pt.clo index 13ad60986d..bba5540d3c 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasize9pt.clo +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudasize9pt.clo @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudasize9pt.clo' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudasize9pt.clo' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This is file `tudasize9pt.clo' version 1.0 (2018/12/12), diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudathesis.cfg b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudathesis.cfg index 23e41029fe..60aa5ecbc9 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudathesis.cfg +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/tuda-ci/tex/tudathesis.cfg @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -%% This is file `tudathesis.cfg' version 3.09 (2021/01/12), +%% This is file `tudathesis.cfg' version 3.10 (2021/02/05), %% it is part of %% TUDa-CI -- Corporate Design for TU Darmstadt %% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- %% -%% Copyright (C) 2018--2020 by Marei Peischl +%% Copyright (C) 2018--2021 by Marei Peischl %% %% ============================================================================ %% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the @@ -26,8 +26,8 @@ %% %% ============================================================================ %% -\def\fileversion{3.09} -\def\filedate{2021/01/12} +\def\fileversion{3.10} +\def\filedate{2021/02/05} \RequirePackage{expl3} \ProvidesExplFile{tudathesis.cfg} {\filedate}{\fileversion}{Special Features for publication type 'thesis' using TU Darmstadt's Corporate Design (tuda-ci)} @@ -287,8 +287,8 @@ printid .tl_gset:N = \g_ptxcd_thesis_tuprints_tl, printid .initial:V = \c_empty_tl, doi .tl_gset:N = \g_ptxcd_thesis_doi_tl, - license .choices:nn = {cc-by-4.0,cc-by-nc-nd-4.0} { - \tl_gset:Nx \g_ptxcd_license_info_tl {\exp_not:N \use:c {g__ptxcd_\l_keys_choice_tl :}\exp_not:N \iflanguage{\exp_not:N \bbl@main@language}{}{\exp_not:n {\par\smallskip\otherlanguage{\bbl@main@language}}{\exp_not:N \use:c {g__ptxcd_\l_keys_choice_tl :}}}} + license .choices:nn = {cc-by-4.0,cc-by-sa-4.0,cc-by-nc-sa-4.0,cc-by-nc-4.0,cc-by-nd-4.0,cc-by-nc-nd-4.0} { + \tl_gset:Nx \g_ptxcd_license_info_tl {\exp_not:N \g__ptxcd_cc_license:n {\l_keys_choice_tl} \exp_not:N \iflanguage{\exp_not:N \bbl@main@language}{}{\exp_not:n {\par\smallskip\otherlanguage{\bbl@main@language}}{\exp_not:N \g__ptxcd_cc_license:n {\l_keys_choice_tl}}}} }, license / cc-by-nc-nd-2.0-de .code:n = \tl_gset:Nn \g_ptxcd_license_info_tl {\use:c {g__ptxcd_cc-by-nc-nd-2.0-de:}}, license / initial .code:n = { @@ -312,30 +312,38 @@ \url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/2.0/de/} } -\exp_args:Nnc \defcaptionname{ngerman, german}{g__ptxcd_cc-by-nc-nd-4.0:}{ - Die~Veröffentlichung~steht~unter~folgender~Creative~Commons~Lizenz:\\ - Namensnennung~--~Nicht~kommerziell~--~Keine~Bearbeitungen~4.0~International\\ - \url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/} -} +\defcaptionname{ngerman, german}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_by:}{Namensnennung} +\defcaptionname{ngerman, german}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_nc:}{Nicht~kommerziell} +\defcaptionname{ngerman, german}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_sa:}{Weitergabe~unter~gleichen~Bedingungen} +\defcaptionname{ngerman, german}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_nd:}{Keine~Bearbeitungen} -\exp_args:Nnc \defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{g__ptxcd_cc-by-nc-nd-4.0:}{ - This~work~is~licensed~under~a~Creative~Commons~License:\\ - Attribution--NonCommercial--NoDerivatives~4.0~International\\ - \url{https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/4.0/} -} +\defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_by:}{Attribution} +\defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_nc:}{NonCommercial} +\defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_sa:}{ShareAlike} +\defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{\g__ptxcd_cc_attr_nd:}{NoDerivatives} -\exp_args:Nnc \defcaptionname{ngerman, german}{g__ptxcd_cc-by-4.0:}{ - Die~Veröffentlichung~steht~unter~folgender~Creative~Commons~Lizenz:\\ - Namensnennung~4.0~International\\ - \url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/} -} +\defcaptionname{ngerman,german}{\g__ptxcd_cc_intro:}{Die~Veröffentlichung~steht~unter~folgender~Creative~Commons~Lizenz:} +\defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{\g__ptxcd_cc_intro:}{This~work~is~licensed~under~a~Creative~Commons~License:} + +\defcaptionname{ngerman,german}{\g__ptxcd_cc_sep:}{~--~} +\defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{\g__ptxcd_cc_sep:}{--} -\exp_args:Nnc \defcaptionname{english, USenglish, american, UKenglish, british}{g__ptxcd_cc-by-4.0:}{ - This~work~is~licensed~under~a~Creative~Commons~License:\\ - Attribution~4.0~International\\ - \url{https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/} +\cs_new:Nn \g__ptxcd_cc_license:n { + \group_begin: + \g__ptxcd_cc_intro:\\ + \seq_set_split:Nnn \l_tmpa_seq {-} {#1} + \bool_set_false:N \l_tmpa_bool + \seq_remove_all:Nn \l_tmpa_seq {cc} + \seq_pop_right:NN \l_tmpa_seq \l_tmpa_tl + \seq_map_inline:Nn \l_tmpa_seq { + \bool_if:NTF \l_tmpa_bool {\g__ptxcd_cc_sep:} {\bool_set_true:N \l_tmpa_bool} + \use:c {g__ptxcd_cc_attr_##1:} + }~\l_tmpa_tl{}~International\\ + \url{https://creativecommons.org/licenses/\seq_use:Nn \l_tmpa_seq {-}/\l_tmpa_tl/} + \group_end: } + \newcommand{\tuprints}[1]{% \tl_if_in:nnTF {#1} {=} {\keys_set:nn {ptxcd/thesis} {#1}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/CHANGELOG.md b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/CHANGELOG.md index cf7266c192..0beea06af7 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/CHANGELOG.md +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/CHANGELOG.md @@ -1,5 +1,15 @@ # [Unreleased] +# [1.0.5] - 2021-02-05 + +## Changed +- The class now relies on the new LaTeX core hooks. +- Documentation revised. + +## Fixed +- Setting the main language was not taken into account by some packages + (e.g. `csquotes`). + # [1.0.4] - 2020-10-14 ## Changed diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/README.md b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/README.md index e6cea4ed6b..deb9aa55b4 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/README.md +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/README.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -- `yathesis` --- Yet Another Thesis Class, version 1.0.4 +- `yathesis` --- Yet Another Thesis Class, version 1.0.5 - E-mail: `denis.bitouze@univ-littoral.fr` - Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later. See http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Typesetting the documentation of the class requires: with `yathesis-demo` package load at first place. If `latexmk` is available, it is easier to run: - latexmk -g -norc -r ./latexmkrc -jobname=these -pdflatex="pdflatex %O '\RequirePackage{etoolbox}\AtEndPreamble{\RequirePackage{yathesis-demo}}\input{%S}'" these.tex + latexmk -g -norc -r ./latexmkrc -jobname=these -pdflatex="pdflatex %O '\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\RequirePackage{yathesis-demo}}\input{%S}'" these.tex - to compile `yathesis-fr.tex` to be found in the `.../doc/latex/yathesis/french/documentation` directory as follows: diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/doc/yathesis-fr.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/doc/yathesis-fr.pdf index c78d47117a..968136c3b2 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/doc/yathesis-fr.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/doc/yathesis-fr.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/exemples/specimen/these.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/exemples/specimen/these.pdf index d7beb0e193..f536b3154b 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/exemples/specimen/these.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/exemples/specimen/these.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/source/yathesis.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/source/yathesis.dtx index 581528318b..025220931d 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/source/yathesis.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/yathesis/source/yathesis.dtx @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 2012-2020 by Denis Bitouz'e +% Copyright (C) 2012-2021 by Denis Bitouz'e % ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ %<*readme> ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -- `yathesis` --- Yet Another Thesis Class, version 1.0.4 +- `yathesis` --- Yet Another Thesis Class, version 1.0.5 - E-mail: `denis.bitouze@univ-littoral.fr` - Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later. See http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Typesetting the documentation of the class requires: with `yathesis-demo` package load at first place. If `latexmk` is available, it is easier to run: - latexmk -g -norc -r ./latexmkrc -jobname=these -pdflatex="pdflatex %O '\RequirePackage{etoolbox}\AtEndPreamble{\RequirePackage{yathesis-demo}}\input{%S}'" these.tex + latexmk -g -norc -r ./latexmkrc -jobname=these -pdflatex="pdflatex %O '\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\RequirePackage{yathesis-demo}}\input{%S}'" these.tex - to compile `yathesis-fr.tex` to be found in the `.../doc/latex/yathesis/french/documentation` directory as follows: @@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ Typesetting the documentation of the class requires: \fi % %<*class|install> -\def\yathesisversion{1.0.4} -\def\yathesisdate{2020-10-14} +\def\yathesisversion{1.0.5} +\def\yathesisdate{2021-02-05} % %<*install> \input docstrip.tex @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ See http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt ----------------------------------------------------------------------- \endpreamble \postamble -% Copyright (C) 2012-2020 by Denis Bitouzé +% Copyright (C) 2012-2021 by Denis Bitouzé ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c @@ -364,6 +364,11 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \ProvidesClass{yathesis}[\yathesisdate\space v\yathesisversion\space Yet another class for writing thesis (DB)] % \end{macrocode} % +% Pour pouvoir disposer d'autant de \enquote{flots} d'écriture dans +% des fichiers annexes que nécessaire. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{morewrites}% +% \end{macrocode} % Pour pouvoir définir des macros dont les arguments puissent être % spécifiés sous la forme "clé="\meta{valeur}, tant en argument de % "\documentclass" que de macros et environnements de la classe. @@ -379,17 +384,6 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{xpatch}[2012/10/02]% % \end{macrocode} -% Pour pouvoir disposer d'autant de \enquote{flots} d'écriture dans -% des fichiers annexes que nécessaire. Il est chargé en fin de préambule sans -% quoi la compilation s'arrête longuement à la ligne : -% \folder{/usr/local/texlive/.../texmf-dist/tex/latex/latexconfig/epstopdf-sys.cfg} -% (problème rapporté à l'auteur du package) ou à la ligne : -% \folder{/usr/local/texlive/.../texmf-dist/tex/latex/floatrow/fr-longtable.sty}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% - \RequirePackage{morewrites}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} % Pour pouvoir patcher des commandes à argument(s) optionnel(s) % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{filehook}[2011/10/12]% @@ -825,24 +819,24 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % On définit la clé de classe "localbibs" qui fait que les chapitres % contenant des références bibliographiques sont automatiquement terminées par -% leurs bibliographies locales. +% leurs bibliographies locales. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand\YAD@localbibs@common@code[1]{% \booltrue{YAD@localbibs}% - \AtEndPreamble{% + \AddToHook{env/document/before}[YAD/loadcsquotesbiblatex]{% + \@ifpackageloaded{csquotes}{% + }{% + \RequirePackage{csquotes}% + }% \@ifpackageloaded{biblatex}{% }{% - \@ifpackageloaded{csquotes}{% - }{% - \RequirePackage{csquotes}% - }% \YAD@ClassWarningNoLine{% L'ajout automatique des bibliographies locales en fin\MessageBreak% de chapitres fourni par l'option de classe\MessageBreak% `localbibs' repose sur le package `biblatex'\MessageBreak% que vous n'avez pas chargé.\MessageBreak% La classe `yathesis' va le faire pour vous mais\MessageBreak% - le recours a ce package pour la bibliographie sera\MessageBreak% + le recours à ce package pour la bibliographie sera\MessageBreak% alors necessaire et exclura tout autre outil\MessageBreak% de production de la bibliographie\MessageBreak% (notamment `BibTeX')% @@ -854,6 +848,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx defernumbers=#1% }% }% + \DeclareHookRule{env/document/before}{YAD/loadcsquotesbiblatex}{before}{hyperref}% } \yadsetup{% localbibs*/.code={% @@ -861,7 +856,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx },% localbibs/.code={% \YAD@localbibs@common@code{false}% - \AtEndPreamble{\BiblatexSplitbibDefernumbersWarningOff}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\BiblatexSplitbibDefernumbersWarningOff}% }% } % \end{macrocode} @@ -967,6 +962,25 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx }% % \end{macrocode} % +% +% Pour éviter certains comportements inattendus, on précise la langue +% principale au moyen de l'option "main" du \Package{babel}. Mais, comme +% celle-ci n'est apparue que récemment, on n'y recourt que si la version du +% package est assez récente. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifpackagelater{babel}{2013/04/15}{% + \PassOptionsToPackage{main=\YAD@mainlanguage}{babel}% +}{% + \YAD@ClassWarningNoLine{% + La version de `babel' utilisée est obsolète.\MessageBreak% + La classe `yathesis' va essayer de faire son possible\MessageBreak% + mais il est possible qu'elle produise des resultats\MessageBreak% + non prévus. Il est conseillé de mettre à jour sa\MessageBreak% + distribution TeX% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% % \section{Process of Options} % % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1120,7 +1134,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \end{macrocode} % Pour gérer les langues. % \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{babel}[2014/03/24] +\RequirePackage[\YAD@secondarylanguage,main=\YAD@mainlanguage]{babel}[2014/03/24] % \end{macrocode} % Pour pouvoir afficher un sommaire c-à-d une table des matières réduite % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1140,19 +1154,11 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \RequirePackage[useregional]{datetime2}[2020-03-02]% % \end{macrocode} % Pour faire pointer les hyperliens au début des flottants plutôt qu'au -% début des légendes +% début des légendes et pour la gestion des signets. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% \RequirePackage[all]{hypcap}[2011/02/16]% - }{% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Pour la gestion des signets -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% - \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% \RequirePackage[numbered]{bookmark}[2011/12/02]% }{% }% @@ -1167,7 +1173,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \begin{macrocode} \newlength{\YAD@vspace@before@localtoc@rule} \setlength{\YAD@vspace@before@localtoc@rule}{-1.25\baselineskip} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{parskip}{% \@ifpackagelater{parskip}{2.0a}{% \setlength{\YAD@vspace@before@localtoc@rule}{-.775\baselineskip}% @@ -1183,7 +1189,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % "\nolinkurl" du \Package{hyperref} mais sur lesquelles on a plus de % contrôle. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% \newcommand{\YAD@href}[3][]{\href[#1]{#2}{#3}}% \newcommand{\YAD@hypersetup}[1]{\hypersetup{#1}}% @@ -1207,28 +1213,8 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx }% % \end{macrocode} % -% Pour éviter certains comportements inattendus, on précise la langue -% principale au moyen de l'option "main" du \Package{babel}. Mais, comme -% celle-ci n'est apparue que récemment, on n'y recourt que si la version du -% package est assez récente. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackagelater{babel}{2013/04/15}{% - \PassOptionsToPackage{main=\YAD@mainlanguage}{babel}% -}{% - % \AtEndPreamble{% - \YAD@ClassWarningNoLine{% - La version de `babel' utilisée est obsolète.\MessageBreak% - La classe `yathesis' va essayer de faire son possible\MessageBreak% - mais il est possible qu'elle produise des resultats\MessageBreak% - non prévus. Il est conseillé de mettre à jour sa\MessageBreak% - distribution TeX% - }% - % }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% % On change l'appellation des tableaux flottants tels que traduits par le -% module \package{frenchb} du \Package{babel} de \enquote{Table} à \enquote{Tableau}. +% module \package{babel-french} du \Package{babel} de \enquote{Table} à \enquote{Tableau}. % % \begin{macrocode} \addto\captionsfrench{\def\tablename{{\scshape Tableau}}}% @@ -1310,10 +1296,6 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx }{% }% }% -% \AtEndDocument{% -% \immediate\closeout\YAD@file% -% }% -% \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.yad}{}{}% % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} @@ -1436,7 +1418,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % fonte courante et adoption des conventions typographiques % françaises, notamment la virgule en guise de séparateur décimal). % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{siunitx}{% \sisetup{detect-all}% \ifthenelse{\equal{\YAD@mainlanguage}{french}}{% @@ -1495,7 +1477,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % ordinaire ou elle-même en note de bas de page. % \begin{macrocode} \ifbool{YAD@output@paper}{% - \AtEndPreamble{% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% \YAD@hypersetup{colorlinks=false}% \renewcommand{\YAD@href}[3][]{#3}% @@ -1635,7 +1617,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % anglais. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\YAD@expression}[3]{% - \AtBeginDocument{% + \AddToHook{begindocument}{% \deftranslation[to=French]{lbl-#1}{#2}% \deftranslation[to=English]{lbl-#1}{#3}% \deftranslation[to=French]{#1}{#2}% @@ -2706,16 +2688,16 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx }{% }% \ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{title}}{% - \AtEndPreamble{\YAD@hypersetup{pdftitle=\YAD@metatitle}}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\YAD@hypersetup{pdftitle=\YAD@metatitle}}% }{% }% \ifundef{\YAD@metasubject}{% \ifundef{\YAD@metaacademicfield}{% }{% - \AtEndPreamble{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfsubject=\YAD@metaacademicfield}}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfsubject=\YAD@metaacademicfield}}% }% }{% - \AtEndPreamble{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfsubject=\YAD@metasubject}}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfsubject=\YAD@metasubject}}% }% % \end{macrocode} % Création de la commande affichant le résultat de la commande bilingue @@ -2844,7 +2826,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx }% }% \YAD@error@firstlastnames@empty{de l'auteur de la thèse}{#2}{#3}{\author}% - \AtEndPreamble{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfauthor=\YAD@firstname@author{} \YAD@lastname@author}}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfauthor=\YAD@firstname@author{} \YAD@lastname@author}}% \newcommand*\YAD@email@author{% #1% }% @@ -3031,7 +3013,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \end{macro} % % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \YAD@ifemptyorundef{\printdate}{% \ifbool{YAD@nodate}{% }{% @@ -3076,7 +3058,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % Réglage nécessaire sans quoi le titre courant de la nomenclature (si % le \Package{nomencl} est chargé) n'apparaît pas % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{nomencl}{% \let\YAD@ORI@printnomenclature\printnomenclature% \renewcommand{\printnomenclature}{% @@ -3280,9 +3262,9 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % numérotation des paragraphes vont jusqu'aux sous-sections. % \begin{macrocode} \etocsettocdepth{\YAD@tocdepth}% - \AtBeginDocument{% - % \yadsetup{#1}% - \YAD@setsecnumdepth{\YAD@secnumdepth}% + \AddToHook{begindocument}{% + % \yadsetup{#1}% + \YAD@setsecnumdepth{\YAD@secnumdepth}% } % \renewcommand{\setcounter}[2]{}% % @@ -3318,7 +3300,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % Par défaut, au début du document rien n'est numéroté et les chapitres ne % débutent pas par des tables des matières locales. % \begin{macrocode} - \AtBeginDocument{% + \AddToHook{begindocument}{% \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}% \frontmatter% \boolfalse{YAD@localtocs}% @@ -3485,7 +3467,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % Vérification, en fin de document, de l'usage de la commande "\mainmatter" et % émission d'une erreur si ça n'est pas le cas. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \ifboolexpr{% bool {YAD@mainmatter@used}% }{% @@ -3516,7 +3498,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % (éventuellement) ces commandes ne l'afficheront pas en double. % \begin{macro}{\appendix} % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \xpretocmd{\part}{% \printlocalbibs{}% }{}{}% @@ -4098,7 +4080,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % Si la commande "\maketitle" n'a pas été utilisée, une erreur est émise (en % version finale). % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \ifboolexpr{% bool {YAD@maketitle@used}% or bool {YAD@nomaketitle}% @@ -4129,6 +4111,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \clearpage \vspace*{\stretch{1}}% \begin{minipage}{\linewidth} + \expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\YAD@mainlanguage}% \begin{colophon} \printcolophontext% \end{colophon} @@ -4152,9 +4135,9 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \ifthenelse{\isempty{#1}}{% }{% \ifthenelse{\isempty{#2}}{% - \AtEndPreamble{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfkeywords={#1}}}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfkeywords={#1}}}% }{% - \AtEndPreamble{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfkeywords={#1} ({#2})}}% + \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{\YAD@hypersetup{pdfkeywords={#1} ({#2})}}% }% }% }% @@ -4182,7 +4165,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \end{macrocode} % Émission d'une erreur si les mots clés sont vides ou non spécifiés. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \notbool{YAD@keywords@used}{% \ifbool{YAD@nokeywords}{% }{% @@ -4770,7 +4753,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % Si la commande "\makeabstract" n'a pas été utilisée, une erreur est émise. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \ifbool{YAD@makeabstract@used}{% }{% \ifbool{YAD@nomakeabstract}{% @@ -5692,7 +5675,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \YAD@create@chapter{frenchabstract}% % % % \xapptocmd{\frenchabstract}{\booltrue{YAD@frenchabstract@used}}{}{} -% \AtEndDocument{% +% \AddToHook{enddocument}{% % \ifbool{YAD@frenchabstract@used}{% % \ifthenelse{\equal{\YAD@mainlanguage}{french}}{% % \YAD@ClassWarningNoLine{% @@ -5790,7 +5773,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % On définit la valeur, en anglais et en français, de la macro "\colophon" du colophon. % % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \colophontext{% \IfLanguageName{french}{% Mémoire de thèse intitulé \YAD@ifemptyorundef{\printtitle}{% @@ -5803,7 +5786,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \printauthor% }, achevé le \today{}, composé au moyen du système de préparation de document \YAD@href{https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/LaTeX}{\LaTeX{}} et de la - classe \YAD@href{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/yathesis}{\textsf{yathesis}} + classe \YAD@href{https://ctan.org/pkg/yathesis}{\textsf{yathesis}} dédiée aux thèses préparées en France.% }{% Doctoral dissertation entitled \YAD@ifemptyorundef{\printtitle}{% @@ -5816,7 +5799,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \printauthor% }, completed on \today{}, typeset with the document preparation system \YAD@href{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LaTeX}{\LaTeX{}} and the - \YAD@href{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/yathesis}{\textsf{yathesis}} class + \YAD@href{https://ctan.org/pkg/yathesis}{\textsf{yathesis}} class dedicated to theses prepared in France.% }% }% @@ -5910,7 +5893,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % Si l'environnement "introduction" n'a pas été utilisé, une erreur est émise % % (car la commande "mainmatter" n'aura alors pas été insérée). % % \begin{macrocode} -% \AtEndDocument{% +% \AddToHook{enddocument}{% % \ifbool{YAD@introduction@used}{% % \ifbool{YAD@introduction@empty}{% % \YAD@ClassWarningNoLine{% @@ -6027,7 +6010,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % Si l'environnement "conclusion" n'a pas été utilisé, une erreur est émise % % (car la commande "appendix" n'aura alors pas été insérée). % % \begin{macrocode} -% \AtEndDocument{% +% \AddToHook{enddocument}{% % \ifbool{YAD@conclusion@used}{% % \ifbool{YAD@conclusion@empty}{% % \YAD@ClassWarningNoLine{% @@ -6051,7 +6034,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % On fixe la métadonnée de la langue. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% +\AddToHook{begindocument}{% \ifthenelse{\equal{\YAD@mainlanguage}{french}}{% \YAD@hypersetup{pdflang=fr}% }{% @@ -6061,7 +6044,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{biblatex}{% \defbibheading{YAD@localbibs@heading}[\translate{lbl-localbibname} % (\therefsegment) ]{% @@ -6109,7 +6092,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx \BeforeBeginEnvironment{thebibliography}{% \singlespacing% }% - \AtEndEnvironment{thebibliography}{% + \AddToHook{env/thebibliography/end}{% \clearpage% }% }% @@ -6123,7 +6106,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \enquote{Chapitre XXX. ...} ou \enquote{XXX.XXX} qui ne devraient pas % apparaître si le dernier chapitre du document est non numéroté). % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \booltrue{YAD@nonnumbered@chapter}% \booltrue{YAD@nonnumbered@section}% } @@ -6131,7 +6114,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % Si la commande "\printbibliography" n'a pas été utilisée, une erreur est émise. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \ifbool{YAD@printbibliography@used}{% }{% \ifbool{YAD@noprintbibliography}{% @@ -6254,7 +6237,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \Package{glossaries} l'est, sans quoi les signets des glossaires % et objets assimilés ne sont pas correctement traduits. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{glossaries}{% \RequirePackage{glossaries-babel}% }{% @@ -6268,11 +6251,11 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % Le code suivant, aimablement fourni par touhami % (\url{https://texnique.fr/osqa/questions/8358/packages-glossaries-et-yathesis-pepin-de-forme-plurielle-glspl}) -% perme tque, dans le cas d'un mémoire en anglais (option +% permet que, dans le cas d'un mémoire en anglais (option % "mainlanguage=english"), les règles s'appliquant aux glossaires et acronymes % soient bien celles de l'anglais (et non du français). % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \@ifpackageloaded{glossaries}{% \IfLanguageName{english}{% \makeatletter @@ -6292,7 +6275,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % caractéristiques du document, situés dans le répertoire de configuration. % % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \ifPDFTeX \shorthandon{;:!?}% \fi @@ -6316,7 +6299,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % \subsubsection{Données caractéristiques du document} % % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndPreamble{% +\AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% \ifPDFTeX \shorthandon{;:!?}% \fi @@ -6344,7 +6327,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % \subsubsection{Macros} % % % % \begin{macrocode} -% \AtEndPreamble{% +% \AddToHook{begindocument/before}{% % \ifPDFTeX % \shorthandon{;:!?}% % \fi @@ -6370,7 +6353,7 @@ This work consists of the file yathesis.dtx % % Si la commande "\tableofcontents" n'a pas été utilisée, une erreur est émise. % \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% +\AddToHook{enddocument}{% \ifbool{YAD@tableofcontents@used}{% }{% \ifbool{YAD@notableofcontents}{% @@ -7058,8 +7041,7 @@ $clean_ext .= 'synctex.gz* run.xml tex.bak out bbl bcf fdb_latexmk run tdo listi \endinput %%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: tex -%%% eval: (doctex-mode) +%%% mode: doctex %%% ispell-local-dictionary: "francais" %%% TeX-command-default: "TeX" %%% TeX-master: t -- cgit v1.2.3